BK-737FSL-301R1-AP-1of2-82900 (Recuperado) (Recuperado 1)

737-600/700/800/900 TRAINING MANUAL
YAW DAMPER SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
22-23-00-001.fm
22-23-00
- 30 -
ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

Purpose DEU - display electronic unit
DFCS - digital flight control system
The yaw damper system keeps the airplane stable around EHSV - electro-hydraulic servo valve
the airplane yaw (vertical) axis. During flight, the
FAA - Federal Aviation Administration
yaw damper commands rudder movement in proportion to
and opposite to the airplane yaw moment. This keeps FCC - flight control computer
unwanted yaw motion to a minimum and makes the flight FMC - flight management computer
smoother. FMCS - flight management computer system
FMS - flight management system
Unwanted airplane yaw motion is caused by either of the FSEU - flap slat electronic unit
following conditions:
GPWC - ground proximity warning computer
- Dutch roll GPWS - ground proximity warning system
- Air turbulence. IR - inertial reference
I/O - input/output
Abbreviations and Acronyms LRU - line replaceable unit
LVDT - linear variable differential transformer
AC - alternating current
MCP - mode control panel
ADR - air data reference
N1 - engine low pressure rotor (fan) speed
ADIRU - air data inertial reference unit
N2 - engine high pressure rotor speed
AOA - angle of attack
NN - a number from 01 to 99
ARINC - Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
PCU - power control unit
ASIC - application specific integrated circuit
PFD - primary flight display
ATR - Austin Trumbull Radio
PLI - pitch limit indication
BITE - built in test equipment
PSEU - proximity sensor electronic unit
CAA - Civil Aviation Authority
SMYD - stall management yaw damper
CDS - common display system
SWS - stall warning system
CDU - control display unit (FMC)
TAI - thermal anti-ice
22-23-00-001.fm
CPC - cabin pressure controller
V - volts
CPU - central processing unit
Vmin - minimum safe airspeed
DC - direct current
Vmax - maximum safe design airspeed
22-23-00
- 31 -
WTRIS - wheel to rudder interconnect system
YDS - yaw damper system
22-23-00-001.fm
22-23-00
- 32 -

22-23-00-001.fm
UNWANTED YAW MOTION DUE TO DUTCH ROLL OR TURBULENCE
YAW DAMPER SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION
22-23-00
- 33 -
YDS -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION
22-23-00-002.fm
22-23-00
- 34 -

General Main Rudder PCU
The yaw damper system is an autoflight system that There are 2 rudder PCUs, a main and a standby, in the
moves the rudder to decrease airplane yaw movement vertical stabilizer. These PCUs are hydraulic actuators
caused by dutch roll or turbulence. The system operates that move the rudder in relation to pilot rudder pedal
for all phases of flight and normally engages on the inputs. The main rudder PCU is used only during normal
ground before takeoff. operations. The standby rudder PCU is used only during
standby operations.
These are the components for primary yaw damping:
The primary yaw damper uses the main rudder PCU to move
- SMYD 1 the rudder to decrease yaw. For yaw damping, these are
- Yaw damper engage switch the components on the main rudder PCU:
- Yaw damper disengage light
- Yaw damper indicator - Yaw damper solenoid valve
- Yaw damper components on the main rudder PCU. - Yaw damper electro-hydraulic servo valve (EHSV)
- Yaw damper LVDT
Yaw Damper Engage Switch and Disengage Light - Yaw damper actuator.
You engage the yaw damper system with a switch on the ADIRU
flight control panel. For primary yaw damping, system B
hydraulic pressure is necessary, and the FLT CTRL B The air data inertial reference units (ADIRUs) send
switch must be ON. The yaw damper disengage warning this inertial and air data to the SMYDs:
light is above the engage switch. For normal yaw damper
operation, the light is off. The light comes on to show - Airspeed
the yaw damper is not engaged while power is on the - Attitude
airplane. - Yaw and roll rates
- Accelerations.
Yaw Damper Indicator
SMYD 1 uses this data for detection of yaw movement.
The yaw damper indicator shows rudder movement because The SMYD then calculates a command to move the rudder
22-23-00-002.fm
of SMYD 1 primary yaw damping commands. The indicator in the opposite direction. This decreases unwanted yaw
does not show rudder movement because of rudder pedal movement of the airplane.
inputs. The indicator connects only to SMYD 1.
22-23-00
- 35 -
FMC
The FMC gives airplane gross weight to the SMYDs for

yaw damping calculations.
Trailing Edge Flaps Up Limit Switch
The trailing edge flaps up limit switches send data to

the SMYDs to put a limit on rudder movement for yaw
damping when the flaps are up.
SMYD
The 2 SMYDs are the same. When a SMYD LRU is in position

1, it does the primary yaw damper function during
normal operations.
For primary yaw damping, the 2 SMYDs must be in

operation. This is because SMYD 1 compares its yaw
damping calculations with SMYD 2 before it gives a
rudder movement command.
For operation of the WTRIS and standby yaw damping

systems, refer to the wheel-to-rudder section.
22-23-00-002.fm
22-23-00
- 36 -

FLT CONTROL STANDBY HYD

A B LOW a
QUANTITY
STBY STBY
LOW a
RUD RUD PRESSURE
OFF OFF STBY a
RUD ON
FMC
A ON B ON
ALTERNATE FLAPS LEFT AOA SENSOR
OFF TE FLAPS UP LIMIT SWITCHES
LOW a LOW a UP SMYD 2
PRESSURE PRESSURE
OFF
SPOILER ARM
A B DOWN
OFF OFF
FEEL a
DIFF PRESS
ON ON SPEED TRIM
FAIL
a
MACH TRIM
YAW DAMPER FAIL a
YAW AUTO SLAT

DAMPER a FAIL a
OFF
ON
YAW DAMPER
FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL
INDICATOR
SMYD 1
22-23-00-002.fm
ADIRU (2) RUDDER
MAIN RUDDER PCU
IN VERTICAL STABILIZER
YDS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
22-23-00
- 37 -
YDS -- FLIGHT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION
Engage Switch and Disengage Light
The yaw damper engage switch and the disengage light

are on the flight control panel (P5 forward overhead).
Yaw Damper Indicator
The yaw damper indicator is on the P2 panel.
22-23-00-003.fm
22-23-00
- 38 -


A B LOW a
QUANTITY
STBY STBY
LOW a
RUD RUD PRESSURE
OFF OFF STBY a
RUD ON
A ON B ON
ALTERNATE FLAPS
OFF
LOW a LOW a UP
PRESSURE PRESSURE
OFF
SPOILER ARM
A B DOWN
OFF OFF
FEEL a
DIFF PRESS
ON ON
YAW DAMPER SPEED TRIM
FAIL
a
DISENGAGE LIGHT YAW DAMPER

MACH TRIM
FAIL a
YAW AUTO SLAT

DAMPER a FAIL a
YAW DAMPER
ENGAGE SWITCH OFF
ON
YAW DAMPER
22-23-00-003.fm
YAW DAMPER INDICATOR
YDS - FLIGHT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION
22-23-00
- 39 -
YDS -- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION
Stall Management Yaw Damper
SMYD 1 and 2 are on the E3-2 shelf in the electronic

equipment compartment. They are both passively cooled.
22-23-00-004.fm
22-23-00
- 40 -

E3-2 SHELF
- SMYD 1
- SMYD 2
22-23-00-004.fm
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT
(LOOKING AFT)
YDS - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION
22-23-00
- 41 -
YDS -- VERTICAL STABILIZER COMPONENT LOCATION
Yaw Damper Components in Vertical Stabilizer
These yaw damper components are on the main rudder PCU

in the vertical stabilizer.
- Yaw damper solenoid valve

- Yaw damper electro-hydraulic servo valve (EHSV)
- Yaw damper actuator
- Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT).
The yaw damper actuator and the LVDT are not line
replaceable.
Access to these yaw damper components is from an access

panel on the right side of the vertical stabilizer.
22-23-00-005.fm
22-23-00
- 42 -

MAIN RUDDER PCU
LVDT (NOT SHOWN)
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC
SERVO VALVE
22-23-00-005.fm
SOLENOID VALVE
YDS - VERTICAL STABILIZER COMPONENT LOCATION
22-23-00
- 43 -
YDS -- INTERFACES
22-23-00-006.fm
22-23-00
- 44 -

YDS -- INTERFACES
Power Interface The DFCS MCP sends engage status information for FCC A
and FCC B.
Primary power for SMYD 1 is 28v dc from electrical bus
1. 28v ac from transfer bus 1 is supplied to both SMYD The FMCS provides airplane gross weight data.
1 and the yaw damper LVDT on the main rudder PCU.
SMYD 2 supplies command data from its yaw damper
The yaw damper indicator uses 115v ac from transfer function. If the two commands are different, the
bus 1. primary yaw damper will disengage.
Digital Data Analog Signals
For the yaw damping function, SMYD 1 gets digital data SMYD 1 supplies 28v dc to the solenoid valve on the
from the following systems: main rudder PCU. This enables the primary yaw damper
function. SMYD 1 then calculates and sends yaw damper
- Air data inertial reference systems (ADIRS) commands to the electrohydraulic servo valve (EHSV).
- DFCS mode control panel (MCP) The LVDT on the main rudder PCU sends rudder position
- Flight management computer system (FMCS) feedback data to the SMYD. It also sends position data
- SMYD 2. to the yaw damper indicator.
ADIRU 1 provides this air data: The trailing edge flaps up limit switch sends flap
position data to SMYD 1. The SMYD uses this data during
- True airspeed yaw damping to limit rudder movement dependent on the
- Computed airspeed flaps being in the up position or the not up position.
- Mach number
- Baro corrected altitude The left AOA sensor sends airplane angle of attack data
- Impact pressure. to SMYD 1.
ADIRUs 1 and 2 provide this inertial data: SMYD 1 also supplies 28v dc to the yaw damper engage
switch on the P5 flight control panel. This is to hold
- Lateral acceleration the switch in the ON position when the yaw damper is
22-23-00-006.fm
- Roll angle engaged. A ground discrete is sent to turn on the yaw
- Roll rate damper annunciator whenever the yaw damper is
- Yaw rate. disengaged.
22-23-00
- 45 -
YDS -- INTERFACES
The yaw damper disengage light receives power from the
Master Dim & Test system.
22-23-00-006.fm
22-23-00
- 46 -

115V AC
XFER BUS 1
YAW DAMPER
28V AC
XFER BUS 1
YAW DAMPER
28V DC LVDT
BUS 1 PRIMARY POSITION
YAW DAMPER POWER FEEDBACK
P18 CIRCUIT BREAKER COMMAND SIGNALS EHSV

PANEL AD 4
IR 2 ENGAGE POWER SOLENOID
VALVE YAW DAMPER
L ADIRU INDICATOR
IR 3 MAIN RUDDER PCU
28V DC POWER
R ADIRU
MCP 3
ENGAGE SIGNAL
ENGAGE ENABLE HI
DFCS MCP
ENGAGE ENABLE LO
FMC 01 ENGAGE SWITCH
FMC 1
A A
ENGAGE COMMAND
TRANSFER RELAY 28/16V DC
FMC 01 MASTER DIM YD DISENGAGE LIGHT
UP FLAPS UP/NOT UP & TEST FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL
FMC 2
TRAILING EDGE FLAPS
UP SWITCH S245 X-CHANNEL
22-23-00-006.fm
ANGLE OF ATTACK
SMYD 1 SMYD 2
LEFT AOA SENSOR
NOTE: THIS DIAGRAM SHOWS ONLY INTERFACES FOR PRIMARY YAW DAMPING
YDS - INTERFACES
22-23-00
- 47 -
YDS -- MAIN RUDDER PCU ACTUATOR - SOLENOID VALVE
Purpose
The yaw damper solenoid valve on the main rudder PCU

pressurizes the yaw damper system. When you engage the
yaw damper system, the solenoid valve sends hydraulic
fluid to the electro-hydraulic servo valve (EHSV) that
controls the yaw damper actuator on the main rudder
PCU. This moves the rudder for yaw damping.
Physical Description
These are the three hydraulic ports in the solenoid:
- Input pressure port for input hydraulic pressure

- Output port for the output to the EHSV and yaw
damper actuator
- Return port for hydraulic fluid to the reservoir.
An electrical connector connects the solenoid valve to

the SMYD computer.
Functional Description
When the yaw damper is engaged, the SMYD sends 28v dc

to energize the solenoid valve which ports hydraulic
fluid under pressure to the EHSV and yaw damper
actuator.
22-23-00-007.fm
22-23-00
- 48 -

HYDRAULIC OUTPUT PORT
INPUT PRESSURE PORT
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
RETURN PORT
YAW DAMPER
EHSV
YAW DAMPER
LVDT
YAW DAMPER
ACTUATOR
YAW DAMPER
SOLENOID VALVE
CONTROL CONTROL
VALVE A VALVE B INTERNAL
INTERNAL SUMMING LVR
22-23-00-007.fm
SUMMING LEVER
SYSTEM B
HYDRAULICS
YDS - MAIN RUDDER PCU ACTUATOR - SOLENOID VALVE
22-23-00
- 49 -
YDS -- MAIN RUDDER PCU - ELECTROHYDRAULIC SERVO VALVE
Purpose
For primary yaw damping, the electrohydraulic servo

valve (EHSV) on the main rudder PCU changes an
electrical command signal from SMYD 1 into a controlled
hydraulic flow to the yaw damper actuator on the main
rudder PCU. The EHSV controls the rate and direction of
the yaw damper actuator motion for rudder movement to
provide primary yaw damping.
These are the four hydraulic ports on the EHSV:
- Input port for jet pipe controller/control spool

- Return port
- Two output ports to the yaw damper actuator.
A four pin electrical connector the SMYD computer to

the EHSV.
When an electrical signal for yaw damping comes from

the SMYD computer, it moves a jet pipe in the EHSV.
This causes the pressure at each end of the control
spool to change. This pressure differential causes the
control spool to move, which changes the output
pressure in each of the two output ports. This change
in the output pressure directs hydraulic fluid under
22-23-00-008.fm
pressure to move the yaw damper actuator in the desired
direction for yaw damping.
22-23-00
- 50 -

INPUT PRESSURE PORT
OUTPUT PORTS TO
YAW DAMPER ACTUATOR
RETURN PORT
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
YAW DAMPER
EHSV
YAW DAMPER
LVDT
YAW DAMPER
ACTUATOR
YAW DAMPER
SOLENOID VALVE
CONTROL CONTROL
VALVE A VALVE B INTERNAL
INTERNAL SUMMING LVR
22-23-00-008.fm
SUMMING LEVER
SYSTEM B
HYDRAULICS
YDS - MAIN RUDDER PCU - ELECTROHYDRAULIC SERVO VALVE
22-23-00
- 51 -
YDS -- STALL MANAGEMENT YAW DAMPER
Purpose interfaces with the stall management functions and
primary yaw damping functions and provides fault data
The stall management yaw damper (SMYD) uses inertial for these functions.
data from the ADIRU and other data from airplane
sensors to detect unwanted airplane yaw motion caused Keypad
by dutch roll and turbulence. The SMYD sends commands
to the main rudder PCU to move the rudder to reduce You use the keypad to operate the SMYD BITE. The keypad
unwanted yaw. has these keys:
Physical Description - ON/OFF key to turn ON the BITE

- MENU key to go to the main and previous menu pages
The SMYD weighs 10 lbs. It uses 10 watts of power. It - UP arrow key for previous page selection in a menu
has these features on the front of the unit: - DOWN arrow key for next page selection in a menu
- YES key to answer questions
- Standard Boeing BITE module - NO key to answer questions.
- Bite instructions on the label
- BITE display
- BITE keypad.
Bite Instructions
Bite instructions on the front of the SMYD LRU describe

how to do a test of the unit and use the BITE software.
For more information on BITE, see the section on BITE

Operation later in this section.
Display
The SMYD BITE module has a two line amber display. Each
22-23-00-009.fm
line has eight alphanumeric characters. The display
shows messages about the type of fault, maintenance
message number, and fault details. For SMYD 1, the BITE
22-23-00
- 52 -

STATIC
SENSITIVE
"BITE INSTRUCTIONS"
ON/OFF:Start or stop Bite BITE INSTRUCTIONS
MENU: To display menu
YES/NO: In response to
question (?)
OR :To scroll through
menu or results
BITE DISPLAY
BITE MODULE
BITE KEYPAD
ON
MENU
OFF
YES NO
STALL MANAGEMENT
YAW DAMPER
P/N 65-52822-XX
S/N X XXX X X X X X XX X
X XXX X X X XX X X
MOD
X XX X X X X XX X XX
NOTE:
22-23-00-009.fm
THE SMYD LRU IS AN ELCTRO-STATIC
SENSITIVE DEVICE. USE PROPER
PROCEDURES WHEN HANDLING THE LRU.
YDS - STALL MANAGEMENT YAW DAMPER
22-23-00
- 53 -
YDS -- SMYD 1 - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
22-23-00-010.fm
22-23-00
- 54 -

General - Air data (L ADIRU)
- FMCS
The stall management yaw damper (SMYD) calculates yaw - MCP
damping commands using analog and digital inputs from - SMYD 2.
airplane sensors. SMYD 1 provides primary yaw damping
through the main rudder PCU. The AOA sensor input is used by the SMYD to modify the
yaw damper control law as the airplane approaches the
Power Supplies stall condition.
Primary power for the yaw damping function is 28v dc. The input from the trailing edge flaps up switch S245
28v ac is also provided as the reference voltage for is used by the SMYD to limit the rudder authority. For
the main rudder PCU LVDT. primary yaw damping, these are the limits for rudder
travel:
The SMYD supplies 28v dc to the yaw damper solenoid
valve on the rudder PCU. When the solenoid energizes, - 2 degrees with flaps Up
it sends pressurized hydraulic fluid to the - 3 degrees with flaps Down.
electrohydraulic servo valve (EHSV).
The flight control switches send positionn discetes to
It also supplies 28v dc as the hold up voltage for the the SMYDs. These inputs are used to enable primary yaw
yaw damper engage switch on the flight control panel. damping (SMYD 1) or secondary yaw damping (SMYD 2).
Yaw Damping The program pins determine airplane model and SMYD
position.
The SMYD CPU contains the control law software for yaw
damping. Primary yaw damping uses this data from these Lateral acceleration, yaw rate, roll attitude and roll
systems and sensors: rate from both ADIRUS, computed airspeed from the
onside ADIRU, gross weight from the FMCS and yaw damper
- Left AOA sensor command data from SMYD 2 are all used in the yaw damper
- Trailing edge flap limit switch S245 control law.
- Flight control switches A and B
22-23-00-010.fm
- Program pins The MCP sends autopilot engage status to the SMYD. The
- Main rudder PCU LVDT SMYD uses this data to disengage the yaw damper in the
- Inertial reference data (L & R ADIRU) event of an ADIRU fault with the autopilot engaged.
22-23-00
- 55 -
When SMYD 1 senses airplane unwanted yaw motion and the Loss of either 28v dc or 28v ac voltages will cause the
yaw damper is engaged, it supplies a signal to the yaw damper to disenage.
EHSV. The current and polarity determine the amount and
direction the EHSV moves. The EHSV applies hydraulic The rudder servo loop is also monitored for correct
pressure to the yaw damper actuator in proportion to operation. The yaw damper will disengage if there is a
SMYD 1 yaw damper commands. The yaw damper actuator difference of 0.5 degrees between the actual servo loop
then provides the mechanical input to the main rudder response and a software modelled servo loop in the
PCU. SMYD.
The LVDT on the main rudder PCU sends yaw damper A hardware limiter monitors the output of the limit
actuator position data back to SMYD 1 and the yaw function to make sure the correct limit is selected
damper indicator on the P2 panel. The SMYD uses the according to flap position. If it is not within limits,
data to compare its commanded value with actual rudder the yaw damper disengages.
movement.
The flaps up switch S245 is monitored by comparing it
For primary yaw damping, the yaw damper commands from to the input from the flap position transmitter input.
both SMYDs are compared. If the calculations of the two If there is a disagreement, the yaw damper will
SMYDs do not agree, the primary yaw damper disengages. disengage.
BITE
The SMYD has BITE test and continuous BITE functions.

It stores failures in fault history for yaw damping and
stall management functions. The keypad on the front of
the SMYD is used to interface with the BITE function.
Sensed faults will automatically disengage the yaw

damper. This will cause the amber yaw damper disengage
annunciator on the flight control panel to illuminate
and followed by the yaw damper engage switch relaxing
22-23-00-010.fm
back to the OFF position within two seconds.
22-23-00
- 56 -

YAW DAMPER
INDICATOR
28V AC
POWER
28V DC
LVDT
YAW DAMPER ANALOG SOLENOID
ENGAGE SWITCH VALVE
OUTPUTS
FLT CTRL PANEL EHSV
ANALOG MAIN RUDDER PCU
INPUTS
LEFT AOA SENSOR
T/E FLAP LIMIT SOFTWARE
SWITCH S245 CPU CALCULATIONS
PROGRAM PINS
FLT CTRL PANEL
L ADIRU IR
ARINC
L ADIRU ADR 429 CROSS CHANNEL
BUS
R ADIRU IR ARINC OUTPUTS
429 SMYD 2
FMC INPUT
MCP
SMYD 2
FAULT
HISTORY KEYPAD
BITE DISPLAY
22-23-00-010.fm
SMYD 1
NOTE: ONLY THE INTERFACES FOR PRIMARY YAW DAMPING ARE SHOWN ON THIS GRAPHIC.
YDS - SMYD 1 - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
22-23-00
- 57 -
YDS -- OPERATION
General Put the switch to the OFF position to disengage the
YDS. SMYD 1 removes power from the solenoid valve on
You use the yaw damper ON/OFF switch on the flight the main rudder PCU and, after a two-second delay, the
control panel to engage the yaw damper. yaw damper warning light comes on. The warning light
comes on any time the system disengages.
For the primary yaw damper system, there are these two
indicators in the flight compartment: Yaw Damper Indicator
- Yaw damper warning light The yaw damper indicator shows the rudder movement due
- Yaw damper indicator. to primary yaw damper commands from SMYD 1. For primary
yaw damping, rudder movement is limited to 2 degrees
The yaw damper warning light is on the flight control with flaps up and 3 degrees with flaps down. If you
panel above the yaw damper ON/OFF switch. The yaw move the rudder with the rudder pedals, the indicator
damper indicator is on the instrument panel. does not show rudder movement.
Engage Switch and Warning Light To do a test of the indicator and the primary yaw
damper system, do the SMYD 1 servo test in the SMYD
To engage the primary yaw damper system (YDS), put the BITE - GROUND TEST described at the end of this
yaw damper engage switch on the flight control panel to section.
the ON position. These are the conditions necessary to
engage the primary yaw damper system:
- Hydraulic system B is ON
- Flight control B is ON.
If SMYD 1 does not detect any yaw damper faults, two

seconds later the yaw damper warning light will go off
to show that there is normal yaw damper operation. This
switch is held in the ON position electronically with a
solenoid powered from the SMYD. Only SMYD 1 does
22-23-00-011.fm
primary yaw damping.
22-23-00
- 58 -

OFF OFF
FEEL DIFF
PRESS a
ON ON SPEED TRIM
FAIL a
DISENGAGE
WARNING LIGHT MACH TRIM
YAW DAMPER FAIL a
YAW AUTO SLAT

YAW DAMPER DAMPER a FAIL a
ENGAGE SWITCH
OFF YAW DAMPER INDICATOR
ON
22-23-00-011.fm
YDS - OPERATION
22-23-00
- 59 -
YDS -- OPERATIONS - ENGAGE INTERLOCKS
22-23-00-012.fm
22-23-00
- 60 -

General When the self check has completed satisfactorily, the
actuator solenoid in the main rudder PCU receives 28v
There are two SMYDs on the airplane. SMYD 1 controls dc and a holding ground is provided for the yaw damper
primary yaw damping and turn coordination during normal engage switch. The yaw damper warning light goes out
operation. SMYD 2 operates WTRIS and standby yaw after two seconds to show that you have yaw damper
damping during non normal operation. operation.
Engage Switch and Warning Light When the yaw damper is selected off or a fault is
present in the SMYD, the yaw damper will disengage. The
The primary yaw damper system (YDS) is engaged using yaw damper annunciator and associated master caution
the yaw damper engage switch on the flight control illuminate immediately. After two seconds, the actuator
panel. This provides the engage request to the SMYD. solenoid in the main rudder PCU is deenergized and the
The FLT CONT B switch must also be in the ON position to holding ground is removed from the yaw damper switch.
enable primary yaw damping.
SMYDs
The SMYD then does a self check to ensure that the yaw
damping function is valid. The following parameters are The two SMYDs are the same. They both do stall
required for the yaw damper valid self check: management and yaw damper functions. For stall
management functions, both SMYDs operate together. If
- Power monitor one function fails, the other SMYD will continue to do
- Software monitor stall management functions.
- Hardware monitor
- Servo loop monitor Only one SMYD does yaw damping at a time. SMYD 1 does
- Hardware limiter monitor only primary yaw damping during normal operations. SMYD
- Onside IR data 2 does WTRIS and standby yaw damping during standby
- Offside IR data operations. This is controlled by the FLT CONTROL A and
- DFCS engage status. B switches on the flight control panel.
The yaw damper function is declared valid when all SMYD 1 uses the main rudder PCU to move the rudder for
monitors pass the self check and both IR functions in the primary yaw damper function. For primary yaw
22-23-00-012.fm
their respective ADIRUs are valid or one IR source is damping, SMYD 1 compares its yaw damping calculations
valid and the autopilot is not engaged. with SMYD 2 before it sends a command to the main
rudder PCU. If the SMYD 2 calculations disagree or if
22-23-00
- 61 -
SMYD 2 fails, the yaw damper function in SMYD 1
disengages even though SMYD 2 is not used for primary
yaw damping.
Training Information Point
The electrical ground for the disengage light is

connected in series through both SMYDs. For normal
operation, it is necessary to have both SMYDs installed
on the airplane.
The light test can be done with the master dim and test
system.
22-23-00-012.fm
22-23-00
- 62 -

DC POWER
28V DC POWER SUPPLY A A
YAW DAMPER 1
BUS 1 MASTER
2 SEC WARNING
YAW DAMPER 2 SYSTEM
P18 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL DISENGAGE LIGHT
ENGAGE
FLIGHT CONTROL
ENABLE 2 SEC MODULE
YD CHANNEL
VALID
YAW
DAMPER 2 SEC
SWITCH
SMYD 1 YAW DAMPER

ACTUATOR
SOLENOID
OFF/STANDBY
MAIN RUDDER PCU
POWER SUPPLY
2 SEC
ON
FLT CONT B ENGAGE
ENABLE 2 SEC
OFF/STANDBY YAW DAMPER
YD CHANNEL
VALID ACTUATOR
SOLENOID
ON
FLT CONT A 2 SEC
STANDBY RUDDER PCU
22-23-00-012.fm
FLIGHT CONTROL
PANEL
SMYD 2
YDS - OPERATIONS - ENGAGE INTERLOCKS
22-23-00
- 63 -
YDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE
General BITE Operation
The SMYD has these BITE functions: To start the BITE, push the ON/OFF key on the BITE
module. EXISTING FAULTS? shows as the first menu item.
- Continuous monitor Push the YES key to answer questions and to move down
- BITE tests. further in the selected menu item on the display. Push
the NO or down arrow key to see the next menu item. In
Continuous Monitor some lists, TOP OF LIST or END OF LIST shows for one
second when you move to the top or bottom of the list.
The continuous monitor function of BITE monitors the Push the MENU key to exit a menu and move back up one
SMYD LRU for proper operation. When the SMYD has an level to the previous menu. One of these conditions are
internal failure a fault is recorded in fault history. necessary to start BITE:
Some faults will cause the SMYD to have no outputs for
the stall management and yaw damper functions. - Flaps Up and VCAS < 60 knots
- On-side engine N1<15% and off-side engine N2<50%.
BITE Tests
These conditions make sure that if BITE is ON, it will
The BITE tests are used to do tests of components and turn off prior to takeoff. Also, a time delay will turn
sensors that interface with the SMYD. They have these off the BITE control panel if no push-buttons are
functions: pushed for five minutes or longer.
- Quick system test Main Menu

- SMYD LRU self test
- Tests of sensors that interface with the SMYD These are the BITE main menu selections:
- Tests to show that functions are within
specification - EXISTING FAULTS
- Supports fault isolation. - FAULTS HISTORY
- GROUND TESTS
The BITE module on the front of the SMYD LRU has a - OTHER FUNCTIONS.
keypad with six push-buttons, and a two-line display
22-23-00-015.fm
with eight characters per line. At the start of the BITE, EXISTING FAULTS? shows. Push
the YES key to select this menu or use the NO or down
arrow key to go to the next main menu selection.
22-23-00
- 64 -

STATIC
SENSITIVE
ON
"BITE INSTRUCTIONS"
OFF
ON/OFF: Start or stop Bite
MENU : To display menu 1
question (?)
menu or results INTO EXISTING
EXISTING YES
FAULTS?
FAULTS
NO
(2 lines, 8 alpha-
numeric characters)
ON-SIDE ENGINE N1 < 15%
OFF-SIDE ENGINE N2 < 50%
BITE
INTO FAULTS ENABLE
ON FAULTS YES
HISTORY? FLAPS UP
MENU HISTORY AIRSPEED < 60 KNOTS
OFF NO
YES NO
INTO GROUND
GROUND YES
TESTS?
STALL MANAGEMENT TESTS
YAW DAMPER NO
P/N 65-52822-XX
S/N X X XX X X X X X XX X
XXXXXXX XXXX
MOD
X X X X X X X XX X X X INTO
OTHER YES
OTHER
FUNCTIONS FUNCTNS?
1 SHOWS TOP OF LIST FOR 1 SECOND
22-23-00-015.fm
NO
2 SHOWS END OF LIST FOR 1 SECOND

2
YDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE
22-23-00
- 65 -
YDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - EXISTING FAULTS
Existing Faults To see more faults, push the up arrow key (previous) to
go back to MORE DETAILS?, then push NO or the down
The EXISTING FAULTS test checks the interfaces between arrow key (next) to see if there are more faults.
the SMYD and airplane sensors to checks for current
faults. To do the existing faults test, do these steps: The BITE for SMYD 1 interfaces with various airplane
sensors to record faults for the stall management and
- Turn ON the SMYD BITE primary yaw damper functions for these systems:
- EXISTING FAULTS? shows as the first menu item
- Push the YES key to enter EXISTING FAULTS. - Primary yaw damping system
- Stall Warning System
When you push the YES key for EXISTING FAULTS, the SMYD - Autoslat system
BITE will do a check for current faults. If there are - Performance data.
no faults, the display shows NO FAULTS.
Reset Latches
If there are faults either for yaw damping or stall
management functions, the the fault description starts After the display of the last fault, the display asks
with fault 1. If you then push the down arrow key, the RESET LATCHES?. Only some faults will latch. To reset,
display will ask if you want to see MORE DETAILS? about push the YES switch. The display shows RESET IN
the fault. You can push YES to see more details for the PROGRESS while it resets the latched faults.
fault. Or you can push NO or the down arrow key to go to
the next fault.
More Details
If you push the YES key when MORE DETAILS? shows, it

will show the maintenance message number for fault 1.
You can then push the down arrow key to show
thesedetails for the fault:
- Flight deck effect(s) for the fault
22-23-00-016.fm
- Flight phase in which the fault was detected
- The most likely LRU causing the fault
- Hard or intermittent fault and if it is latched.
22-23-00
- 66 -

T O P O F T O P O F
L I S T L I S T
FAULT
DESCRIPTION
E X I S T I N G T O P O F
YES (FAULT 1)
F A U L T S ? L I S T
MAINTENANCE
F A U L T M O R E M S G N O : MESSAGE NUMBER
YES
H I S T O R Y ? D E T A I L S ? X X - Y Y Z Z Z
FAULT DETAILS:
G R O U N D (FAULT FLT DECK EFFECT
T E S T S ? DETAILS) FLIGHT PHASE
(FAULT N) MOST LIKELY LRU
LATCHED OR NOT
O T H E R E N D O F
F U N C T N S ? M O R E YES L I S T
D E T A I L S ?
E N D O F
L I S T R E S E T
YES
L A T C H E S ?
E N D O F
22-23-00-016.fm
L I S T
R E S E T I N
P R O G R E S S
YDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - EXISTING FAULTS
22-23-00
- 67 -
YDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - FAULT HISTORY
Fault History push the down arrow key, the display first shows MORE
DETAILS? to ask if you want to see details for fault 1.
The fault history selection in the SMYD BITE shows If you push the YES key, the display shows details for
fault information by flight leg stored in non-volatile fault 1. Under MORE DETAILS? if you push NO or the down
memory (NVM). Monitors in the SMYD store fault data in arrow key, the display goes to the next fault in that
NVM during these conditions: flight leg.
- System tests using the SMYD BITE Under MORE DETAILS? for fault 1 if you say YES, the
- Continuous monitoring during normal operation display first shows the maintenance message number for
- Power up tests. fault 1. If you then push the down arrow key, the
display shows these details for fault 1:
Faults are stored for this number of flight legs:
- Flight deck effect(s) (FDE)
- Last 64 flight legs - Flight phase when the fault was detected
- Maximum of 256 faults. - The most likely LRU that caused the fault
- Hard or intermittent fault and if it is latched.
Only flight legs that have faults show in fault
history. The flight leg changes when the airplane goes To see more faults, push the up arrow key (previous) to
from the ground to air except during touch and go go back to MORE DETAILS? then push the NO or down arrow
operations when the airspeed remains above 60 KCAS. keys to see if there are more faults under the selected
flight leg. To see additional flight legs, push the
For fault information by flight leg, do these steps: MENU key to go back to the flight legs sub-menu.
- Turn on the SMYD BITE

- Use the down arrow key to scroll to FAULT HISTORY?
- When FAULT HISTORY? shows, push the YES key
- Use the up or down arrow keys to scroll to the
desired flight leg and then push the YES key.
More Details
22-23-00-017.fm
After you select a flight leg with the YES key, the
display shows fault 1 for that flight leg. If you then
22-23-00
- 68 -

T O P O F T O P O F T O P O F
L I S T L I S T L I S T
E X I S T I N G F L I G H T T O P O F
YES (FAULT 1)
F A U L T S ? L E G 0 ? L I S T
F A U L T F L I G H T M O R E M S G N O :
YES YES D E T A I L S ? YES MENU
H I S T O R Y ? L E G ( N ) ? X X - Y Y Z Z Z
USE THE MENU KEY
OR NO TO RETURN TO THE
PREVIOUS MENU
G R O U N D E N D O F
(FAULT N) (TYPE) MENU
T E S T S ? L I S T
O T H E R M O R E E N D O F
D E T A I L S ? YES L I S T
F U N C T N S ?
E N D O F E N D O F
L I S T L I S T
22-23-00-017.fm
YDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - FAULT HISTORY
22-23-00
- 69 -
YDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - GROUND TESTS
Ground Tests information under MORE DETAILS is the same as for the
existing faults test that was discussed previously.
GROUND TESTS is one of four main menu items in the SMYD
BITE. On this menu, you can do these functions: Self Tests
- SMYD LRU self test The SELF TEST does a check of the SMYD LRU for internal
- See the status of discrete inputs and analog faults. When you push YES for self tests, the display
inputs to the SMYD shows TEST IN PROGRESS until the test is complete. If
- See the activity status of ARINC 429 inputs the SMYD passes the test, the display shows SMYD LRU
- Servo test of the yaw damper components on the OK. If the SMYD does not pass the test, the display
rudder PCU shows SMYD LRU FAIL for 2 seconds, then shows the first
- Test of the BITE display. fault.
These are the menu selections: Discrete Inputs
- SELF TESTS You do a check of the status of these discrete inputs

- DISCRETE INPUTS from the DISCRETE INPUTS menu for SMYD 1:
- ARINC 429 INPUTS
- ANALOG INPUTS - Air/ground relays
- SERVO TEST - Flaps Up limit switches
- DISPLAY TEST. - FLT CONTROL B switch
- Yaw damper engage switch
To start one of these tests, do these steps: - TO/GA switches (OPEN or GROUND)
- Program pin selections
- Turn ON the SMYD BITE - Autoslat power availability (PRESENT or MISSING)
- On the main menu, use the down (or up) arrow key to - Stick shaker power availability
scroll to GROUND TESTS? and push the YES key - Yaw damper power availability.
ground test that you want and push the YES key. Use the up (previous) and down (next) arrow keys to
move through the list of discrete inputs.
22-23-00-018.fm
If the ground test that you selected passes, the
display shows TEST PASSED. If the test fails, the
display shows a fault message under MORE DETAILS. The
22-23-00
- 70 -

ARINC 429 Test Servo Test
On the ARINC 429 INPUT menu, you can do a check of the With the SERVO TEST you do a test of the yaw damper
activity status of these ARINC 429 buses: components on the rudder PCUs and the interfaces
between the SMYDs and the rudder PCUs. The SMYD 1 BITE
- On-side IR bus does a test of these primary yaw damper components on
- Off-side IR bus the main rudder PCU:
- On-side ADR bus
- CDS DEU bus - Yaw damper solenoid valve
- FMC bus - Yaw damper EHSV
- DFCS MCP bus - Yaw damper LVDT.
- SMYD Cross-channel bus.
Display Test
Push the YES switch to see if the bus is ACTIVE or
INACTIVE. Use the up and down arrow keys to move The DISPLAY TEST lets you do a test of the display on
through the list. the BITE module on the front of the SMYD. To do a test
of the display, push the YES key when the DISPLAY TEST
Analog Inputs prompt shows.
On the ANALOG INPUTS menu, you do a check of the status This test takes 10 seconds. All the LEDs on the left
of data from analog sensors that send data to the half of the top line come on first, then all the LEDs on
SMYDs. For SMYD 1, you can do a check of these analog the right half come on. Next, all the LEDs on the left
sensors for primary yaw damping: half of the bottom line come on, then all the LEDs on
the right half come on. There are eight alphanumeric
- Left AOA sensor characters on each of the two lines. When the test is
- Right flap position transmitter complete, DISPLAY TEST? shows on the display. Push the
- LVDT on main rudder PCU. MENU key to return to the previous menu.
Push the YES switch to select a sensor. Use the up Ground Tests Passed
(previous) or down (next) arrow keys to move through
22-23-00-018.fm
the list. If the ground test that you selected passes, the
display shows a fault message under MORE DETAILS. The
22-23-00
- 71 -
information under MORE DETAILS is the same as for the
existing faults test that were discussed in a previous
section.
22-23-00-018.fm
22-23-00
- 72 -

T O P O F T O P O F
L I S T L I S T
E X I S T I N G S E L F
F A U L T S ? YES START THE TEST
T E S T ?
F A U L T D I S C R E T E
YES START THE TEST
H I S T O R Y ? I N P U T S
G R O U N D A R I N C 4 2 9
YES YES START THE TEST
T E S T S ? I N P U T S ?
O T H E R A N A L O G
YES START THE TEST
F U N C T N S ? I N P U T S ?
1
2
E N D O F S E R V O
L I S T YES START THE TEST
T E S T ?
D I S P L A Y
22-23-00-018.fm
1 USE THE UP OR DOWN ARROW KEYS
TO SCROLL THROUGH THE MENU T E S T ? YES START THE TEST
2 PUSH THE YES KEY TO START THE TEST
YDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - GROUND TESTS
22-23-00
- 73 -
YDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - SERVO TEST
Ground Tests - Servo Test During the sweep test, the SMYD 1 servo command is
compared to the LVDT value from the main rudder PCU to
Under the GROUND TESTS menu, the SMYD 1 SERVO TEST does see if the rudder moves the commanded value. Rudder
a test of the yaw damper components on the main rudder movement shows on the SMYD BITE display in degrees of
PCU for the primary yaw damping system. The SERVO TEST rudder travel, and on the yaw damper indicator in the
consists of these two tests: flight deck.
- ZERO COMMAND If the test passes, the display shows TEST PASSED. Push
- SWEEP TEST. the MENU key to go to the previous sub-menu, SERVO
TEST. If the test fails, the display shows TEST FAILED
For these tests, hydraulic system B pressure is and then shows the first fault. Push the down arrow key
necessary and the flight control system B switch on the and the display asks if you want to see MORE DETAILS.
flight control panel must be ON. Push YES to see more details about the fault.
The BITE provides the instructions to do these tests.

BITE provides warnings about rudder movement and asks
you to make sure the rudder area is clear of equipment
and personnel before you start the test.
Zero Command
For the ZERO COMMAND test, the SMYD commands the rudder
to move to the zero position. SMYD 1 then compares its
commanded value to the value from the LVDT on the main
rudder PCU for rudder position. BITE shows the LVDT
values in degrees.
Sweep Test
For the SWEEP TEST, SMYD 1 commands the main rudder PCU
22-23-00-020.fm
to move the rudder left, right, and then to the zero
position. During this test, rudder travel is limited to
2 degrees with flaps up, and 3 degrees with flaps down.
22-23-00
- 74 -

S E R V O F L T C T R L R U D D E R
T E S T ? B O N ? M O V I N G
R U D C M D T E S T
YES YES L E F T P A S S E D Y D C M D
( V A L U E )
MENU
W A R N I N G ! Y A W D M P R L V D T
W A R N I N G ! E N G A G E D ? ( V A L U E )
L V D T
S E R V O NO
( V A L U E )
T E S T ?
R U D D E R R U D C M D
YES
M O V E M E N T R I G H T
E N D Z E R O
1 OR T E S T C O M M A N D ?
F A I L E D
R U D D E R Z E R O L V D T
YES ( V A L U E )
C L E A R E D ? C O M M A N D ?
NO (FAULT 1)
YES
YES S W E E P R U D C M D NO
YES Z E R O
T E S T ?
M O RE
S Y S B D E T A I L S ? R U D D E R
HY D O N ? L V D T M O V I N G
( V A L U E )
YES PUSH YES FOR
MORE DETAILS
22-23-00-020.fm
YES
1 BITE SHOWS INIT NOT COMPLETE MENU USE THE MENU KEY TO RETURN
IF INITIALIZATION IS NOT COMPLETE TO THE PREVIOUS MENU
YDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - SERVO TEST
22-23-00
- 75 -
YDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - OTHER FUNCTIONS
Other Functions - ARINC 429 inputs
- ARINC 429 low speed outputs
OTHER FUNCTIONS is the last of four main menu items in - ARINC 429 high speed outputs.
the SMYD BITE. It has these sub-menus:
You can see the actual data being transmitted on data
- SYSTEM CONFIG words that you select for these systems:
- I/O MONITOR
- SET OUTPUTS. - On-side IR bus
- Off-side IR bus
To enter OTHER FUNCTIONS, push the YES key for this - On-side ADR bus
selection. You can then scroll through the sub-menu - CDS DEU bus
items with the arrow keys, and push the YES key to see - FMC bus
data for the desired selection. - DFCS MCP bus
- SMYD cross-channel bus.
System Configuration
The value of the data transmitted on each data word
In the SYSTEM CONFIG sub-menu, you can verify these shows and includes the units such as degrees or degrees
system configurations for the SMYD LRU: per second, knots airspeed, gross weight, and Bit
status whether 1 or 0.
- Part number
- Software Level Refer to the section on SMYD digital interfaces for
- Position (1 or 2) in E/E bay information about digital input/output data.
- Airplane model
- FAA or CAA/FAA. Set Outputs
This menu provides hardware part number and software In the SET OUTPUTS sub-menu, you do a test of the two
level, SMYD position, airplane type, and FAA or FAA/CAA output signals for EFSM operation. SS CMD does a test
configuration for speed tape displays of Vmo/Mmo. of the 28v dc power supply to the stick shaker (SS) and
the elevator feel shift module (EFSM). The combined SS
I/O Monitor CMD & EFSM CMD does a test of the electrical ground
22-23-00-019.fm
signal provided to the EFSM and completes the circuit
In the I/O MONITOR sub-menu you can verify these ARINC for EFSM operation.
429 input/output data to the SMYD:
22-23-00
- 76 -

T O P O F T O P O F T O P O F
L I S T L I S T L I S T
TO LIST OF DISPLAYS ARINC

E X I S T I N G S Y S T E M SYSTEM A R I N C 4 29
YES YES 429 INPUTS ON
F A U L T S ? C O N F I G ? CONFIGURATION I N P U T S ? DATA WORDS
ITEMS
NO NO NO
DISPLAYS ARINC
F A U L T I / O A R I N C 4 29 429 LOW SPEED
YES YES
H I S T O R Y ? M O N I T O R ? O U T P U T S? OUTPUTS ON
DATA WORDS
DISPLAYS ARINC
G R O U N D S E T TO SS CMD AND O T H E R 429 HIGH SPEED
YES YES
T E S T S ? O U T P U T S ? EFSM CMD TESTS D A T A ? OUTPUTS ON
DATA WORDS
O T H E R E N D O F E N D O F
YES L I S T
F U N C T N S ? L I S T
E N D O F
L I S T
22-23-00-019.fm
MENU USE THE MENU KEY TO RETURN
TO THE PREVIOUS MENU
YDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - OTHER FUNCTIONS
22-23-00
- 77 -
YDS -- SMYD 1 - SYSTEM SUMMARY
General
This page is for reference.
22-23-00-021.fm
22-23-00
- 78 -

28V DC
28V DC YAW DAMPER
28V AC ENGAGE SWITCH
FLAPS UP/NOT UP YD ENGAGE YAW DAMPER

INTERLOCK ENGAGE LIGHT
TE FLAPS UP LIMIT SWITCHES
FLAP POSITION
TE FLAP POSITION XMTRS YD ENGAGE
COMMAND SOLENOID VALVE
ANGLE OF ATTACK PRIMARY YD
COMMANDS EHSV
LEFT AOA SENSOR
YD ACTUATOR
POSITION LVDT
FLT CTRL B SWITCH ON/OFF
YD ENGAGE SWITCH ON/OFF MAIN RUDDER PCU
FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL RUDDER MOVEMENT

FOR PRIMARY
IR DATA YAW DAMPING
ADR DATA
YAW DAMPER
L ADIRU INDICATOR
IR DATA X-CHANNEL BUS
R ADIRU
SMYD 2
FMC
RA
22-23-00-021.fm
NOTE: THIS PAGE SHOWS SMYD 1
INTERFACES FOR THE PRIMARY
MCP SMYD 1 YAW DAMPING SYSTEM ONLY.
YDS - SMYD 1 - SYSTEM SUMMARY
22-23-00
- 79 -
WHEEL TO RUDDER INTERCONNECT SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION
Purpose LVDT - linear variable differential transformer
MCP - mode control panel (DFCS)
The wheel to rudder interconnect system (WTRIS) assists N1 - engine low pressure rotor (fan) speed
turns during flight control manual reversion operations
N2 - engine high pressure rotor speed
when both flight control A and B hydraulics are OFF,
and the standby system is ON. The WTRIS commands a NN - a number from 01 to 99
small amount of rudder movement as a function of the PCU - power control unit
captain control wheel aileron input to help turns. SMYD - stall management yaw damper
V - volts
Abbreviations and Acronyms WTRIS - wheel to rudder interconnect system
YDS - yaw damper system
AC - alternating current
ADR - air data reference
ADIRU - air data inertial reference unit
AOA - angle of airflow
ARINC - Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ATR - Austin Trumbull Radio
BITE - built-in test equipment
CAA - Civil Aviation Authority
CDS - common display system
CPU - central processing unit
DC - direct current
DEU - display electronic unit
EHSV - electrohydraulic servo valve
FAA - Federal Aviation Administration
FMC - flight management computer
27-24-00-001.fm
IR - inertial reference
I/O - input/output
LRU - line replaceable unit
27-24-00
- 80 -

YAW DAMPER COMPONENTS

ON STANDBY RUDDER PCU
SMYD 2
(E/E BAY)
27-24-00-001.fm
CONTROL WHEEL
POSITION SENSOR
(CAPT SIDE)
WHEEL TO RUDDER INTERCONNECT SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION
27-24-00
- 81 -
WTRIS -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION
27-24-00-002.fm
27-24-00
- 82 -

General SMYD 2 to calculate a command for left/right rudder
movement for WTRIS.
The wheel-to-rudder interconnect system (WTRIS) moves
the rudder to help turns during flight control manual Yaw Damper Engage Switch and Disengage Light
reversion when on standby hydraulics. For the WTRIS
function SMYD 2 has interfaces with these components: You engage WTRIS and standby yaw damping with the yaw
damper switch on the flight control panel. The
- Control wheel position sensor (captain) disengage warning light is above the switch.
- Yaw damper engage switch
- Yaw damper disengage light Standby Rudder PCU
- Flight control panel switches
- Standby yaw damper solenoid valve The standby rudder PCU is a hydraulic actuator that
- Standby EHSV moves the rudder in response to pilot rudder inputs
- Standby LVDT when on standby hydraulic pressure. During standby
- FMC operation SMYD 2 sends commands to the yaw damper
- Trailing edge flaps up limit switches components on the standby rudder PCU.
- Left flap position transmitter.
ADIRU
The air data inertial reference units (ADIRUs) send
SMYD 2 gives rudder movement commands for WTRIS and data to the SMYDs. The data includes airspeed,
standby yaw damping and turn coordination during flight attitude, and yaw and roll rates and accelerations.
control manual reversion when on standby hydraulics.
SMYD 2 receives data from airplane sensors, switches FMC
and components. SMYD 2 uses the data to calculate and
send commands to the standby rudder PCU to move the The FMC gives airplane gross weight to the SMYDs.
rudder.
Trailing Edge Flaps Up Limit Switches
Control Wheel Position Sensor
The trailing edge flaps up limit switches send data to
27-24-00-002.fm
The captain control wheel (CW) position sensor senses the SMYD to put a limit on rudder travel when the flaps
pilot aileron input and sends an analog signal to the are up.
27-24-00
- 83 -
Left Flap Position Transmitter
The left flap position transmitter sends data to SMYD

2.
27-24-00-002.fm
27-24-00
- 84 -


A B LOW
QUANTITY
STBY STBY
LOW
RUD RUD PRESSURE
OFF OFF STBY
RUD ON
A ON B ON
ALTERNATE FLAPS
OFF
LOW LOW UP
PRESSURE PRESSURE
OFF
SPOILER ARM
A B DOWN
CONTROL WHEEL
OFF OFF
FEEL POSITION SENSOR
ON ON
DIFF PRESS
SPEED TRIM
FWD (CAPT SIDE)
FAIL
MACH TRIM
YAW DAMPER
YAW
FAIL
AUTO SLAT
OTHER SENSORS
DAMPER FAIL
FMC
OFF RIGHT AOA SENSOR
ON TE FLAPS UP LIMIT SWITCHES
LEFT FLAP POSITION TRANSMITTER
RUDDER
SMYD 2
27-24-00-002.fm ADIRU (2) STANDBY RUDDER PCU
WTRIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
27-24-00
- 85 -
WTRIS -- COMPONENT LOCATIONS
Flight Compartment
The yaw damper engage switch and the disengage light

are on the flight control panel.
Forward Nose Compartment
The control wheel position sensors are at the bottom of

the captain and first officer control columns below the
floor. Only the captain sensor sends data to SMYD 2.
27-24-00-003.fm
27-24-00
- 86 -

FLIGHT CONTROL FLT CONTROL

A B
STANDBY HYD
a
SYSTEM A SWITCH LOW
QUANTITY
STBY STBY a
LOW
RUD RUD PRESSURE
OFF OFF STBY a
RUD ON
A ON B ON
ALTERNATE FLAPS
OFF
LOW a LOW a UP
PRESSURE PRESSURE
OFF
FLIGHT CONTROL SPOILER ARM
SYSTEM B SWITCH A B DOWN
OFF OFF a
FEEL
DIFF PRESS
ON ON SPEED TRIM
YAW DAMPER FAIL a
DISENGAGE LIGHT YAW DAMPER

MACH TRIM
FAIL a
AUTO SLAT
YAW DAMPER YAW
DAMPER a FAIL a
ENGAGE SWITCH
OFF
ON
27-24-00-003.fm
FWD CAPT CONTROL WHEEL
POSITION SENSOR
WTRIS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS
27-24-00
- 87 -
WTRIS -- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATIONS
The SMYD 2 is on the E3-2 shelf in the electronic

equipment bay.
27-24-00-004.fm
27-24-00
- 88 -

E3-2 SHELF
- SMYD 1 (REF)
- SMYD 2
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT

(LOOKING AFT)
27-24-00-004.fm
WTRIS - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATIONS
27-24-00
- 89 -
WTRIS -- INTERFACES
Power on the standby rudder PCU sends rudder position data to
SMYD 2 about rudder movement.
SMYD 2 gets 28v dc from DC bus 1 and 28v ac from
transfer bus 1. 28v dc power goes from SMYD 2 to the yaw The trailing edge flaps up limit switches send flaps
damper engage switch. up/not up data to SMYD 2 to limit rudder movement when
the flaps are up.
The linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) on
the standby rudder PCU gets 28v ac from the same The left flap position transmitter sends flap position
circuit as SMYD 2. data to SMYD 2 to use in stall warning, WTRIS and yaw
damping command calculation.
Digital Data
The right AOA sensor sends angle-of-airflow information
SMYD 2 receives airplane gross weight from the FMC. to SMYD 2 to use in stall warning, WTRIS and yaw
damping command calculation.
SMYD 2 receives these air data from the right ADIRU:
Power goes from the DC power and dim control to the yaw
- Airspeed damper disengage light.
- Impact pressure.
The captain control wheel (CW) position sensor sends
SMYD 2 receives these inertial data from the left and control wheel aileron input information to SMYD 2 for
right ADIRUs: the WTRIS function.
- Lateral acceleration During standby hydraulic operations, when you turn ON

- Roll angle the yaw damper engage switch, an engage signal goes
- Roll rate through SMYD 2 to the yaw damper solenoid valve on the
- Yaw rate. standby rudder PCU to engage the yaw damper. SMYD 2
commands rudder movement using the standby EHSV. The
Analog Signals flight control panel switches for system A and B must
be in the OFF or STBY RUD position to enable SMYD 2 for
SMYD 2 sends commands to the standby rudder PCU to WTRIS and standby yaw damping.
27-24-00-006.fm
assist turns during flight control manual reversion,
and for standby yaw damping/turn coordination. The LVDT
27-24-00
- 90 -

28V AC
XFR BUS 1
YAW DAMPER CONTROL WHEEL
28V DC POSITION
BUS 1
YAW DAMPER CAPT CONTROL WHEEL
POSITION SENSOR
P6-1 CB PANEL
AIRSPEED LVDT YAW DAMPER

IMPACT PRESSURE RUDDER POSITION
RUDDER
LATERAL ACC FEEDBACK
ROLL ANGLE COMMAND EHSV
ROLL RATE SIGNALS
YAW RATE
LATERAL ACC 28V DC POWER
ROLL ANGLE SOLENOID VALVE
RIGHT ADIRU ENGAGE COMMAND
ROLL RATE
YAW RATE
STANDBY RUDDER PCU
LEFT ADIRU
GROSS WEIGHT ENGAGE SWITCH SOLENOID
ENABLE POWER
ENGAGE
SIGNAL YD ENGAGE REQUEST
FMC FLAP POSITION - - - - - - - - - -
YD DISENGAGE LIGHT
LEFT FLAP POSITION XMTR
ANGLE-OF-AIRFLOW FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL
RIGHT AOA SENSOR FLAPS UP POWER
SMYD 2 DC POWER AND

DIM CONTROL
27-24-00-006.fm
TRAILING EDGE FLAPS UP
LIMIT SWITCHES
NOTE: THIS DIAGRAM ONLY SHOWS SMYD INTERFACES
FOR WTRIS AND STANDBY YAW DAMPING
WTRIS - INTERFACES
27-24-00
- 91 -
WTRIS -- STALL MANAGEMENT YAW DAMPER
Purpose Display
SMYD 2 calculates and sends commands to the yaw damper The SMYD BITE module has a two-line amber display. Each
components on the standby rudder PCU to move the rudder line has eight alphanumeric characters. The display
for WTRIS and standby yaw damping/turn coordination. shows messages about the type of fault, maintenance
SMYD 2 uses control wheel (aileron) position data to message number, and fault details when you do BITE. The
command small amounts of rudder movement to help turns SMYD 2 BITE interfaces with and provides fault data for
during flight control manual reversion, when on standby stall management functions and for standby yaw damping
hydraulics. SMYD 2 uses inertial data from the ADIRU to and WTRIS.
detect unwanted yaw motion due to dutch roll or
turbulence. Keypad
SMYD 2 also does stall management functions. You use the keys on the BITE module to operate the SMYD
BITE. The keypad has these keys:
- ON/OFF
The SMYD weighs approximately 10 lbs. It uses 10 watts - MENU
of power. A standard Boeing BITE module is on the front - YES
of the LRU and interfaces with the SMYD to monitor - NO
operation and record faults. The BITE module has these - Up arrow (previous)
features on the front of the unit: - Down arrow (next).
- Bite instructions on the label See the SMYD section for more information about BITE
- Display operation.(AMM PART I 27-32)
- Keypad.
Bite Instructions
Bite instructions on the BITE module tell how to test

the unit and move through the BITE software.
27-24-00-009.fm
27-24-00
- 92 -

STATIC
SENSITIVE
"BITE INSTRUCTIONS" BITE INSTRUCTIONS
ON/OFF:Start or stop Bite
MENU : To display menu
question (?)
OR : To scroll through
menu or results
BITE MODULE DISPLAY
KEYPAD
ON
MENU
OFF
YES NO
STALL MANAGEMENT
YAW DAMPER
P/N 65-52822-XX
S/N X XXX X X X X X XX X
X XXX X X X XX X X
MOD
X XX X X X X XX X XX
27-24-00-009.fm
NOTE:
OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR
ELECTRO-STATIC SENSITIVE
DEVICES WHEN YOU HANDLR
THE SMYD LRU.
WTRIS - STALL MANAGEMENT YAW DAMPER
27-24-00
- 93 -
WTRIS -- SMYD 2 - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
General SMYD 2 receives inertial data from the ADIRU to
calculate commands for standby yaw damping and turn
SMYD 2 uses analog and digital data inputs to calculate coordination. These commands go to the yaw damper EHSV
rudder commands for WTRIS and standby yaw damping/turn on the standby rudder PCU to move the rudder.
coordination.
The EHSV applies hydraulic pressure to the yaw damper
Engage Interlock actuator and the actuator makes a mechanical summing
input to the rudder PCU to move the rudder to assist
SMYD 2 supplies 28v dc to the yaw damper solenoid valve turns and to reduce unwanted yaw. The standby LVDT
on the standby rudder PCU. When this solenoid valve is sends yaw damper actuator position data about rudder
energized it supplies hydraulic fluid to the EHSV to movement to SMYD 2.
operate the yaw damper actuator on the standby rudder
PCU to move the rudder for WTRIS and standby yaw WTRIS only operates at Mach < 0.4. The gain schedule
damping. changes from 1 (full gain) at Mach < 0.3 to zero gain at
Mach > 0.4.
WTRIS
For WTRIS and standby yaw damping, these are the limits
The WTRIS function of SMYD 2 uses control wheel aileron for rudder commands:
inputs from the captain control wheel position sensor
to command small amounts of rudder movement. This helps - 2 degrees with flaps up
turn the airplane during flight control manual - 2.5 degrees with flaps not up.
reversion when operating on standby hydraulics.
BITE
The SMYD central processing unit (CPU) operates the
control law software. For SMYD 2, the software The SMYD has BITE test and continuous BITE. It stores
calculations are based on inputs from these components: failures in fault history. The keypad is for operator
interface. The display shows test results and prompts
- Captain control wheel position sensor for input.
- ADIRUs (inertial and air data)
- Right AOA sensor
27-24-00-010.fm
- FMC
- Standby rudder PCU LVDT
- Trailing edge flap up limit switches.
27-24-00
- 94 -

28V AC 28V DC YAW DAMPER

POWER ENGAGE SWITCH
28V DC
R AOA SENSOR STBY RUDDER
L FLAP POS PCU SOLENOID
TRANSMITTER VALVE
ANALOG ANALOG
TE FLAP UP INPUTS OUTPUT
LIMIT SWITCH
CW SENSOR STBY RUDDER
LVDT ON STBY PCU EHSV
RUDDER PCU
SOFTWARE
CALCULATIONS
R ADIRU IR
CPU
WTRIS
R ADIRU ADR YAW DAMPING
ARINC
L ADIRU IR 429
INPUT
FMC GW STALL MGT
ARINC
429 YAW DAMPER 1
SMYD 1 CROSS CHANNEL
OUTPUT
BUS
FAULT
HISTORY KEYPAD
BITE DISPLAY
27-24-00-010.fm
SMYD 2
NOTE: ONLY INTERFACES FOR WTRIS AND STBY YAW
DAMPING ARE SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM.
WTRIS - SMYD 2 - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
27-24-00
- 95 -
WTRIS -- OPERATIONS
General control panel. After a two-second delay the engage
switch moves to OFF, and the yaw damper disengage light
The yaw damper engage switch on the flight control comes ON to show the system is disengaged.
panel operates the WTRIS and standby yaw damper. The
yaw damper disengage warning light is above the engage
switch.
Engage Switch and Warning Light
To put the WTRIS and standby yaw damper on, do these

steps on the flight control panel:
- Put the FLT CONT A and B switches to positions

other than the ON position
- Put at least one of these switches to STBY RUD
- Put the yaw damper switch to ON.
When you put the flight control A and B switches to

positions other than the ON position, a signal enables
SMYD 2 for WTRIS and standby yaw damping. When you put
one of these switches to the STBY RUD position, standby
hydraulic pressure goes to the standby rudder PCU to
move the rudder.
After you put the yaw damper engage switch to ON and

then a two-second delay, the yaw damper engage light
goes off to show that WTRIS and standby yaw damping are
in operation.
If there is a system fault, SMYD 2 removes power from
27-24-00-011.fm
the engage solenoid valve on the standby rudder PCU to
stop hydraulic fluid to the EHSV. SMYD 2 also removes
power from the yaw damper engage switch on the flight
27-24-00
- 96 -

FLT CONTROL FLT CONTROL STANDBY HYD

A AND B SWITCHES A B LOW a
QUANTITY
STBY STBY LOW a
RUD RUD PRESSURE
OFF OFF STBY a
RUD ON
A ON B ON
ALTERNATE FLAPS
OFF
LOW a LOW a UP
PRESSURE PRESSURE
OFF
SPOILER ARM
A B DOWN
OFF OFF
FEEL a
DIFF PRESS
ON ON SPEED TRIM
FAIL
a
DISENGAGE MACH TRIM
WARNING LIGHT YAW DAMPER FAIL a
YAW AUTO SLAT

YAW DAMPER DAMPER a FAIL a
ENGAGE SWITCH
OFF
27-24-00-011.fm
ON
WTRIS - OPERATIONS
27-24-00
- 97 -
WTRIS -- OPERATIONS - ENGAGE INTERLOCKS
General You can do a test of the light with the master dim and
test system.
SMYD 2 operates the wheel to rudder interconnect system
(WTRIS) and standby yaw damping during standby SMYD
operations. For WTRIS and standby yaw damping, SMYD 2
requires that both flight control A and B hydraulic When a SMYD computer is in the number 2 position it
switches be OFF, with at least one switch in STBY RUD operates the WTRIS and standby yaw damping. These
to provide standby hydraulic pressure to the standby systems only operate when in flight control manual
rudder PCU. reversion mode. This is when flight control hydraulic
system A and B are OFF and the standby system is ON.
Engage Switch and Warning Light
To engage the WTRIS and standby yaw damping, you put

the yaw damper engage switch on the flight control
panel to the ON position. Two seconds later, the yaw
damper warning light goes out to show these systems are
operating. The switch is held in the ON position with
power from SMYD 2.
Put the switch in the OFF position to disengage the

WTRIS and standby yaw damping. The yaw damper warning
light comes on. The warning light comes on anytime the
system is disengaged. During a system fault and after
disengagement, the SMYD 2 removes power from the engage
switch solenoid so that the switch moves to the OFF
position.
The electrical ground for the disengage light is
27-24-00-012.fm
connected in series through both SMYDs. For normal
operation, both SMYDs are necessary on the airplane.
27-24-00
- 98 -

DC POWER
A A
POWER SUPPLY
28V DC YAW DAMPER 1 MASTER
BUS 1 2 SEC WARNING
SYSTEM
YAW DAMPER 2 DISENGAGE LIGHT
P18 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL FLIGHT CONTROL
PANEL
2 SEC
YD CHANNEL OK YAW DAMPER
ACTUATOR
SOLENOID
YAW 2 SEC
DAMPER PROGRAM MAIN RUDDER PCU
SWITCH NC PINS
OFF/
STANDBY SMYD 1
POWER SUPPLY
ON
FLT CONT B 2 SEC
OFF/ 2 SEC
STANDBY YD CHANNEL OK YAW DAMPER
ACTUATOR
SOLENOID
ON 2 SEC
FLT CONT A NC PROGRAM
27-24-00-012.fm
PINS STANDBY RUDDER PCU
FLIGHT CONTROL
PANEL
SMYD 2
WTRIS - OPERATIONS - ENGAGE INTERLOCKS
27-24-00
- 99 -
WTRIS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE
General BITE Operation
The SMYD has these BITE functions: To start the BITE, push the ON/OFF key on the BITE
module. EXISTING FAULTS? shows as the first menu item.
- Continuous monitor Push the YES key to answer questions and to move down
- BITE Tests. further in the selected menu item on the display. Push
the NO or down arrow key to see the next menu item. In
Continuous Monitor some lists, TOP OF LIST or END OF LIST shows for one
second when you move to the top or bottom of the list.
The continuous monitor function of BITE monitors the Push the MENU key to exit the menu and move back up one
SMYD LRU for proper operation. When the SMYD has an level to the previous menu. One of these conditions is
internal failure, a fault is recorded in fault history. necessary to start BITE:
Some faults cause the SMYD to have no outputs for the
stall management and yaw damper functions. - Flaps up and VCAS < 60 knots
- On-side engine N1<15% and off-side engine N2<50%.
BITE Tests
These BITE start conditions make sure that if BITE is
BITE Tests are used to do tests of components and ON, it will turn off before takeoff. Also, a time delay
sensors that interface with the SMYD. It has these turns off the BITE control panel if no push-buttons are
functions: pushed for five minutes or longer.
- Quick system test Main Menu

- SMYD LRU self test
- Tests of sensors that interface with the SMYD These are the four main menu selections in SMYD BITE:
- Tests to show functions are within specification
- Supports fault isolation. - EXISTING FAULTS
- FAULTS HISTORY
The BITE module on the front of the SMYD LRU has a - GROUND TESTS
keypad with six push-buttons, and a two-line display - OTHER FUNCTIONS.
with eight characters per line.
27-24-00-015.fm
At the start of the BITE, EXISTING FAULTS? shows. Push
the YES key to select this menu or use the NO or down
arrow key to go to the next main menu selection.
27-24-00
- 100 -

STATIC ON
SENSITIVE
"BITE INSTRUCTIONS" OFF
ON/OFF: Start or stop Bite
MENU : To display menu 1
question (?)
INTO EXISTING
EXISTING YES
menu or results FAULTS?
FAULTS
NO
ON-SIDE ENG N1 < 15%

INTO OFF-SIDE ENG N2 < 50%
FAULTS BITE
FAULTS YES
HISTORY?
HISTORY ENABLE
ON FLAPS UP
MENU NO AIRSPEED < 60 KNOTS
OFF
YES NO
INTO GROUND
GROUND YES
TESTS?
TESTS
STALL MANAGEMENT NO
YAW DAMPER
P/N 65-52822-XX
S/N X X XX X X X X X XX X
XXXXXXX XXXX
MOD INTO
X X X X X X X XX X X X OTHER
OTHER YES
FUNCTNS?
FUNCTIONS
NO
1 SHOWS TOP OF LIST FOR 1 SECOND
27-24-00-015.fm
2 SHOWS END OF LIST FOR 1 SECOND
2
WTRIS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE
27-24-00
- 101 -
WTRIS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - GROUND TESTS
27-24-00-016.fm
27-24-00
- 102 -

Ground Test SMYD LRU FAIL for 2 seconds, then shows the first
fault.
GROUND TESTS is one of the four main menu items in the
SMYD BITE. In this menu, you can do these tests: Discrete Inputs
- SELF TESTS You do a check of the status of these discrete inputs

- DISCRETE INPUTS from the DISCRETE INPUTS menu.
- ARINC 429 INPUTS
- ANALOG INPUTS - Air/ground relays
- SERVO TEST - Flaps up limit switches
- DISPLAY TEST. - Flight control panel switches
- Program pin selections
To start one of these tests, do these steps: - Yaw damper engage switch
- TO/GA switch status (OPEN or GROUND)
- Turn ON the SMYD BITE - Autoslat power availability (PRESENT or MISSING)
- In the main menu use the down (or up) arrow key to - Stick shaker power availability
scroll to GROUND TESTS? and press the YES key - Yaw damper power availability.
ground test that you want and press the YES key. Push the YES key to see the list of discrete inputs.
Use the up (previous) and down (next) arrow keys to
If the ground test that you selected passes, the move through the list.
display shows a fault message under MORE DETAILS, and ARINC 429 Test
provides detailed information about the fault.
In the ARINC 429 INPUT menu, you can do a check of the
Self Tests activity status of ARINC 429 buses for these systems:
The SELF TEST does a check of the SMYD LRU for internal - On-side IR bus
faults. When you push YES, the display shows - Off-side IR bus
TEST IN PROGRESS until the test is complete. If the - On-side ADR bus
27-24-00-016.fm
SMYD passes the test, the display shows SMYD LRU OK. If - CDS DEU bus
the SMYD does not pass the test, the display shows - FMC bus
- DFCS MCP bus
27-24-00
- 103 -
- SMYD cross-channel bus. - Standby yaw damper solenoid valve
- Standby yaw damper EHSV
Push the YES key to see if the bus is ACTIVE or - Standby yaw damper LVDT.
INACTIVE. Use the up and down arrow keys to move
through the list. Display Test
The GROUND TESTS menu only shows whether the data bus The DISPLAY TEST lets you do a test of the display on
for each system is active or inactive. To observe ARINC the BITE module on the front of the SMYD. To do a test
429 data for these systems, go to the OTHER FUNCTIONS of the display, push the YES key when the DISPLAY TEST
selection in the main menu. prompt shows.
Analog Inputs The test takes about 10 seconds. All the LEDs on the
left half of the top line will come on first, then all
In the ANALOG INPUTS menu, you do a check of the status the LEDs on the right half will come on. Next all the
of data from analog sensors that send data to the SMYD. LEDs on the left half of the bottom line will come on,
For SMYD 2 (WTRIS and standby yaw damping systems) a then all the LEDs on the right half will come on. There
check can be done for these analog sensors: are eight characters on each of the two lines. When the
test is complete, DISPLAY TEST? shows on the display.
- Right AOA sensor Push the MENU key to return to the previous menu.
- Left flap position transmitter
- LVDT on standby rudder PCU Ground Tests Passed
- Captain control wheel position sensor.
If the ground test that you selected passes the test,
Push the YES key to select an analog sensor. Use the up the display shows TEST PASSED. If the test fails, the
(previous) or down (next) arrow keys to move through display shows a fault message under MORE DETAILS. The
the list. information under MORE DETAILS is the same as for the
existing faults test that were discussed in a previous
Servo Test section.
In SMYD 2 BITE, you can use the SERVO TEST to do a test
27-24-00-016.fm
of the yaw damper components on the standby rudder PCU
and their interface with SMYD 2. You do a test of these
components:
27-24-00
- 104 -

T O P O F
L I S T
G R O U N D S E L F
YES
T E S T S ? T E S T ?
NO USE ARROW KEY OR NO KEY

TO SCROLL THROUGH THE
GROUND TESTS SUB-MENU
D I S C R E T E
I N P U T S ?
A R I N C 4 2 9
I N P U T S ?
A N A L O G
I N P U T S ?
S E R V O
YES START THE TEST
T E S T ?
27-24-00-016.fm
D I S P L A Y
T E S T ?
WTRIS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - GROUND TESTS
27-24-00
- 105 -
WTRIS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - SERVO TEST
Ground Tests - Servo Test degrees with flaps down. The SMYD 2 servo command is
compared to the LVDT value from the standby rudder PCU
Under the GROUND TESTS menu, the SERVO TEST for SMYD 2 to see if the rudder moved the commanded value. During
does a test of the yaw damper components on the standby the test, rudder movement shows on the SMYD BITE
rudder PCU for the WTRIS and standby yaw damping display in degrees of rudder movement.
system. The SERVO TEST consists of these two tests:
If the test passes, the display shows TEST PASSED. Push
- ZERO COMMAND the MENU key to go to the previous sub-menu SERVO TEST.
- SWEEP TEST. If the test fails, the display shows TEST FAILED and
then shows the first fault. Push the down arrow key and
For these tests, standby hydraulic system pressure is the display will ask if you want to see MORE DETAILS.
necessary. On the flight control panel, at least one Push YES to see more details about the fault.
flight control switch, A or B, must be in STBY RUD and
the other flight control switch may be OFF or STBY RUD.
Before the start of the test, the SMYD 2 BITE provides

warnings about rudder movement and asks you if the
rudder area is clear. The BITE then provides
instructions to do the tests.
Zero Command
For the ZERO COMMAND test, SMYD 2 commands the rudder

to move to the zero position. The SMYD then compares
its commanded value with the value from the LVDT on the
standby rudder PCU.
Sweep Test
For the SWEEP TEST, SMYD 2 commands the standby rudder
27-24-00-017.fm
PCU to move the rudder left, right, and then to the
zero position. During the test, left/right rudder
movement is limited to 2 degrees with flaps up, or 2.5
27-24-00
- 106 -

S E R V O F L T C T R L R U D D E R
T E S T ? B S T B Y ? M O V I N G
R U D C M D T E S T
YES YES L E F T P A S S E D Y D C M D
( V A L U E )
MENU
W A R N I N G ! Y A W D M P R L V D T
W A R N I N G ! E N G A G E D ? ( V A L U E )
L V D T
S E R V O NO
( V A L U E )
T E S T ?
R U D D E R R U D C M D
YES
M O V E M E N T R I G H T
E N D Z E R O
1 T E S T C O M M A N D ?
OR
F A I L E D
R U D D E R Z E R O L V D T
YES ( V A L U E )
C L E A R E D ? C O M M A N D ?
NO (FAULT 1)
YES
YES R U D C M D
S W E E P Z E R O
YES
T E S T ?
M O RE
F L T C T R L D E T A I L S ? R U D D E R
A S T B Y ? L V D T M O V I N G
( V A L U E )
YES PUSH YES FOR
MORE DETAILS
27-24-00-017.fm
YES
1 BITE SHOWS INIT NOT COMPLETE MENU USE THE MENU KEY TO RETURN
IF INITIALIZATION IS NOT COMPLETE TO THE PREVIOUS MENU
WTRIS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SMYD BITE - SERVO TEST
27-24-00
- 107 -
WTRIS -- SMYD 2 - SYSTEM SUMMARY
General
27-24-00-018.fm
27-24-00
- 108 -

28V DC
28V AC
FLAPS UP/NOT UP
TE FLAPS UP LIMIT SWITCHES
FLAP POSITION
TE FLAP POSITION XMTRS
ANGLE OF ATTACK
RIGHT AOA SENSOR
28V DC YAW DAMPER
CONTROL WHEEL INPUT ENGAGE SWITCH
CW POS SENSOR (CAPT) YD ENGAGE YAW DAMPER
INTERLOCK ENGAGE LIGHT
FLT CTRL A AND B OFF/STBY FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL
YD ENGAGE SWITCH ON/OFF
FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL YD ENGAGE
COMMAND SOLENOID VALVE
IR DATA WTRIS AND

STBY YD EHSV
ADR DATA
YD ACTUATOR
R ADIRU POSITION LVDT
IR DATA STANDBY RUDDER PCU
L ADIRU
FMC
27-24-00-018.fm
MCP NOTE:
THIS DIAGRAM SHOWS SMYD 2
INTERFACES FOR WTRIS AND
RA STANDBY YAW DAMPING ONLY.
SMYD 2
WTRIS - SMYD 2 - SYSTEM SUMMARY
27-24-00
- 109 -
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT COMPUTER SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION
General The vertical position calculation uses the air data
reference function and the inertial reference function
The flight crew uses the flight management computer data.
system (FMCS) to enter route and vertical performance
flight plan data for a flight. The FMC compares the calculated position with the
flight plan for LNAV and VNAV control. The FMC shows
With ACARS, the FMC can receive flight plan data from a the calculated position and the flight plan on the
ground station and can send flight status information navigation display.
to a ground station.
Performance
With the flight plan and inputs from the airplane
sensors, the FMCS does these functions: A performance data base in the FMC contains data to
model the airplane and the engines. The flight crew
- Navigation puts this data in the FMC:
- Performance
- Guidance. - Airplane gross weight
- Cruise altitude
Navigation - Cost index.
A navigation data base is in the FMC memory. It The FMC uses the data to calculate these functions:
includes the navigation data for the area of operation.
The pilot can use the navigation data base to set the - Economy speeds
entire flight plan before a flight. - Best flight altitude
- Top of descent point.
The FMC calculates the airplane's lateral and vertical
position during the flight. The lateral position The common display system (CDS) shows target speeds and
calculation uses the inertial reference function and altitudes.
the radio navigation aids, if available.
Guidance
The FMC also uses the global positioning system (GPS)
34-61-00-001.fm
data in the lateral position calculation. The FMC sends commands to the digital flight control
system (DFCS) and the autothrottle function (A/T). The
DFCS and the A/T use these signals to control the
34-61-00
- 110 -

airplane in the lateral (LNAV) and vertical (VNAV) alt - altitude
modes of flight. ANP - actual navigation performance
appr - approach
Built-In Test Equipment
APU - auxiliary power unit
You use the FMCS CDU to select and control BITE for ARINC - aeronautical radio incorporated
these systems: arr - arrival
ASA - autoflight status annunciator
- FMCS ASIC - application specific integrated circuit
- Digital flight control system (DFCS) A/S - airspeed
- Autothrottle (A/T)
A/T - autothrottle
- Air data inertial reference unit (ADIRU)
- Common display system (CDS) ATA - actual time of arrival
- Electronic engine controller (EEC) ATC - air traffic control
- APU engine control unit (ECU) ATS - air traffic services
- Fuel quantity indication system (FQIS). att - attitude
baro - barometric
Abbreviations and Acronyms
BCS - backcourse
AA - autoflight status annunciator BIT - built in test
act - active BITE - built in test equipment
AC - alternating current brg - bearing
ACARS - aircraft communications addressing and C - celsius
reporting system CAA - Civil Aviation Authority
ACMS - airplane conditioning monitoring system calc - calculate
ADIRU - air data inertial reference unit cap - capture
ADIRS - air data inertial reference system CAPT - captain
ADL - airborne data loader CAS - computed airspeed
ADR - air data reference CCA - circuit card assembly
34-61-00-001.fm
ADS - automatic dependent surveillance CDS - common display system
AFN - ATS facility notification CDU - control display unit
A/I - antice cg - center of gravity
34-61-00
- 111 -
CI - cost index DFCS - digital flight control system
CIAP - common instrument approach procedures DIR - direct
clb - climb dist - distance
clr - clear DLDR - data loader
CLK - clock dsply - display
cmd - command DTG - distance-to-go
chng - change DME - distance measuring equipment
CO - company DU - display unit
com - communication E - east
comp - complete ECS - environmental control system
CON - continuous E/O - engine out
config - configuration econ - economy
CP - control panel ECU - engine control unit
CPU - central processor unit EDFCS - enhanced digital flight control system
CRC - cyclic redundancy check E/D - end of descent
crs - course EEC - electronic engine control
crz - cruise EEPROM - electrically erasable programmable read
ctr - center only memory
DA - drift angle EFCP - EFIS control panel
DB - data base EFIS - electronic flight instrument system
DBL - data base loader EGPWC - enhanced ground proximity warning
DC - direct current computer
del - delete EGPWS - enhanced ground proximity warning system
dep - departure ELEX - electronics
des - descent eng - engine
dest - destination ENG - engaged
34-61-00-001.fm
DEU - display electronic unit EO - engine out
dev - deviation ETA - estimated time of arrival
DFDAU - digital flight data acquisition unit ETE - estimated time enroute
34-61-00
- 112 -

ETO - estimated time overhead GPWC - ground proximity warning computer
EXEC - execute GPWS - ground proximity warning system
F - fahrenheit GRWT - gross weight
FAA - Federal Aviation Administration G/S - glideslope
FAC - final approach course GS - ground speed
FANS - future air navigation system hdg - heading
FCC - flight control computer HIRF - high intensity radiation field
F/D - flight director HDOP - horizontal dissolution of precision
FDAU - flight data acquisition unit HF - high frequency
FF - fuel flow HIL - horizontal integrity limit
FL - flight level H/L - high/low
flt - flight hld - hold
FMA - flight mode annunciation hrdw - hardware
FMC - flight management computer HSI - horizontal situation indicator
FMCS - flight management computer system H/W - hardware
F/O - first officer IAN - integrated approach navigation
FPA - flight path angle ICAO - International Civil Aviation
FQIS - fuel quantity indicating system Organization
FQPU - fuel quantity processor unit ident - identification
frq - frequency IFR - instrument flight rules
ft - feet IFSAU - integrated flight system accessory unit
fwd - forward IGS - instrument guidance system
G - ground ILS - instrument landing system
G/A - go-around inbd - inboard
GLS - GNSS landing system info - information
GMT - Greenwich mean time INOP - inoperative
34-61-00-001.fm
G/P - glidepath inti - initialization
GPS - global positioning system INIT/REF - initialization/reference
GPSSU - global positioning system sensor unit INTC - intercept
34-61-00
- 113 -
I/O - input/output MCDU - multi-purpose control display unit
IRS - inertial reference system MCP - mode control panel
ISA - international standard atmosphere MDA - minimum descent altitude
ISB - intersystem bus MEDB - model/engine data base
isol - isolation MHZ - megahertz
JAA - Joint Airworthiness Authority MIN - minimum
kgs - kilograms MLS - microwave landing system
KTS - nautical miles per hour (knots) MMO - maximum operating mach number
L - left MMR - multi-mode receiver
LAAS - local area augmentation system MNVR - maneuver
lat - latitude mod - modification
LBS - pounds msg - message
LCD - liquid crystal display Mword - megaword
LDA - localizer directional aid N - north
LED - light emitting diode N1 - low pressure compressor/turbine speed
lim - limit N2 - high pressure compressor/turbine speed
LNAV - lateral navigation N/A - not appliacble
LOC - localizer nav - navigation
long - longitude NAV RAD - navigation radio
LRC - long range cruise NCD - no computed data
LRU - line replaceable unit ND - navigation display
LVL CHG - level change NDB - navigation database
M - meters NM - nautical miles
mag - magnetic norm - normal
MAGVAR - magnetic variation NPS - navigation performance scales
MAINT - maintenance NV - non volatile
34-61-00-001.fm
MASI - mach airspeed indicator OAT - outside air temperature
max - maximum OFP - operational flight program
Mbyte - megabyte OFST - offset
34-61-00
- 114 -

OPC - operational program configuration rad - radio
OPT - optimum RAIM - receiver autonomous integrity monitor
PDB - performance data base RAM - random access memory
PDL - portable data loader RCF - rear connector filter
perf - performance RCVR - receiver
PFD - primary flight display RDY - ready
pln - plan REC - recorder
pos - position RED - reduced
PPOS - present position ref - reference
pred - predicted RF - radio frequency
preflt - preflight RNAV - area navigation
proc - procedure RNP - required navigation performance
prof - profile RTA - required time of arrival
PROG - progress rte - route
PROM - programmable read only memory R/W - read/write
P/S - power supply RW - runway
PSEU - proximity switch electronics unit rwy - runway
PTH - path S - south
QCS - quiet climb system S/C - step climb
QFE - altimeter setting to show altitude above SAT - static air temperature
reference airfield SATCOM - satellite communications
QNE - standard day, sea level altimeter SDF - simplified directional facility
setting SDI - source destination identifier
QNH - altimeter setting to show altitude above sel - select
mean sea level
SID - standard instrument departure
QUAD - quadrant
34-61-00-001.fm
qty - quantity
SPD - speed
R - right
SRAM - scratch random access memory
RA - radio altitude
srce - source
34-61-00
- 115 -
SSM - sign status matrix V2 - engine out safe climb speed
sta - station v - volt
STAR - standard terminal arrival route V - volt
STD - standard VANP - vertical actual navigation performance
SUPP - supplemental VFR - visual flight rules
SW - software VMO - maximum operating velocity
s/w - software VNAV - vertical navigation
SWDL - software data loader VOR - VHF Omnidirectional range
TACAN - tactical air navigation VREF - reference speed
TAI - thermal antice VRNP - vertical required navigation performance
TAS - true airspeed VSD - vertical situation display
TAT - total air temperature V/S - vertical speed
TBC - The Boeing Company VSI - vertical speed indicator
T/C - top of climb VTK - vertical track
T/D - top of descent W - west
T/R - thrust reduction wpt - waypoint
tgt - target wt - weight
thr - thrust WTAI - wing thermal antice
thr ref - thrust reference XFR - transfer
TMA - thrust mode annunciation xmtr - transmitter
TO - takeoff XTK - cross track
TO/GA - takeoff/go-around Z - zulu
trans - transition ZFW - zero fuel weight
trk - track
TRU - true
UPD - update
34-61-00-001.fm
UTC - universal time (coordinated)
V1 - takeoff decision speed
VR - takeoff rotation speed
34-61-00
- 116 -

TOP OF
CLIMB
STEP
CLIMB OPTIMIZED SPEEDS
CLIMB AND ALTITUDES
TAKEOFF
GUIDANCE
CONTROL DISPLAY FLIGHT MANAGEMENT ORIGIN

UNIT COMPUTER
CRUISE
WAYPOINT
GS 357 TAS 338

336 o/15 HDG 090 MAG
GRH
D838.4z WAYPOINT
32.5NM
TOP OF
12
T/D 15
DESCENT
18
MPB COURSE
40 ALTERATION
AIRPLANE
GRH
SYSTEMS WAYPOINT
YKM
ELN
ILS
VOR 1 VOR 2
116.00 ELN
DME 35.1 FMC L DME 28.5 OUTER APPROACH
MARKER DESTINATION
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
34-61-00-001.fm
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT COMPUTER SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION
34-61-00
- 117 -
FMCS -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION
General
The flight management computer system (FMCS) controls

the airplane navigation, performance and guidance
functions. This decreases the work load of the flight
crew . It also gives access to the BITE functions of
other systems.
The FMCs get data from other airplane systems to

calculate navigation and performance data. This data
shows on the common display system (CDS) for use by the
flight crew.
The navigation and performance function data is used by

the guidance sub-function in the FMC. The guidance sub-
function outputs are sent to the enhanced digital
flight control system (EDFCS). This data gives
automatic or manual control of the airplane flight path
in the vertical (VNAV) and lateral (LNAV) modes. This
is the guidance function of the FMC.
FMC display data goes directly to CDS. Present position

data goes directly to the air data inertial reference
units (ADIRU). The ADIRUs use present position during
the alignment.
All other data goes through two transfer relays to the

user systems.
The FMC input and output data format is ARINC 429
34-61-00-002.fm
digital data and analog discretes.
34-61-00
- 118 -

- DFCS MODE CONTROL FMC MODE ANNUNCIATION

PANEL
- AUTOTHROTTLE BOTH BOTH CDS
SYSTEM ON L ON R
AUTOFLIGHT SYSTEMS AUTOTUNE DATA
NORMAL
VHF NAV/DME CONTROL
LOAD FMC DATA FMC SOURCE PANEL
SELECT SWITCH
DATA LOADER AUTOTUNE DATA
AUTOFLIGHT STATUS
ANNUNCIATOR DME
EFIS CONTROL
PANEL DISCRETES DFCS
COMMON DISPLAY SYSTEM STEERING COMMANDS
TRANSFER
- ANTI-ICE RELAY (2) THRUST COMMANDS
- ENGINE BLEED AIR
- AIR/GROUND LOGIC
- FUEL QUANTITY EDFCS
PROCESSOR UNIT
AIRPLANE GROSS
ACARS WEIGHT
AIRPLANE SENSORS
PWR FMC SMYD
ON VALID
GREENWICH
MEAN TIME POSITION DATA
(GMT)
FDAU
ELECTRONIC CLOCK
TRACK & PRESENT
POSITION AND CDU (2) POSITION DATA
AIR DATA GPWC
FMC (2)
ADIRU DISPLAY DATA
DOWN LOAD FMC DATA
- DME CDS
DATA LOADER
34-61-00-002.fm
- ILS
- VOR NAV DATA BITE DATA
RADIO NAVIGATION ADIRU FUEL QUANTITY PROCESSOR
SYSTEMS UNIT
FMCS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
34-61-00
- 119 -
FMCS -- FLIGHT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION
P9 Forward Electronics Panel
These are the FMCS components on the P9 forward

electronics panel:
- CDU 1
- CDU 2.
P5 FWD Overhead Panel
The FMC source select switch is on the P5-28 forward

overhead panel.
P61 Panel
These are the FMCS components on the P61 panel:
- Airborne data loader

- Data loader control panel.
34-61-00-093.fm
34-61-00
- 120 -

FMC
BOTH BOTH
ON L ON R
NORMAL
FMC SOURCE SELECT SWITCH (P5)
P9 FWD ELECTRONICS PANEL

- CDU 2
- CDU 1
DATA LOAD SELECTOR

C
SINGLE SYS
L R
CAPT F/O
UPR LWR
SYSTEM SELECT
NORMAL
FMC
CDU
34-61-00-093.fm
AIRBORNE DATA LOADER (P61) FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
(LOOKING AFT)
DATA LOADER CONTROL PANEL (P61)
FMCS - FLIGHT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION
34-61-00
- 121 -
FMCS -- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT LOCATIONS
FMCS - Component Location - Electronic Equipment Shelf
These are the FMCS components on the E5-2 shelf:
- FMC 1
- FMC 2
- FMCS program switch modules
- FMCS transfer relay 1
- FMCS transfer relay 2.
34-61-00-004.fm
34-61-00
- 122 -

E5-2 SHELF
- FMC 1
- FMC 2
FMCS PROGRAM
SWITCH MODULES
(BEHIND PANEL)
FWD
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT
TRANSFER
RELAY 2
FMC 1
TRANSFER
RELAY 1
FMC 2
34-61-00-004.fm
(SHOWN
REMOVED)
FWD
FMCS - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT LOCATIONS
34-61-00
- 123 -
FMCS -- FMC AND CDU POWER INTERFACE
General
The FMC and CDU primary power is 115v ac from the AC

standby bus and AC transfer bus 2.
34-61-00-005.fm
34-61-00
- 124 -

28/14V DC
115V AC BRIGHT/DIM
HIGH/LOW
STBY BUS 1 VOLTAGE POWER
CDU 1 SUPPLIES
LAMP TEST
5V AC PANEL
LIGHTING
CDU 1
115V AC
STBY BUS 1 POWER SUPPLY
FMC
CMPTR 1
P18-2 CIRCUIT BREAKER

PANEL FMC 1
28/14V DC
115V AC BRIGHT/DIM HIGH/LOW
XFER BUS 2 VOLTAGE POWER
CDU 2 SUPPLIES
LAMP TEST
5V AC PANEL
LIGHTING CDU 2
115V AC
XFER BUS 2 POWER SUPPLY
FMC
34-61-00-005.fm
CMPTR 2

PANEL FMC 2
FMCS - FMC AND CDU POWER INTERFACE
34-61-00
- 125 -
FMCS -- TRANSFER RELAY POWER INTERFACE
General L/NORMAL position. The FMC source select switch then
sends 28v dc through a contact on transfer relay 1 to
The transfer relays are Ledex type relays. They the relay 2 coil winding. Relay 2 moves to the BOTH ON
mechanically latch to the position you select. L position and mechanically latches to that position.
The FMCS source select switch controls the FMCS Other contacts on the transfer relays supply the
transfer relays. These are the switch positions: necessary logic to tell these LRUs the position of the
transfer relays:
- NORMAL
- BOTH ON L (both on left FMC) - DEU (1&2)
- BOTH ON R (both on right FMC). - FDAU
- FMC (1&2).
Operation
The transfer relay power is 28v dc from electronics bus
2. The FMC source select switch controls the dc power You use the FMCS BITE on the ANALOG DISCRETES page 3/4
to the transfer relays. to do a check of the FMC source selection.
With the FMC source select switch in the NORMAL

position, both transfer relays go to the normal
position and mechanically latch in that position.
When the FMC source select switch is set to the BOTH ON

R position, 28v dc goes from the source select switch,
through a contact on transfer relay 2, to relay 1 coil
winding. Relay 1 moves to the BOTH ON R position and
mechanically latches to that position. Relay 2 does not
change because the BOTH ON R and NORMAL positions are
the same.
34-61-00-006.fm
L position, 28v dc goes from the source select switch,
to the coil on relay 1. Relay one latches in the BOTH ON
34-61-00
- 126 -

28V DC FMC SOURCE

ELEX SELECT
POWER 2
FMCS XFER BOTH ON R
FDAU
P6-1 FMC SOURCE
SELECT
FMC DEU 1
BOTH ON R
BOTH BOTH /NORMAL
ON L ON R FMC SOURCE
SELECT
NORMAL
DEU 2
FMC SOURCE
SELECT SWITCH FMC SOURCE
SELECT
BOTH FMC 1
ON L
FMC SOURCE
SELECT
FMC 2
NORMAL
IFSAU
BOTH
ON R
BOTH ON L BOTH ON L
P5-28 FMC SOURCE /NORMAL
SELECT SWITCH FMCS TRANSFER
34-61-00-006.fm
FMCS TRANSFER RELAY 2
RELAY 1
FMCS - TRANSFER RELAY POWER INTERFACE
34-61-00
- 127 -
FMCS -- DIGITAL INPUT INTERFACE - 1
General - Longitude
- Time
These LRUs supply data to the FMCS: - Horizontal Figure of Merit
- Horizontal Integrity Limit
- VOR/MB receivers
- Multi mode receivers (MMR) The FMC uses this data for FMC position update and
- DME. actual navigation performance (ANP) calculation.
VOR/MB DME
VOR 1 and VOR 2 receivers send the bearing and DME 1 and DME 2 interrogators send the slant range
frequency data of the VOR stations that are manually distance and the station frequency data that are
tuned by the flight crew. automatically tuned by the FMC.
The FMC uses this data for FMC position update in the The FMC corrects this slant range for airplane altitude
VOR/DME mode. The effective range for this mode is up and uses the data for FMC position update in the
to a maximum of 25NM. DME/DME or VOR/DME modes.
ILS/GPS/MMR Clock
MMR 1 and MMR 2 send the localizer deviation and the The clock input to both FMCs is from the selected MMR.
station frequency/identifier data of the ILS If the GPS data is not valid, the time is set using the
transmitters that are manually tuned by the flight CDU and from then on the FMCs calculate time.
crew.
Intersystem Bus
The FMC uses this data for FMC position update during a
final approach. The airplane must be within 20NM of the The RS422 intersystem bus (ISB) is used so that the
tuned ILS transmitter and below 6000 feet. primary and secondary FMCs can compare critical data.
The GPS receivers in the MMRs send this data to the
34-61-00-007.fm
FMCS:
- Latitude
34-61-00
- 128 -

VOR/MB 1 AND VOR 2
GPS 1
GPS 2
CAPT'S ELECTRONIC
ILS CLOCK
MMR 1
GPS 2
GPS 1
ILS
MMR 2
INTER SYSTEM
BUS (2)
DME (1 AND 2)
34-61-00-007.fm
FMC 1
FMC 2
FMCS - DIGITAL INPUT INTERFACE - 1
34-61-00
- 129 -
General switch position, TO/GA switch position, and system
status.
These components send data to the FMCS:
The speed intervention mode uses the selected airspeed
- DFCS MCP and selected mach number. The altitude intervention
- FCC mode also uses the selected altitude.
- ADIRU
- DEU FCC
- Engine electronic control (EEC)
- APU engine control unit (ECU) The autothrottle computer function sends A/T BITE
- FQPU. response to the FMCS.
DFCS ADIRU
The flight control computers (FCC) send data to the The ADIRUs send this inertial reference (IR) data to
DFCS mode control panel (MCP). the FMCS:
The MCP sends this data to the FMCS: - Present position Latitude
- Present position Longitude
- Local selected course - Ground speed
- Foreign selected course - True heading
- Selected altitude - Magnetic heading
- Trailing edge flap position - Pitch angle
- DFCS mode discretes - Roll angle
- DFCS BITE response - Inertial altitude
- Selected airspeed - Inertial vertical speed
- Selected mach. - N-S velocity
- E-W velocity.
The FMCS uses the selected course data in the
navigation sub-function. The performance and guidance The ADIRUs send this air data reference (ADR) data to
34-61-00-008.fm
sub-functions use the selected altitude and trailing the FMCS:
edge flap position. The mode discretes show VNAV/LNAV
- Uncorrected barometric altitude
34-61-00
- 130 -

- Baro corrected altitude ADIRU. If FCC A engages, the FMCs use ADR data from the
- Mach left ADIRU. If FCC B engages, the FMCs use ADR data
- Computed airspeed from the right ADIRU.
- True airspeed
- Total air temperature DEU
- Static air temperature.
The display electronic units (DEUs) send CDS BITE
The FMCS uses this data to calculate these functions: response data and EFIS control panel mode discretes to
the FMCS.
- Aircraft position (latitude, longitude and
altitude) The DEUs send these EFIS control panel discretes to the
- Groundspeed FMC:
- Flight path angle
- Drift angle - Center display format
- Track angle - Airports selected
- Wind velocity and direction - Route data selected
- Horizontal position accuracy (actual navigation - Waypoint selected
performance). - Ground station data selected
- Position data selected
ADIRU Selection - PFD/ND display format
- Plan mode selected
The FMC sees the inertial reference (IR) data and the - Map mode selected
air data reference (ADR) data as two different sensors. - VOR mode selected
- Approach mode selected
Usually the FMCs receive inertial data from their on- - Range selected.
side ADIRU (left ADIRU to FMC 1 and right ADIRU to FMC
2). If the on-side ADIRU has a malfunction or is in the The DEUs also send APU and main engine EEC BITE
ATT or ALIGN mode, the FMC uses the data from the other response data on the same bus. There is no direct BITE
ADIRU. interface between the FMCS and the APU and EEC. The
DEUs are a buffer between the APU, EEC, and the FMCS.
34-61-00-008.fm
The FMCs use the same air data source as the DFCS.
Flight control computer (FCC) A gets ADR data from the
left ADIRU, and FCC B gets ADR data from the right
34-61-00
- 131 -
FQPU
The fuel quantity processor unit (FQPU) calculates

total fuel weight and sends it to the FMCS. Fuel
quantity BITE response data also comes from the FQPU.
34-61-00-008.fm
34-61-00
- 132 -

ADR 4
IR 3
LEFT ADIRU
ADR 4
IR 3
RIGHT ADIRU
AT 1
FCC A
DEU - FMC
DEU - FMC MCP 3
DEU (1 & 2)
DFCS MODE CONTROL
PANEL
APU BITE
ENGINE EEC BITE
34-61-00-008.fm
FMC 1
FQPU 5
FQPU FMC 2
FMCS - DIGITAL INPUT INTERFACE - 2
34-61-00
- 133 -
FMCS -- DIGITAL OUTPUT INTERFACE - 1
34-61-00-009.fm
34-61-00
- 134 -

General - Drift angle
- GMT
The FMC data on bus 01 and 02 goes directly to the - Date
ADIRUs. The other user systems get this FMC data - Static air temperature (SAT)
through the transfer relays. - Selected temperature
- Flight number
Data Output - Minimum airspeed
- Total fuel
Bus 01 and 02 have this data: - Minimum buffet airspeed
- Maximum buffet airspeed
- Distance-to-go (waypoint) - Continuous N1 limit
- Groundspeed - Go-around N1 limit
- Front course - Cruise N1 limit
- VOR/DME frequencies - Climb N1 limit
- Set latitude - Target N1
- Set longitude - NDB effectivity
- Set magnetic heading - BITE test word
- Origin/destination - FMC discrete word 1
- Destination runway - FMC discrete word 2
- Destination estimated time of arrival (ETA) - FMC discrete word 3.
- VREF speed
- Gross weight FMC discrete word 1 has this data:
- FMC target altitude
- FMC target airspeed - Isolation valve open
- FMC target mach number - Wing anti-ice on
- Horizontal command - Cowl-R anti-ice on
- Vertical speed command - Cowl-L anti-ice on
- Desired track - ECS pack-R H/L
- Waypoint bearing - ECS pack-L H/L
- Cross-track deviation - ECS pack-R
34-61-00-009.fm
- Vertical deviation - ECS pack-L
- Lateral deviation - Engine bleed 2 on
- Magnetic track angle - Engine bleed 1 on
34-61-00
- 135 -
FMC discrete word 2 has this data: - Set latitude
- Set longitude
- Lateral alert - Set heading
- Computer master/slave - BITE test word.
- Annunciator test
- FMC valid The ADIRUs use the latitude and longitude data during
- Offset alignment. Magnetic heading is used when the ADIRU is
- Dead reckoning in the attitude mode (ATT), and the BITE test word is
- Vertical alert. used to start BITE through the CDUs.
FMC discrete word 3 has this data: Autothrottle Function
- IAS/mach The autothrottle function in FCC A uses this data from

- Engine out engaged the selected FMC:
- Landing flaps selected
- Manual N1 select - Target N1
- Level decel - FMC gross weight
- Autothrottle to idle arm - Minimum airspeed
- Autothrottle to arm - N1 limit mode
- FMC vertical speed - FMC altitude
- N1 limit mode - GMT and date
- Speed on elevator - Static air temperature
- Reduced thrust (derate) - N1 thrust limits (CLB, CRZ, CONT & GA)
- LNAV takeoff enabled - BITE test words.
- Level change request
- VNAV valid The autothrottle function uses this data to keep
- Thrust cutback enable specific engine N1 targets or airspeeds from takeoff to
- Initiate thrust cutback. touchdown.
ADIRU The autothrottle function changes the target N1 values
34-61-00-009.fm
to an equivalent thrust resolver angle (TRA) target.
The ADIRUs use this data from the selected FMC: The target N1 rating is dependent on the FMC engaged
mode.
34-61-00
- 136 -

The A/T go-around control logic and approach control engine display. The CDS uses gross weight to calculate
logic use gross weight. the flap maneuver speeds that show on the PFD speed
tape. BITE uses GMT and date for fault data storage.
Minimum airspeed is the lowest airspeed that is
permitted by the A/T during VNAV operations. Target N1, GMT, and date also go from the DEUs to the
engine electronic controls (EEC). The EECs use the N1
The N1 limit mode discretes are used to set control law target to calculate an equivalent TRA for engine
gains and limits. control. EEC BITE also uses GMT and date.
The autothrottle function uses FMC altitude for The BITE test words are for the DEUs and these systems:
anticipation of altitude acquisition during VNAV
operation. - Engines (EEC)
- APU (ECU).
GMT and date are used in A/T BITE for fault data
storage. There is no direct BITE interface between the FMCs and
the electronic engine controls (EECs) and APU ECU. The
N1 thrust limits put a limit on A/T authority and DEUs are the interface between the EEC, APU ECU, and
prevent possible engine over-boost. the selected FMC.
BITE data is used for interactive display on the MCDUs FCC
DEU The FCCs use this data from the selected FMC:
The DEUs use this data from the selected FMC: - FMC target altitude
- FMC target airspeed
- N1 limit mode - FMC target mach number
- Target N1 - Horizontal command
- Gross weight - Vertical speed command
- GMT and date - GMT and date
- BITE test words. - Flight number
34-61-00-009.fm
- FMC discrete words
The DEUs use this data to show the thrust modes on the - BITE test word.
center upper display unit (DU). Target N1 shows on the
34-61-00
- 137 -
The FCCs use this data to control the airplane lateral The SMYDs use gross weight to adjust the gain in the
and vertical flight profile: yaw damper command signal. They use all the FMC inputs
to calculate the upper and lower amber bands on the
- Altitude airspeed indication for CDS. The flap input enables the
- Airspeed pitch limit indication on CDS.
- Mach number
- Horizontal commands DME
- Vertical commands
- FMC discretes. The DMEs use four auto-tune frequencies (channels 2 -
5) from the selected FMC.
The FCC uses GMT, date, flight number, and the BITE
test word in the BITE function. In normal operation, the FMCs do an auto-tune of the
DME interrogators through their onside NAV control
You select the source of FMC data with the FMC source panels. If a NAV control panel has a failure, its on-
select switch. side DME interrogator does an auto-tune directly from
the selected FMC.
FMC SOURCE SELECT Fuel Quantity Processor Unit

FCC A FCC B
SWITCH POSITION
The fuel quantity processor unit uses a BITE word from
NORMAL FMC 1 FMC 2
the selected FMC to start the BITE program.
BOTH ON LEFT FMC 1 FMC 1
BOTH ON RIGHT FMC 2 FMC 2 FDAU
SMYD Navigation data from the selected FMC goes to the FDAU
where it is put in the solid state memory.
The SMYDs use this data from the selected FMC:
- Gross weight
- Lower buffet margin speeds
34-61-00-009.fm
- Upper buffet margin speeds
- Landing flap position.
34-61-00
- 138 -

BOTH ON L/NORMAL
FMC BUS 01
FCC A
FMC BUS 02
DEU 1
FMC 1
DEU 2
BOTH ON R SMYD 1
BOTH ON L
L ADIRU DME 1
FCC B
CAPT NAV C/P
R ADIRU
SMYD 2
FQPU
FMC BUS 01
DME 2
FDAU
34-61-00-009.fm
FMC BUS 02
BOTH ON R/NORMAL
F/O NAV C/P
FMC 2 FMCS TRANSFER RELAY 2
FMCS - DIGITAL OUTPUT INTERFACE - 1
34-61-00
- 139 -
General - Minimum VNAV speed band
- Distance to missed approach point
The FMC data on bus 08 and 09 goes directly to the DEUs. - FMC navigation source (GPS, VOR, LOC, ADIRU)
The other user systems get this data through the - Map background word/block count
transfer relays. - Dynamic data start word
- Dynamic data end word
Data Output - Approach data
- FMC position
The buses 08 and 09 have this data: - Track angle (magnetic and true)
- Wind speed and direction
- Distance to go (waypoint) - Drift angle
- Groundspeed - Flight path angle
- Front course - Alphanumeric display data (wpt, navaids etc.)
- Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - Vertical situation display data
- V speeds - Flight number
- GPS position data - FMC discrete word 2
- Desired track - FMC discrete word 3.
- Waypoint bearing
- Cross-track deviation The FMC discrete word 2 has this data:
- Range to altitude
- Vertical deviation - QFE altitude reference
- Set landing altitude - VNAV ALT annunciation
- DME elevation - ADIRU position difference
- Vertical RNP - Alerts (lateral and vertical)
- Vertical ANP - FMC source select annunciation
- Transition altitude - Annunciator test
- Horizontal RNP - FMC valid
- Horizontal ANP - Offset
- Lateral deviation display data - Dead reckoning.
- Vertical deviation display data
34-61-00-010.fm
- Clean The FMC discrete word 3 has this data:
- Speedbrakes
- Maximum VNAV speed band - IAS/Mach
34-61-00
- 140 -

- Engine out engaged - Range to altitude
- Man N1 select - Vertical deviation
- Level decel - Set landing altitude
- A/T to idle arm - DME elevation
- A/T to arm - Transition altitude
- FMC vertical speed - FMC discrete word 2
- Speed on elevator - FMC discrete word 3
- Reduced thrust derate - FMC position
- Level change request - Track angle (magnetic and true)
- VNAV valid - Wind speed and direction
- Thrust cutback enable - Drift angle
- Initiate thrust cutback - Flight path angle
- Landing flaps selected - Alpha numeric display data
- N1 limit mode. - Flight number.
DEU Background data has this type of information:
The DEUs get navigation and flight display data from - Vector lines
both FMCs. There are two types of data, dynamic data - Special symbols
and background data. Dynamic data changes as a function - Standard character text messages
of time while background data does not change as a - Discrete words defining map/plan mode and range
function of time. data.
Dynamic data has the following information: This data is formatted and sent by the DEUs to the
display units (DUs) to show the airplane position with
- Distance-to-go respect to the flight plan path and navigation
- Groundspeed facilities (navaids, waypoints, airports etc.).
- Estimated time of arrival
- V speeds GPWC
- GPS position data
34-61-00-010.fm
- Desired track The GPWC uses magnetic track and present position
- Waypoint bearing (latitude and longitude) from the selected FMC for its
- Cross-track deviation envelope modulation calculations.
34-61-00
- 141 -
FDAU
Display data from the selected FMC goes to the FDAU

where it is stored in the solid state memory.
HGS Computer
The HGS computer uses this data from the FMC:
- Distance to go
- Desired track
- Waypoint bearing
- Vertical deviation
- Groundspeed
- Track angle (Mag & Tru)
- VNAV ALT annunciation
- Status data.
The data from the selected FMC is formatted and shows

on the HGS combiner.
The data from FMC 1 is formatted and shows on the HGS

combiner.
34-61-00-010.fm
34-61-00
- 142 -

BOTH ON L/NORMAL
FMC BUS 08
BOTH ON R GPWC
FMC BUS 09
DEU 1
FMC 1
FDAU
FMC BUS 09
DEU 2
FMC BUS 08 HGS COMPUTER

FMC 2
34-61-00-010.fm
FMCS - DIGITAL OUTPUT INTERFACE - 2
34-61-00
- 143 -
FMCS -- CDU INTERFACE
FMC Digital Output

L or the NORMAL position, CDU 1 and CDU 2 get data from
FMC 1. When the source select switch is set to the BOTH
ON R position, both CDUs get data from FMC 2.
FMC Digital Input
CDU 1 and 2 send data directly to both FMCs.
CDU Analog Output
Each CDU sends an analog discrete to both FMCs to show

a failure of the CDU.
34-61-00-011.fm
34-61-00
- 144 -

CDU BUS 1
BOTH ON L/NORMAL
FMC BUS 06
FMC BUS 07
CDU 1
FMC 1
FMC BUS 06
FMC BUS 07
BOTH ON R
34-61-00-011.fm
CDU BUS 1
FMC 2 CDU 2
FMCS - CDU INTERFACE
34-61-00
- 145 -
FMCS -- FMC DATA LOADER INTERFACE
General The data loader control panel also has other digital
inputs and outputs to other airplane systems. In this
The airborne data loader (ADL) connects to the FMCs way, these other systems can be updated through the
through the data loader control panel. data loader.
The data loader gets 115v ac power from the P18 circuit
breaker panel. It goes through the data loader control
panel to the airborne data loader.
The data loader digital inputs and output connect to

FMC 1 and FMC 2 through the data loader control panel.
The control panel must be set to the FMC position to
transfer data to and from the FMCs.
When the data loader 3-position switch is set to the L

position, the data is loaded into FMC 1. When the data
loader 3-position switch is set to the R position, the
data is loaded into FMC 2. The new data base(s) may
then be crossloaded between the FMCs.
NOTE: The FMC source select switch on the P5-28 panel

must be set in the BOTH ON L or NORMAL positions
to see the load progress on the MCDUs if FMC 1 is
being loaded. If the 3-position switch is in the
R position, the FMC source select switch must be
set to BOTH ON R to see the load progress on the
MCDUs.
A function discrete from the data loader goes through

the data loader control panel to the FMC. This is the
34-61-00-012.fm
load enable signal to the FMC.
34-61-00
- 146 -

DATA LOAD SELECTOR

C
SINGLE SYS
L R
CAPT F/O
115V AC UPR LWR
XFER BUS 1
DATA SYSTEM SELECT
LOADER NORMAL
FMC
CDU

PANEL DATA LOADER
CONTROL PANEL
115V AC
400 HZ LEFT
DATA INPUT
DATA LOADER OUTPUT
FUNCTION
ENABLE
DATA OUTPUT
DATA LOADER INPUT 1
FMC 1
DATA INPUT
FUNCTION DISCRETE FUNCTION
ENABLE
RIGHT
OTHER DATA OUTPUT
SYSTEMS
34-61-00-012.fm
AIRBORNE DATA LOADER DATA LOADER FMC 2
CONTROL PANEL
FMCS - FMC DATA LOADER INTERFACE
34-61-00
- 147 -
FMCS -- CDU DATA LOADER INTERFACE
General
The airborne data loader (ADL) connects to the CDUs

through the data loader control panel.
The data loader gets 115v ac power from the P18 circuit
breaker panel. It goes through the data loader control
panel to the airborne data loader.
The data loader digital input and output connect to CDU

1 and CDU 2 through the data loader control panel. The
control panel must be set to the CDU position to
transfer data to the CDUs.
When the data loader 3-position switch is set to the L

position, the data is loaded into CDU 1. When the data
loader 3-position switch is set to the R position, the
data is loaded into CDU 2.
A function discrete from the data loader goes through

the data loader control panel to the CDU. This is the
load enable signal to the CDU.
Also, a system 1 air/ground relay provides a ground to

the CDU to enable the loader function when the airplane
is on the ground.
The data loader control panel also has other digital

inputs and outputs to other airplane systems. In this
way, these other systems can be updated through the
34-61-00-091.fm
data loader.
34-61-00
- 148 -

DATA LOAD SELECTOR

C
SINGLE SYS
L R
115V AC CAPT
UPR
F/O
LWR
XFER BUS 1
DATA
LOADER SYSTEM SELECT
NORMAL
FMC
CDU

PANEL
DATA LOADER
CONTROL PANEL
LEFT
DATA INPUT
DATA LOADER OUTPUT
FUNCTION
ENABLE
DATA OUTPUT
DATA LOADER INPUT 1
AIR/GRD
CDU 1
FUNCTION DISCRETE
RIGHT DATA INPUT

AIRBORNE DATA LOADER
DATA LOADER
CONTROL PANEL DATA OUTPUT
FUNCTION
OTHER ENABLE
SYSTEMS
34-61-00-091.fm
AIR/GRD
AIR/GRD CDU 2
RELAY
FMCS - CDU DATA LOADER INTERFACE
34-61-00
- 149 -
FMCS -- ACARS INTERFACE
34-61-00-013.fm
34-61-00
- 150 -

General - Date
- Static air temperature (SAT)
ACARS data for THE CDUs is direct and does not go - Selected temperature
through the transfer relays. Uplink and downlink data - Flight number
is sent through the transfer relay 1. - Minimum airspeed
- Minimum buffet airspeed
Data Output - Maximum buffet airspeed
- Continuous N1 limit
The bus 02 has this data: - Go-around N1 limit
- Cruise N1 limit
- Distance to go (waypoint) - Climb N1 limit
- Groundspeed - Target N1
- VOR/DME frequencies - NDB effectivity
- Set latitude - BITE test word
- Set longitude - FMC discretes.
- Set magnetic heading
- Origin/destination The FMC discretes have this data:
- Destination runway
- Destination estimated time of arrival (ETA) - IAS/mach
- Gross weight - Engine out engaged
- Total fuel - Landing flaps selected
- FMC target altitude - Manual N1 select
- FMC target airspeed - Level decel
- FMC target mach number - Autothrottle to idle arm
- Horizontal command - Autothrottle to arm
- Vertical speed command - FMC vertical speed
- Desired track - N1 limit mode
- Waypoint bearing - Speed on elevator
- Cross-track deviation - Reduced thrust (derate)
- Vertical deviation - Level change request
34-61-00-013.fm
- Magnetic track angle - VNAV valid
- Drift angle - Thrust cutback enable
- GMT - Initiate thrust cutback.
34-61-00
- 151 -
The bus 05 has has FMC system status.
ACARS
The FMC/ACARS interface allows the receipt (uplink) and

transmission (downlink) of FMC data from or to the
customers ground computers via the ACARS management
unit.
34-61-00-013.fm
34-61-00
- 152 -

BOTH ON L/NORM
FMC BUS 02
DOWNLINK DATA
FMC BUS 05
UPLINK DATA
UPLINK DATA
UPLINK DATA
FMC 1
BOTH ON R
ACARS MANAGEMENT
UNIT 1
FMC BUS 02
FMC BUS 05
UPLINK DATA
34-61-00-013.fm
MCDU 1 MCDU 2
FMCS - ACARS INTERFACE
34-61-00
- 153 -
FMCS -- ANALOG DISCRETES
General
Inputs from switches and valves give engine bleed air

data to the FMCS. The FMCS uses these signals to
calculate the N1 limits for the engines.
The program pin selectable options customize the FMCS

to the airline configuration.
The proximity switch electronics unit (PSEU), supplies

an air/ground discrete input to the FMCS to set flight
leg count. The air/ground discrete also goes to the FMC
to inhibit data load in the air.
34-61-00-014.fm
34-61-00
- 154 -

OFF OFF/HIGH
CLOSE AUTO
ON
S2 ENGINE 2 K13 LEFT
PROGRAM PIN PACK VALVE
ANTI-ICE SELECTABLE
CONTROL NORMAL RELAY
OPTIONS
OPEN
OFF OFF/HIGH
LEFT PACK
FLOW CONT AND
SHUT-OFF VALVE
FMC 1 AUTO
ON
S1 ENGINE 1 OFF CLOSE K14 RIGHT
ANTI-ICE PACK VALVE
CONTROL NORMAL RELAY
OFF E4-1 A/C RELAYS

ON OPEN
S6 ENGINE 1
BLEED AIR RIGHT PACK
SWITCH FLOW CONT AND
ON SHUT-OFF VALVE
K1 WING OFF
ANTI-ICE
CLOSE ON
P5 ENGINE AND GROUND
WING ANTI-ICE ON PSEU
MODULE S7 ENGINE 2
BLEED AIR OPEN
34-61-00-014.fm
SWITCH
A/C BLEED
P5 A/C MODULE FMC 2 AIR ISOLATION
VALVE
FMCS - ANALOG DISCRETES
34-61-00
- 155 -
FMCS -- STATUS ANNUNCIATOR INTERFACE
General
The autoflight status annunciators (ASAs), have three

warning lights. The warning lights are push to reset.
The ASA also has a TEST switch.
The ASAs show a change of condition for these systems:
- Autopilot
- Autothrottle
- Flight management computer system (FMCS).
FMCS
The FMC warning light is amber when an FMC has an alert

message or when an FMC fails. The light also comes on
when you put the TEST switch in position 1 or 2.
Push the FMC warning light to reset the latch and turn
the light off.
34-61-00-015.fm
34-61-00
- 156 -

28V DC SW HOT BAT

BUS FROM DFCS
BOTH ON L/NORMAL
MESSAGE
SET OUT A
OPEN FOR RESET
MESSAGE
FAIL 1 A
OPEN FOR FAIL 2 SET OUT
FMC FAIL RESET
BOTH ON R
RESET
CAPT ASA
FMC
P/RST
a
MESSAGE SET OUT A

RESET
OPEN FOR
MESSAGE BOTH ON L FAIL 1 A
FAIL 2 SET OUT
RESET
OPEN FOR RESET
FMC FAIL BOTH ON R/NORMAL
34-61-00-015.fm
FMC 2
F/O ASA
FMCS - STATUS ANNUNCIATOR INTERFACE
34-61-00
- 157 -
FMCS -- PROGRAM PIN INTERFACE
34-61-00-016.fm
34-61-00
- 158 -

General Configuration Options
FMCS hardware program pin options are set with the FMC The airframe/engine configuration is found by a
program switch modules. The program pins customize the combination of eight program pins. This combination
FMCS to your airline configuration. sets these conditions:
NOTE: Program pin status can be verified on the FMCS - Airplane model
BITE analog discretes pages and model engine - Engine thrust
configuration pages on the CDU. - Engine combustor type
- Brake type.
Options
The next generation 737 program pin determines that the
These are your FMCS options: aero/propulsion data is stored in the model engine data
base (MEDB).
- Airplane model MT_737-800
- Thrust rating 24,000 The airframe/engine parity pin determines that the
- Heavy duty brakes airframe/engine configuration is valid. Odd parity is
- Engine single combustor used.
- Performance code 1
- Source/Destination Identifier The performance option code defines levels of reduced
- Dual FMC climb thrust so that climb thrust can not be more than
- JAA flight rules take off thrust.
- Takeoff speeds
- Runway position update with CDU The source/destination identifier identifies the FMC as
- Weight in kilograms left or right. It is always set to left.
- Degrees C default
- Aspirated TAT probe Computation Options
- Flight number entry
- ACARS installed The JAA flight rules option sets the default values for
- SELECT CONFIG Mode. cruise center of gravity (CG) and maneuver margin.
34-61-00-016.fm
The takeoff speeds option together with the certified
QRH takeoff data software option enables the FMC to
34-61-00
- 159 -
calculate values of V1, VR, and V2 based on the
certified QRH takeoff data.
The runway position update with CDU option lets the

flight crew update the FMC position through the CDU.
Display Options
The kilogram weight option sets the weight default for

CDU entries.
The degrees C default option sets the temperature

default for CDU entries.
Interface Options
The aspirated TAT probe option lets the FMC use the
temperature from the TAT probe on the ground to
calculate V1, VR, and V2 speeds.
The flight number entry option lets the crew enter

flight number which shows on the PROGRESS pages.
The ACARS installed option enables the interface

between the MCDU and the ACARS management unit.
The SEL CONFIG mode option is used to see the

configuration data for the loadable software of a non
FMC system.
34-61-00-016.fm
34-61-00
- 160 -

EACH SWITCH - AIRPLANE MODEL

IS OPEN OR AND THRUST
CONNECTED RATINGS
TO GROUND - ENGINE
COMBUSTOR (SINGLE
OR DUAL)
- BRAKE TYPE
(STANDARD OR
HEAVY DUTY)
(TYPICAL)
- 737NG
- PARITY (ODD)
- SYSTEM OPTIONS
FMCS PROGRAM SWITCH
MODULE 1 (P59)
FMC 1
- DUAL FMC
EACH SWITCH - AIRPLANE MODEL

IS OPEN OR AND THRUST
CONNECTED RATINGS
TO GROUND - ENGINE
COMBUSTOR (SINGLE
OR DUAL)
- BRAKE TYPE
(TYPICAL) (STANDARD OR
HEAVY DUTY)
- 737NG
- PARITY (ODD)
34-61-00-016.fm
FMCS PROGRAM SWITCH - SYSTEM OPTIONS
MODULE 2 (P59)
FMC 2
FMCS - PROGRAM PIN INTERFACE
34-61-00
- 161 -
FMCS -- FLIGHT MANAGEMENT COMPUTER
Purpose
The FMC uses data from the airplane sensors and data
stored in the FMC to do the calculations for
navigation, performance, and guidance of the airplane.
The FMC is a rack-mounted chassis assembly in an ARINC

600, 4 MCU box. It weighs less than 22 pounds (10
kilograms). It uses 115V AC, 400 Hz single phase
electrical power.
The FMCs are cooled with air from the equipment cooling
supply and exhaust systems. Cooling air for FMC 1 is
blow-through. Cooling air for FMC 2 is draw-through.
Two green light emitting diodes (LEDs) show through

openings in the front of the unit. The PWR ON LED comes
on when the FMC has power. The FMC VALID LED comes on
after power is on and the unit passes internal tests.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO OBSERVE ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE

PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES WHEN TOUCHING,
REMOVING, OR INSERTING PARTS OF ASSEMBLIES,
MAY RESULT IN DEGRADATION OR FAILURE OF THE
FMC.
34-61-00-017.fm
34-61-00
- 162 -

CAUTION
OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE
DEVICES
34-61-00-017.fm
FMCS - FLIGHT MANAGEMENT COMPUTER
34-61-00
- 163 -
FMCS -- FLIGHT MANAGEMENT COMPUTER - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
34-61-00-018.fm
34-61-00
- 164 -

General The ASIC also controls the intersystem buses (ISB)
between the two FMCs. There is one standard RS422 ISB
These are the primary components of the FMC: and one Ethernet ISB.
- Circuit card The memory module contains these data bases:

- Power supply card.
- Operational flight program (OFP)
The circuit card has the processor, memory, and ARINC - Navigation data base (NDB)
429 I/O module functions. - Model/Engine data base (MEDB)
- ACARS datalink data base
Circuit Card - Software options data base.
The primary components of the processor function are All memory is electrically erasable programmable read
the processor and the application specific integrated only memory (EEPROM).
circuit (ASIC). Processor speed is 30 MHz.
The I/O function controls the communication between the
The processor card does these functions: FMC and external systems.
- Flight plan management The I/O function also has an ASIC that is the primary
- Navigation and navaid tuning function controller for the I/O function. There are 16 ARINC 429
- Performance management function output drivers, 32 ARINC input translators, 6 discrete
- Guidance function outputs, and 6 discrete inputs.
- Control and display functions.
An LED on the circuit card comes on when there is a BIT
The processor also has the memory for the FMC boot and failure.
maintenance programs. The random access memory (RAM) is
used for the scratchpad memory. Power Supply
The processor ASIC controls the real time clock and the The power supply uses 115v ac, single phase from the
system reset and power down logic. It also controls the aircraft electrical system. It supplies + 5v dc, +15v
34-61-00-018.fm
MAINT BITE processing. dc and -15v dc to internal components of the FMC. Total
output power is 40 watts. There is a 50 microsecond
hold up feature for short term power interrupts.
34-61-00
- 165 -
An LED on the power supply card comes on when the power
supply is valid.
FMC Interchangeability
There are two different FMC model numbers:
- Model 2970A4
- Model 2907C1.
Both models are functionally interchangeable if both

have U10.4 or U10.4A software installed.
34-61-00-018.fm
34-61-00
- 166 -

RS422 429
ISB OUTPUTS
PROCESSOR ARINC 429
ETHERNET PROCESSOR ASIC INPUTS
ISB ASIC
DISCRETE
MAINT OUTPUTS
BITE
PROGRAM
MEMORY DATA BASES
NV RAM
SRAM
DISCRETE DISCRETES
RAM INPUTS
DISCRETES DISCRETE
INPUTS
+5V DC
115V AC POWER
SUPPLY +15V DC
-15V DC
FMC
34-61-00-018.fm
FMCS - FLIGHT MANAGEMENT COMPUTER - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
34-61-00
- 167 -
FMCS -- CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT
Purpose The execute (EXEC) key is on the right of the CDU. This
key has a lamp assembly with two lamps. The lamp
The flight crew uses the control display unit (CDU) to assembly is line replaceable.
put in flight data and to select displays and modes of
operation. They also use the CDU to start ADIRU The lighted switch panel is line replaceable. Six
alignment. You use the CDU to do tests of the FMCS and screws hold the panel in place.
other systems.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO OBSERVE ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
There are two CDUs in the airplane. They are PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES WHEN TOUCHING,
functionally and physically interchangeable. REMOVING, OR INSERTING PARTS OR ASSEMBLIES MAY
RESULT IN DEGRADATION OR FAILURE OF THE
Physical Description CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT.
The CDU weighs 9 pounds (4.1 kg). Training Information Point
There are holes in the chassis for cooling air. The If you remove CDU 2, install the ground lock assemblies
equipment cooling system supplies cooling for the CDUs. on the landing gear. Put the control lever for the
Keep dust and dirt build-up from the vent and surfaces. landing gear in the OFF position.
The procedures to clean the CDU are in the maintenance
practices section. CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU INSTALL THE GROUND LOCK
ASSEMBLIES ON THE LANDING GEAR BEFORE YOU MOVE
The CDU has these annunciators: THE CONTROL LEVER FOR THE LANDING GEAR. YOU
WILL DAMAGE THE AIRPLANE IF YOU RETRACT THE
- Fail LANDING GEAR WHILE THE AIRPLANE IS ON THE
- CALL GROUND.
- MSG (message)
- OFST (offset).
The annunciators each use a two-lamp circuit board

assembly. Each board assembly is line replaceable.
34-61-00-019.fm
34-61-00
- 168 -

CAPTIVE
SCREWS (6)
LIGHTED
SWITCH PANEL
ANNUNCIATORS
EXECUTE KEY
34-61-00-019.fm
ANNUNCIATORS
NOTE: REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HANDLE IS NOT SHOWN
FMCS - CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT
34-61-00
- 169 -
FMCS -- CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
34-61-00-020.fm
34-61-00
- 170 -

General Rear Connector Filter Assembly
The LCD CDU has these sub-assemblies: The CDU receives data on up to seven ARINC data buses
and four discrete inputs. Output data is sent over two
- Low voltage power supply ARINC data buses and one discrete output. All input and
- Rear connector filter assembly output data goes through the rear connector filter
- Processor and interface circuit card assembly assembly (RCFA) which provides electromagnetic
- LCD module interference (EMI) protection.
- Backlight assembly
- Lighted switch panel. Processor/Interface Circuit Card
Power Supplies The processor and interface circuit card (P&I CCA)
provides all of the control and external interface
The low voltage power supply module in the CDU receives circuitry for the CDU. It provides the following
115v ac, 400Hz, single phase power from the airplane functions:
electrical system. It provides the following operating
voltages within the LCD CDU: - Read lighted switch panel inputs to determine CDU
modes/inputs
- +5v dc - Receive ARINC inputs from other airplane systems
- +12.7v dc - Read and interpret airplane discrete inputs
- -12.7v dc - Generate CDU fail output discrete
- +26v dc - Control CDU annunciator operation
- +28v dc - Send ARINC outputs to FMCS
- Switched +28v dc (used for the backlight and LCD - Communicate with other airplane sub-systems
heaters). - Generate data for LCD and backlight assembly
- Perform BITE.
The airplane master dim and test circuits supply 28v dc
to the CDU for annunciator power and lamp test. Also, LCD Module
5v ac power is used for the lighted switch panel
lighting. The LCD module provides the display of 24 columns and
34-61-00-020.fm
14 rows. It is a non-light emitting device that
requires a separate light source (backlight assembly)
to make the display viewable.
34-61-00
- 171 -
During power-up, the LCD provides a display within 10
seconds at normal operating temperatures (0-55 degrees
C, 32-131 degrees F). At or below freezing
temperatures, the LCD can take up to 2 minutes to
provide a normal display. The LCD contains a
temperature regulating function which improves
operation over a wide range of temperatures.
Backlight Assembly
The backlight assembly has a lamp and control circuitry

to provide the required illumination for the LCD. It is
controlled by the P&I CCA.
The backlight assembly also sends ambient light level

information to the P&I CCA so that it can adjust the
luminance level for the LCD. The backlight assembly
also sends temperature information to the P&I CCA so
that, when necessary, it can turn on the LCD heater.
Lighted Switch Panel
The lighted switch panel provides the interface between

the operator and the FMCS through the CDU. The panel
contains two ambient light sensors which are used to
adjust the display brightness and contrast.
34-61-00-020.fm
34-61-00
- 172 -

115V AC
ANNUNC POWER
LIGHTING POWER
POWER SUPPLY
ARINC INPUTS INTERFACE

FUNCTION
BACKLIGHT
ASSEMBLY
VIDEO AND
ARINC OUTPUTS BACKLIGHT
FUNCTIONS
LCD
AIRPLANE
DISCRETES PROCESSOR
CDU FAIL
DISCRETE
RCFA PROCESSOR & INTERFACE
34-61-00-020.fm
CDU (TYPICAL) LIGHTED
SWITCH
PANEL
FMCS - CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
34-61-00
- 173 -
FMCS -- CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT - CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
34-61-00-021.fm
34-61-00
- 174 -

Display Format Data on 2 two through 13 (data field) applies to
operation of the airplane.
The multi-purpose control display unit (MCDU) data
shows on the five-inch liquid crystal display (LCD). Line 14 is a scratch pad to enter data from the
The display has 14 lines. Each line can show 24 keyboard. Also, this line shows this data:
characters. Each line can show alphanumeric characters
and symbols. - Failure messages
- Alerts during operation
Color - Advisory prompts.
The FANS MCDU contains a liquid crystal display (LCD). Alphanumeric Key Board
It shows white text on a black background.
You use the key board to enter data into the FMCS and to
Display Layout make changes to a flight plan.
The first line shows these data blocks: Each time you push an alphanumeric key, the entry shows
in the scratch pad (line 14). In the scratch pad, you
- Status can edit the entry or clear it.
- Title
- Page number. Function and Mode Keys
Status shows that the information on the display is the These are the function and mode keys:
active, executed plan (ACT) or a modified plan (MOD).
When the data on the display is not active or not a part - INIT REF
of the flight plan, the status block is blank. - RTE
- DEP ARR
The next block is the title for the display. An example - ATC
of a title is POS INIT. - VNAV
- FIX
The last character spaces in the first line show the - LEGS
34-61-00-021.fm
page number for each display. This tells the operator - HOLD
the active page and the total number of pages. - FMC COMM
- PROG
34-61-00
- 175 -
- MENU This page also shows the reduced climb thrust limits
- N1 LIMIT CLB-1 (Climb 1)and CLB-2 (Climb 2). The flight crew can
- EXEC. set N1 limit data from this page.
The INIT REF key supplies access to a selection of data The FIX key shows range and bearing data from the
pages necessary to start the FMCS and ADIRU. Also, you present position to a selected reference position
can get access to navigation data and maintenance (SRP).
pages.
The ATC key is not active at this time. Selection of
The RTE key selects the page you use to enter route this key shows the KEY/FUNCTION INOP message in the
data. This includes the flight origin and destination scratchpad.
plus the takeoff runway number.
The VNAV key shows the climb, cruise, and descent
The MENU key gives access to other airplane data performance pages. When you push the VNAV key in
communication systems. flight, the page that shows is the active flight phase.
On the ground, the CLB page shows. You can show the
The LEGS key shows and accepts input of data for each other flight phase pages with the PREV PAGE and NEXT
leg of the flight plan. Information about heading PAGE keys.
between the waypoints, speed, and altitude also shows.
The FMC COMM key shows FMC communications page. This
The DEP/ARR key supplies access to a selection of page has the airline operational communications (AOC)
departure and arrival runways and procedures for the datalink functions.
origin and destination airports.
The EXEC key is used to make active or to modify a page
The HOLD key lets you plan or start a hold at a waypoint with data entry when the EXEC light comes on.
or at the present position.
Page Select Keys
The PROG key shows this current flight status
information. You push the NEXT PAGE key to advance the display to
the next number page. You push the PREV PAGE key to
34-61-00-021.fm
The N1 LIMIT key shows the FMC calculated N1 thrust return the display to the next lower number page.
limits for specific flight phases.
34-61-00
- 176 -

The page strings are continuous. If the first page of a Special Keys
string is shown (1/9) and you push the PREV PAGE key,
the display shows the last page in the string (9/9). If The keyboard has special keys in addition to the alpha-
you go past the last page in a string (past 9/9 for numeric keys. These are the special keys:
example), this takes the display back to the first page
in the string (1/9). - Change sign (+/-)
- Space (SP)
Line Select Keys - Delete (DEL).
- Slash (/)
You use the line select keys for these operations: - Clear (CLR).
- Move data from the scratch pad to a data field The change sign (+/-) and slash (/) keys are standard
- Copy data from a data field to the scratch pad keys on a keyboard.
- Remove data from a data field
- Select a BITE operation from the maintenance bite The space key (SP) puts a space into the scratchpad.
index. This lets you write messages into the scratchpad.
Lighted Annunciators A push of the DEL key puts the word DELETE in the CDU
scratch pad. This lets you delete a data field with the
These are the active annunciators: line select key next to the data field. The DEL key
does not work when the scratchpad contains data. Some
- CALL data fields do not permit the DEL key function. For
- MSG (Message) this, the INVALID DELETE message shows in the CDU
- OFST (Offset). scratchpad.
The CALL light is on when there is a call from another Push the CLR key once to remove one alphanumeric
system other than the FMCS. character in the scratch pad or an alert or advisory
message from the scratch pad. Hold the CLR key down for
The MSG light is on to show there is an alert or one second to remove all scratch pad data.
advisory message. The MSG light stays on until you
34-61-00-021.fm
clear the message.
The OFST light is on when a parallel offset is active.
34-61-00
- 177 -
BITE
The FMCS BITE function does a check of all key

functions.
34-61-00-021.fm
34-61-00
- 178 -

AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS TITLE PAGE NUMBER

FOR AUTOMATIC CONTRAST BLOCK BLOCK
ADJUSTMENT (2) 5-INCH DISPLAY,
14 24-CHARACTER
LINES
DATA STATUS BLOCK
DATA BLOCK
LINE SELECT KEYS LINE SELECT KEYS
BRIGHTNESS
SCRATCH PAD/ ADJUSTMENT
MESSAGE BLOCK INIT
RTE DEP ATC VNAV BRT
REF ARR
EXECUTE KEY
FUNCTION AND FMC EXEC
FIX LEGS HOLD PROG
MODE KEYS COMM
MENU N1 EXECUTE LIGHT

LIMIT A B C D E
PREV NEXT
C
PAGE PAGE F G H I J M
ANNUNCIATORS
A S
ANNUNCIATORS L
Lw
G
1 2 3 K L M N O w
DELETE KEY
F O
A F
I S
La 4 5 6 P Q R S T Tw
CHANGE SIGN KEY SLASH KEY
7 8 9 U V W X Y
CLEAR KEY
DECIMAL POINT KEY . 0 +/- Z SP DEL / CLR
34-61-00-021.fm
NUMERIC ALPHABETIC
CHARACTER CHARACTER
KEYS KEYS
FMCS - CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT - CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
34-61-00
- 179 -
FMCS -- AIRBORNE DATA LOADER
Purpose The data loader does an internal self test at power up.
During the self test, all the front panel status
You use the airborne data loader (ADL) to load data indicators flash. At the end of the self test, the
into selected LRUs and to record data from selected indicators go off. If there is a failure at power up,
LRUs. You use the data loader control panel to select the message HRDW shows on the display. If the self test
the LRU. is satisfactory, the message RDY shows. The other
indicators come on as the data loader moves through the
Physical Description/Features load or transfer.
The airborne data loader (ADL) is an ARINC-615 high

speed loader. These are the ADL features:
- Access door
- Disk drive
- Disk drive light
- Disk drive eject button
- Display.
These messages show on the display:
- PROG (Data transfer in progress)

- CHNG (Diskette change required)
- COMP (Data transfer complete)
- RDY (The loader is ready for operation. If RDY
flashes, the LRU has stopped the data transfer to
check the data. The transfer will continue
automatically)
- XFER (Data transfer failure)
- R/W (Unable to access diskette data)
- HRDW (Internal loader failure. If HRDW flashes,
34-61-00-022.fm
there is no communication between the loader and
the LRU).
34-61-00
- 180 -

DISPLAY
FRONT COVER CLOSED
EJECT BUTTON
DISK DRIVE
PROG CHNG COMP RDY XFER R/W HRDW
DISK DRIVE LIGHT
PROG DATA TRANSFER IN PROGRESS

CHNG DISK CHANGE IS REQUIRED
COMP DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE
RDY UNIT READY FOR OPERATION
XFER DATA TRANSFER FAILURE
R/W UNABLE TO ACCESS DISK DATA
HRDW SYSTEM TEST FAILURE
34-61-00-022.fm FRONT COVER OPEN
FMCS - AIRBORNE DATA LOADER
34-61-00
- 181 -
FMCS -- TRANSFER RELAYS
Purpose
There are two FMCS transfer relays. The relays select

the FMC to send data to the systems that interface with
the FMCS. The FMC SOURCE SELECT SWITCH controls the
relays. The source select switch is in the flight deck.
Location
The relays are on the E5-2 shelf in the electronic

equipment compartment.
The relays are Ledex type relays. They mechanically

latch and are hermetically sealed.
34-61-00-023.fm
34-61-00
- 182 -

R476 FMCS
TRANSFER
RELAY NO. 2
FMC 1
R475 FMCS
TRANSFER
RELAY NO. 1
FMC 2
(SHOWN REMOVED)
34-61-00-023.fm
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT SHELF E5-2
FMCS - TRANSFER RELAYS
34-61-00
- 183 -
FMCS -- FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - INTRODUCTION
General This type of data is available:
These are the primary FMCS functions: - Waypoints

- Navaids
- Navigation - Airport data
- Performance - Airway data
- Guidance. - Standard instrument departures (SIDs)
- Standard terminal arrival routes (STARs).
The FMCS carries out the primary functions with data
input from these sources: There are two navigation data bases in the FMC, the
current and a set of update revisions.
- Flight crew
- Airplane system sensors The performance default data base and the model engine
- FMCS data bases. data base (MEDB) contain the same type of data and
carry out the same functions.
These are the FMCS data bases:
The performance default data base is part of the
- Operational flight program (OFP) operational flight program. It has an aerodynamic model
- Navigation data base (NDB) for the 737-300/400/500 series airplanes and a fuel
- Performance default data base flow/N1 thrust model for the specific engine on the
- Model/engine performance data base (MEDB) airplane.
- Software options data base. The MEDB has the aerodynamic model for the 737-
600/700/700IGW/700C/800/900 series airplanes and a fuel
FMC Data Bases flow/N1 thrust model for the specific engine on the
airplane. The MEDB is loadable through the data base
The operational flight program is the computer software loader and is not part of the operational flight
that the FMCS uses to do the navigation, performance program.
and guidance sub-functions.
The aerodynamic model includes this data:
34-61-00-024.fm
The navigation data base contains all the data
necessary for the airplane operation over a specified - Optimum altitudes
route network. - Speed schedules
34-61-00
- 184 -

- Operation limits The ACARS datalink data base has the software for
- Drag data for dual and single engine operation. uplink and downlink of data between the FMCS and an
operator's ground network.
This data is used to calculate the performance
characteristics that give the optimum vertical profile All these data bases are loadable through the data base
for the airplane. loader control panel.
The fuel flow/N1 thrust model is used to calculate fuel Navigation

flows and thrust limits with a correction for the
effects of air conditioning and airframe anti-ice bleed The navigation sub-function provides airplane position
air demands. (FMCS position), navigation data and the autotune
function for the navigation radios.
The software options data base has the selected
software options. These are the software options: The FMCS uses these sensors to calculate the FMC
position:
- Manual T/O speeds
- VNAV ALT enable - Global positioning system
- GPS navigation - Navigation radio data
- Manual RNP entry - Air data inertial reference system (ADIRS).
- ATC message on displays
- AOC datalink The flight crew can manually assemble the route or
- Alternate destination select it from the FMCS navigation data base. When the
- Altitude/speed intervention route is active, it can be displayed on the navigation
- QRH takeoff speeds map display of the common display system (CDS).
- Message recall
- Plan fuel Performance
- QFE landing reference
- Geometric path descent The performance sub-function provides flight profile
- Engine out SIDS data and engine N1 thrust targets and limits. This
- Missed approach color enables the airplane operate at the most economical
34-61-00-024.fm
- Integrated approach navigation altitudes and speeds for the conditions.
- Default RNP
- NDB size. The FMC uses this data to calculate performance data:
34-61-00
- 185 -
- CDU input data (cost index, CRZ altitude etc.) During climb or descent the FMCS sends speed and
- Air data and inertial reference data altitude targets to the EDFCS. During level flight the
- Total fuel weight FMCS sends speed commands to the A/T function.
- Engine bleed air data
- Airplane and engine data from the model/engine Other Functions
performance database.
The aircraft communications and reporting system
The economy mode is the primary performance mode for (ACARS) allows the FMCS to receive (uplink) and send
the climb, cruise and descent phases of flight. (downlink) messages to the operator's ground network.
However, the flight crew can select other operational The uplink can be used to send flight plan data or
modes. weather data. The downlink can be used by the flight
crew to make a request for flight planning or
Guidance performance data.
The guidance function sends flight path and steering The ACARS function controls the messages sent to and
commands to the enhanced digital flight control system from the ground with ACARS. Uplinks are normally
(EDFCS) and the auto throttle function (A/T). indicated to the flight crew via scratchpad messages on
the CDU. Downlinks can be sent manually or
For the lateral navigation (LNAV) function, the FMCS automatically triggered. The ACARS configuration data
compares current FMC position with the selected lateral base controls this functionality.
path. If they are different, the FMCS calculates a roll
steering command and sends it to the EDFCS. The display function sends display data to the common
display system and the CDUs. The data includes route
For vertical navigation (VNAV) the FMCS calculates and position data and N1 data.
speed and vertical speed targets and sends them to the
EDFCS. The FMCS also calculates N1 thrust and speed The ALERT function monitors the FMCS status. It
targets and sends them to the A/T function. The auto illuminates the FMC warning light in the autoflight
throttle and autopilot use the targets and commands to status annunciators when the FMCS failure occurs or
keep the airplane on the calculated vertical flight when there is a message that makes flight crew
path. awareness and subsequent action necessary.
34-61-00-024.fm
34-61-00
- 186 -

OPERATIONAL FLIGHT PROGRAM
MMR
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
- AUTOTUNE - DEU
NAV RADIOS - CDU
- CALCULATE
POSITION
TRANSFER DEU
CDU TRANSFER RELAYS
RELAYS GUIDANCE
GUIDANCE CMDS TO EDFCS
- LATERAL
- VERTICAL
ADIRS
ALERT/FAIL EDFCS
PERFORMANCE TRANSFER
- SPEED/THRUST WARNING
RELAYS
TARGETS AND
LIMITS
NAV RADIOS TRANSFER
RELAYS AUTOFLIGHT
STATUS
PERFORMANCE DEFAULT DATA BASE ANNUNCIATOR
FUEL
QUANTITY
NAVIGATION ACARS DATA LINK
DATA BASE DATA BASE
TRANSFER
RELAYS ACARS
34-61-00-024.fm
SOFTWARE OPTIONS AIRPLANE MODEL/ENGINE
DATA BASE PERFORMANCE DATA BASE
BLEED AIR
DISCRETES
FMC
FMCS - FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - INTRODUCTION
34-61-00
- 187 -
FMCS -- FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - NAVIGATION SUB-FUNCTION
34-61-00-025.fm
34-61-00
- 188 -

General These are the sensors used to calculate/update the FMC
position and their selection priority:
The FMCS navigation sub-function calculates this data:
- ADIRU/GPS
- Lateral position - ADIRU/DME/DME
- Vertical position - ADIRU/DME/VOR
- Actual navigation performance (ANP). - ADIRU/DME/LOC
- ADIRU ONLY.
The FMCS navigation function also tunes the DME
interrogators and supplies radio tuning data for The first priority for FMC position updating is GPS
display on the MCDU NAV STATUS page. data from the GPS receiver in the MMRs.
The primary data source for the lateral and vertical The next priority is a pair of DME stations that have
position calculations is the air data inertial the best range and geometry. The maximum range for
reference system (ADIRS). Because the data from the air DME/DME updating is nominally 200 nautical miles (NM)
data inertial reference units (ADIRU) drifts over time, but the FMC will always use those stations that are
the FMC navigation function uses data from other nearest the airplane position. The FMC will also always
sensors to correct the ADIRU data that it receives. tune two DMEs that are not within 30 degrees of each
other or not greater than 150 degrees apart (90 degrees
The FMC uses independent measurements from the being the optimum angle).
navigation sensors filtered with ADIRU position,
heading and velocity data to produce an accurate If there are not two DME stations within range or that
calculation of the airplane's position in the do not have the necessary geometry, the FMC uses DME
horizontal plane. distance and VOR bearing from a co-located VOR/DME
station. The maximum range for VOR/DME update is 25
NOTE: The ADIRUs must be in the NAV mode to provide nautical miles.
valid data to the FMC.
NOTE: The FMC will autotune the DME interrogators but
The FMC will select only one navigation update mode at VOR must be manually tuned by the flight crew.
a time. The navigation update mode with the least
34-61-00-025.fm
amount of position uncertainty will be used. In an airport terminal area when the airplane is on a
localizer approach, the FMC uses localizer deviation
and DME distance to update the FMC position. The
34-61-00
- 189 -
maximum range for LOC/DME update is 20 nautical miles - Inertial position (latitude, longitude and
and the airplane altitude must not be greater than 6000 inertially smoothed altitude)
feet above the localizer station elevation. Also, the - Vertical speed (inertially smoothed)
airplane track must be within 45 degrees of the - Groundspeed components (N-S, E-W velocity vectors)
localizer inbound course and localizer deviation must - Heading (magnetic and true)
be less than 1.25 dots for at least 5 seconds. - Pressure altitude (uncorrected and baro-corrected)
- True airspeed
With all VHF NAV radio updates, the FMC will correct - GPS data
the DME slant range distance for airplane altitude. - DME slant range
- VOR bearing
If GPS data and NAV radio data are not available or - ILS LOC deviation.
become invalid, the FMC uses ADIRU data only corrected
by a fixed error bias calculated by the FMC. Lateral Position
The FMCS can use GPS data on the ground to update the This function calculates latitude and longitude.
FMC position if the GPS data is valid. VHF NAV radio
update is not enabled on the ground. The FMCs use the position calculated from the GPS data
and the ADIRU inputs to correct their ADIRU based
The navigation sub-function also calculates the inertial lateral positions. These are the FMC positions
following nav data: and are calculated in terms of latitude and longitude.
The FMCs will use their onside GPS input from the multi
- Airplane position (latitude, longitude and mode receivers (MMR) if the data is valid. The offside
altitude) GPS data will be used if the onside data is invalid.
- Groundspeed
- Flight path angle Vertical Position
- Drift angle
- Track angle This function calculates altitude and flight path angle
- Wind velocity and direction (FPA).
- Horizontal position accuracy (actual navigation
performance). Altitude is calculated from ADIRU inertial altitude
34-61-00-025.fm
corrected by barometric pressure altitude. Flight path
The FMC uses the following inputs to calculate these angle is calculated from inertial vertical speed and
parameters:
34-61-00
- 190 -

FMC calculated ground speed. The FPA is zero when the - ADIRU drift.
airplane is on the ground.
The required navigation performance (RNP) is the
FMCS Composite Position accuracy requirement of the FMC navigation performance
within a defined airspace. It is calculated in nautical
Each FMC sends its FMC position to the other FMC with a miles and represents the radius of a circle where the
confidence factor. The confidence factors are based on probability of the airplane being within that circle is
the estimated accuracy of each FMC and the navigation more than 95%. The default values for RNP are contained
sensors that are being used in the position in the navigation data base.
calculations.
The default values for RNP are as follows:
In each FMC, FMC 1 position and FMC 2 position are used
to give a final FMC position. This final position - Oceanic - 12.0 NM
calculation from each FMC is a combination of the two - Enroute - 2.0 NM
positions weighted from their respective confidence - Terminal - 1.0 NM
factors. This final FMCS position and navigation data - Approach - 0.5 NM.
is continually compared between the two FMCs.
RNP can also be set manually on the LEGS or POS SHIFT
Actual Navigation Performance (ANP) pages on the MCDU by the flight crew. The manually set
value of RNP can not be more than the default RNP
The ANP is the accuracy of the FMC calculated position. value.
It is calculated in nautical miles by the FMCS during
all parts of the flight. It is measured in nautical ANP is compared with RNP and both show on the CDU LEGS
miles and it shows the radius of a circle around the and POS SHIFT pages. When the ANP exceeds the RNP, the
calculated FMC position where the probability of the message UNABLE REQD NAV PERF-RNP will show in the
airplane being inside the circle is 95%. scratchpad on the MCDUs.
The ANP calculation uses this data: NAVAID Selection and Tuning
- The NAV stations in use The primary FMC selects the navaids that both FMCs use.
34-61-00-025.fm
- GPS availability and accuracy It selects the navaids that give the most accurate
- Accuracy of DME range data estimate of position and have the best range and
- Accuracy of VOR bearing data geometry.
34-61-00
- 191 -
Each FMC sends four navaid frequencies to its on-side - Standard terminal arrival routes (STARs)
navigation control panel. The frequencies then go to - Procedure turns and holds
the DME interrogators. If there is a fault with a - Holding patterns
control panel, the DME interrogators get the data - Missed approaches
directly from the FMC. - Approach Procedures
- Approach and departures transitions
Each FMC is allocated two navaid pairs for position - Company route structure
updating. These pairs will be dissimilar with at most - Terminal gates.
one navaid in common between the two FMCs. The primary
FMC will use the best and third best pairs and the FMC Selection
secondary will use the second and fourth best pairs.
You use the FMC source select switch to select the
If there is only one navaid pair available, the primary primary FMC.
FMC will use that data for position updating while the
secondary FMC will propagate its position using ADIRU
data only corrected by a fixed error bias. This enables FMC Source Select Secondary
some independence in the individual FMC position Primary FMC
Switch Position FMC
calculations.
NORMAL FMC 1 FMC 2
Navigation Data Base BOTH ON L FMC 1 FMC 2
BOTH ON R FMC 2 FMC 1
The navigation data base is stored in the flash EEPROM
memory of the FMC in two parts. There is the main body The primary FMC does these functions:
of active data which is effective until a specified
expiration date and also a set of data revisions for - Selects the navaids for tuning for both FMCs
the next period of effectivity. - Determine the navigation update mode
(ADIRU/DME/DME etc.)
This information is in the navigation data base: - Transmit the initial alignment position to the
ADIRUs.
- VOR, DME, VORTAC, and TACAN navigation aids
34-61-00-025.fm
- Waypoints
- Airports and runways
- Standard instrument departures (SIDs)
34-61-00
- 192 -

GPS DATA NAV DATA

POSITION
CALCULATION FMC 1 FMCS POS & COMMON
INERTIAL AND POSITION NAV DATA DISPLAY
AIR DATA SYSTEM
CDU 1 & 2
NAV DATA BASE
GUIDANCE
FUNCTION
DME DISTANCE CALC RADIO
POSN
VOR BEARING FMC 2
SELECT
LOC DEVIATION POSITION
NAVAIDS
DME AUTOTUNE NAVIGATION

A A CONTROL
FMC SELECT PANELS
NAVIGATION SUB-FUNCTION
FMC 1
INTERSYSTEM
BUS
FMC FMCS POS & COMMON

NAV DATA DISPLAY
SYSTEM
BOTH BOTH GUIDANCE CDU 1 & 2
ON L ON R (INPUTS AND INTERNALS LIKE FMC 1) FUNCTION
DME AUTOTUNE NAVIGATION
CONTROL
34-61-00-025.fm
NORMAL
PANELS
NAVIGATION SUB-FUNCTION
FMC SOURCE SELECT SWITCH FMC 2
FMCS - FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - NAVIGATION SUB-FUNCTION
34-61-00
- 193 -
FMCS -- FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - PERFORMANCE SUB-FUNCTION
General autothrottle computer to control the vertical flight
path of the airplane.
The performance sub-function provides optimum values
for airspeed and engine thrusts to provide the most Speed targets do not go to the DFCS during takeoff or
economical vertical path profile. It uses aerodynamic approach/go-around operation. Only target N1 (limit
and engine models to do these calculations. It value or reduced value if engine derate has been
calculates this data: selected) is used.
- Speed targets Speed and Thrust Limits

- Speed limits
- N1 targets The performance sub-function also calculates minimum
- N1 limits and maximum speed and thrust limits for the climb,
- Airplane gross weight. cruise and descent phases of the flight. These make
sure that the airplane operates within its flight
Speed and Thrust Targets envelope and the engines are protected against possible
overboost.
The performance sub-function calculates the optimum
speed and thrust targets. These calculations occur Gross Weight
during climb, cruise and the descent phases of flight.
The economy mode (ECON) is the default mode for each The FMCS calculates airplane gross weight or the flight
flight phase. crew manually enters the data. Total fuel weight from
the fuel quantity processor unit goes to the FMC. The
In the economy mode of operation, the FMC uses the data flight crew can enter either gross weight or zero fuel
input from the flight crew (cruise altitude, cost index weight through the MCDUs.
etc.) to calculate the most cost efficient flight
profile. Other modes (maximum rate climb, long range If the flight crew enter gross weight, the FMC
cruise, speed descent etc.) are also available and can subtracts total fuel weight from gross weight to
be selected by the flight crew through the MCDU. calculate zero fuel weight. If the flight crew enter
zero fuel weight, the FMC adds total fuel weight and
When the VNAV mode is engaged, the speed and thrust zero fuel weight to calculate gross weight.
34-61-00-026.fm
targets go to the FMC guidance function. The guidance
function then sends out commands to the DFCS and the
34-61-00
- 194 -

Performance Data A low value for cost index means that fuel costs are
more important than time costs. A high cost index means
The FMC uses this data for the performance that time costs are more important than fuel costs. For
calculations: flights where fuel costs are high, the performance
economy speed schedules are slower. For flights where
- Air data time costs are high, the economy speed schedules are
- Cruise altitude faster.
- Cost index
- Fuel weight The flight crew enters the cost index in the MCDU and
- Engine bleed air sensors changes the data as necessary. The range is from 000
- Model/engine data base. (most economical) to 200 (time critical). This lets the
operator adjust the economy speed schedules (climb,
Air Data cruise and descent) for the conditions and routes they
operate.
The FMC uses this air data from the ADIRUs:
Fuel Weight
- Air temperature is used to calculate thrust
limits. Fuel weight data is sent by the fuel quantity processor
- Altitude is used to calculate speed and thrust unit to the FMC. It is used by the FMC in the gross
targets and limits. weight calculations.
- Airspeed is used to calculate DFCS/Autothrottle
commands. If the total fuel weight data from the fuel quantity
processor unit is invalid, the flight crew can manually
Cruise Altitude input the fuel weight to the FMC on the MCDUs. Every 30
minutes, the FMC prompts the flight crew to enter a new
Cruise altitude is entered by the flight crew through fuel weight with the message VERIFY GW AND FUEL. After
the MCDUs. It is used to establish the altitude for the the airplane is past the T/D (top of descent) and a
top of climb (T/C) point. Vref value is entered, the FMC will not show this
message.
Cost Index
34-61-00-026.fm
The cost index is a number which is a ratio of the
operator time costs (such as labor) to the fuel cost.
34-61-00
- 195 -
Engine Bleed Air Sensors performance target to the correct value and maintain
both airplane and engine optimal performance.
The FMC receives analog discretes from the air
conditioning system and the thermal antice (TAI)
systems for both the engines and wings. The FMC uses
this data to correct calculated thrust values.
Model/Engine Data Base (MEDB)
The MEDB contains this data:
- An aerodynamic model of the airplane. This

consists of recommended speed schedules, optimum
operating altitudes, buffet limit envelope and the
certified operating limits for the airplane.
Engine out operating conditions including speed
and drag data are also contained in this data base.
- Fuel flow and N1 thrust models for the engine
thrust rating selected on the airplane. These are
used to calculate fuel flow, thrust limits, engine
limits and to compensate for engine air bleed
loads.
- QRH takeoff speed data. This consists of V1, VR, V2
and takeoff stabilizer trim positions. Gross
weight, T/E flap position and center of gravity
are used to calculate these values.
Flight Envelope Protection
The operational flight program (OFP) continually
34-61-00-026.fm
monitors computed performance targets against the
airplane operation limits. If any performance target is
more than the limit, the FMC will restrict the
34-61-00
- 196 -

AIR DATA FMC 1

PERF TARGETS COMMON
AND LIMITS DISPLAY
CRUISE ALTITUDE COMPARE FMC 1 SYSTEM
CALCULATE FMC 1
PERF DATA AND FMC 2
COST INDEX PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCE
TARGETS CDU 1 & 2
TARGETS AND
AND LIMITS LIMITS GUIDANCE
FUEL WEIGHT
FUNCTION
ENGINE BLEED AIR
SENSORS
FMC 2
PRIMARY/SECONDARY MEDB PERF DATA
FMC SELECT
PERFORMANCE SUB-FUNCTION
FMC 1
FMC COMMON
FMC 2 DISPLAY
PERF TARGETS SYSTEM
BOTH BOTH INPUTS AND INTERNALS AND LIMITS
ON L ON R SAME AS FMC 1 GUIDANCE CDU 1 & 2
FUNCTION
NORMAL
34-61-00-026.fm
PERFORMANCE SUB-FUNCTION
FMC SOURCE SELECT SWITCH
FMC 2
FMCS - FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - PERFORMANCE SUB-FUNCTION
34-61-00
- 197 -
FMCS -- FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - GUIDANCE SUB-FUNCTION
General are great circle tracks between the flight plan
waypoints or constant heading legs.
The guidance sub-function calculates data for the
lateral and vertical guidance functions and supplies A waypoint shows as latitude, longitude and altitude.
guidance commands to the digital flight control system The waypoints come from the navigation data base or are
(DFCS) and autothrottle (A/T) system. The calculations put in by the flight crew.
start when the guidance sub-function receives an active
route (lateral flight plan) and an active performance This data is calculated for each way point:
plan (vertical flight plan).
- Predicted altitude
The DFCS and A/T use the commands to automatically - Time-of-arrival
guide the airplane along a lateral path and to control - Speed
airspeeds, vertical speeds and N1 targets/limits. The - Fuel remaining
LNAV mode must be active to enable the lateral guidance - Distance between the waypoints
function and the VNAV mode must be active to enable the - Flight path course between the waypoints.
vertical guidance function.
The performance plan (ZFW, cost index, cruise altitude,
NOTE: In path descents, LNAV must be valid and a valid performance modes) determines the performance speed
end of descent point must be defined in order to schedules and thrust that will be calculated by the
engage the VNAV mode. FMC. The path calculations then use the performance
data to calculate altitude, time, airspeed and fuel for
These are the major parts of the guidance sub-function: each waypoint. If there are any speed or altitude
restrictions attached to the lateral waypoints in the
- Flight plan management flight plan, these will be incorporated into the
- Lateral guidance commands vertical flight profile calculated by the FMC.
- Vertical guidance commands.
Initially the flight plan management calculates the
Flight Plan Management parameters for the waypoints in the climb and cruise
phases but the top of descent (T/D) waypoint will be
The lateral route is a set of navigation legs. A unknown.
34-61-00-027.fm
navigation leg is a path between two waypoints. The
flight plan management process calculates the great The T/D is calculated using the last waypoint in the
circle and turn segments for each path. Navigation legs flight plan and working backwards. The approximate T/D
34-61-00
- 198 -

is estimated to get a descent speed schedule and Airspeed, N1 limit and mode commands are also
descent path gradient together with fuel remaining. calculated and sent to the A/T system.
Range in descent is first calculated from the altitude
change in descent and an assumed flight path angle. The These are the two basic modes for vertical guidance:
T/D will be calculated by subtracting range in descent
from the total flight plan range. - Airspeed (VNAV SPD)
- Path (VNAV PATH).
Next the estimated fuel remaining at T/D and wind
profile are used to calculate descent range, speed In the path sub-mode, the DFCS controls the airplane to
schedules, path gradient and final fuel remaining. Then a target FMCS vertical speed. This path will be
the full descent leg is calculated using the last set calculated for a specified speed/thrust profile. In
of data backward from the terminal waypoint. This gives descents, the default will be idle thrust and economy
the T/D and a predicted fuel remaining value. The speeds. VNAV PATH will show on the FMAs.
descent phase of the flight plan is now combined with
the climb and cruise phases to complete the flight plan If the VNAV function is not valid and vertical guidance
predictions. outputs are not calculated, the FMCS sets the vertical
steering command to no computed data (NCD). The DFCS
Lateral Guidance Commands disconnects the VNAV mode and reverts to CWS mode. The
FMC lights on the ASAs will illuminate to alert the
When a complete route has been activated in the FMCS flight crew to this condition together with the VNAV
and the LNAV mode is valid, the lateral guidance DISCONNECT message in the MCDU scratchpads.
function sends lateral steering commands to the DFCS.
For descent, a vertical path deviation display is sent
If the LNAV function is not valid and lateral guidance to the common display system. The deviation shows the
outputs are not calculated, the FMCS sets the lateral difference between the reference altitude on the
guidance outputs to no computed data (NCD). The DFCS vertical reference path and the current airplane
disconnects the LNAV mode and reverts to control wheel altitude.
steering (CWS).
CDS Function
Vertical Guidance Commands
34-61-00-027.fm
This function provides the common display system (CDS)
The vertical guidance function calculates and sends with display/background data to accurately show the
airspeed or vertical speed targets to the DFCS.
34-61-00
- 199 -
airplane's position with respect to the flight plan - VNAV ALT annunciation
path. - FMC source select annunciation.
The following data is sent to the CDS:
- FMC present position (Lat & Long)

- Distance to go to a waypoint
- Groundspeed
- Estimated time of arrival
- Desired track
- Cross track distance
- Vertical deviation
- Range to altitude
- Navigation sensor position (IRS, GPS, radio)
- V1 speed
- VR speed
- Speed targets
- Waypoint bearing
- True track angle
- Magnetic track angle
- Drift angle
- Flight path angle
- Waypoint, navaid, airport symbology
- Discrete word.
The discrete word contains the following data:
- To/from
- IRS source
34-61-00-027.fm
- IRS position difference
- N1 limit mode
- Reduced thrust derate
34-61-00
- 200 -

LATERAL
LATERAL POSITION STEERING
LNAV ENG COMMANDS
DFCS GUIDANCE
LNAV - ACTIVE XTK ERROR

CDU DATA & LAST WPT
POSITIONS
FLT VNAV SPD ENG
MCP SPD PLAN
MNGMT A/S ERROR
VNAV - VERTICAL VERTICAL
MCP ALT PROFILE STEERING
VTK ERROR
COMMANDS
VERTICAL POSITION
VNAV PATH
VNAV PATH ENG (CRZ & DES) ENG (DES)
AIRSPEED
VNAV PATH (DES) ENG
THRUST GUIDANCE
A/S ERROR
VNAV - TARGET
AIRSPEED (CRZ)
MCP SPD
FLT IDLE THRUST
PLAN VNAV - IDLE
MNGMT
THRUST
CDU DATA VNAV - TARGET COMMANDS
VNAV SPD ENG
N1 (CLB/DES) N1 ERROR
ACTUAL N1
34-61-00-027.fm
COMMON
GUIDANCE CDS FUNCTION DISPLAY
SYSTEM
FMC
FMCS - FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - GUIDANCE SUB-FUNCTION
34-61-00
- 201 -
FMCS -- FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - GUIDANCE SUB-FUNCTION - LNAV AND VNAV MODE LOGIC
General FMC VNAV Logic
LNAV and VNAV logic uses inputs from several sources to These inputs to the FMCS are necessary to engage the
engage the LNAV and VNAV modes. VNAV mode:
The FMCS guidance sub-function needs these logic inputs - Airplane in the air
to complete its guidance command output path to the - ADIRU in the Nav mode and the data is valid
DFCS and the A/T system. - Performance data (ZFW or GW, fuel reserves, cost
index and cruise altitude) is valid
LNAV/VNAV Mode Activation - Glideslope mode is not active
- Go-around mode is not active
LNAV or VNAV are engaged by selecting the LNAV or VNAV - VNAV arm/operate.
switch on the EDFCS mode control panel (MCP). The MCP
then sends the mode requests by way of the flight VNAV will engage in VNAV SPEED mode when:
control computers (FCCs) to the guidance sub-function
in the FMC. - A climb or a speed descent flight phase is active
- The airplane is not in level flight
FMC LNAV Logic - VNAV mode is active.
These are the inputs to the FMCS necessary to engage VNAV will engage in VNAV PATH mode when:
the LNAV mode:
- The airplane is holding altitude or a path descent
- ADIRU in the Nav mode and the data is valid is active
- LNAV capture criteria is satisfied (The present - Active lateral route (LNAV engaged)
airplane track will intercept the active flight - VNAV mode is active.
leg at an angle of 90 degrees or less and the
crosstrack deviation is less than 3 nautical The speed descent flight phase is active when the
miles) flight crew selects the SPEED prompt on the CDU descent
- Active route (no discontinuity to the next (DES) page.
waypoint)
34-61-00-028.fm
- Localizer mode is not active The path descent flight phase is active when the flight
- Go-around mode is not active crew selects PATH on the CDU descent (DES) page.
- LNAV arm/operate (MCP).
34-61-00
- 202 -

LNAV LOGIC
ADIRU IN NAV MODE
LNAV CAPTURE CRITERIA VALID
ACTIVE ROUTE LNAV ACTIVE

TO GUIDANCE SUB-FUNCTION
LOCALIZER MODE ACTIVE
GO-AROUND MODE ACTIVE
LNAV ARM/OPERATE
VNAV LOGIC
LEVEL FLIGHT REQUIRED
CLIMB FLIGHT PHASE VNAV SPD
SPEED DESCENT FLIGHT PHASE ACTIVE
AIRPLANE IN AIR
ADIRU IN NAV MODE
PERF DATA VALID

TO GUIDANCE SUB-FUNCTION
GLIDE SLOPE MODE ACTIVE
GO-AROUND MODE ACTIVE
VNAV ARM/OPERATE
VNAV PATH
34-61-00-028.fm
ACTIVE ROUTE
ACTIVE
PATH DESCENT FLT PHASE
LEVEL FLIGHT REQUIRED
FMCS - FMC FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - GUIDANCE SUB-FUNCTION - LNAV AND VNAV MODE LOGIC
34-61-00
- 203 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - GROUND POWER UP - 1
General
The MCDU and FMCS both do internal BITE tests at power

up. If the power up test is normal, the MCDUs show the
MENU page.
The MENU page always shows the FMC prompt at line

select key 1L. The other available sub-systems show
below the FMC prompt.
Selection of the FMC prompt or any FMCS mode key on the

MCDU makes the FMCS the active user and the IDENT page
shows.
The status of the sub-systems shows on the MENU page by

the label <ACT> to the right of the active sub-system.
The label <REQ> shows to the right of a sub-system if
it is not active but has sent a request to the MCDU to
request operator attention.
The MENU page automatically shows if the primary FMC

fails but the FMC prompt will not show.
34-61-00-029.fm
34-61-00
- 204 -

MENU MENU
<FMC <FMC <ACT>
<ACARS <ACARS <REQ>
<ACMS <ACMS
<DFDAU <DFDAU
INITIAL PAGE MENU PAGE
34-61-00-029.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - GROUND POWER UP - 1
34-61-00
- 205 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - GROUND POWER UP - 2
FMC
At power-up, each FMC does a check of the status of the

other FMC. During power-up, the MCDU annunciators come
on momentarily. If the primary FMC fails at power-up,
the FMC prompt does not show on the MENU page. The FMC
warning light on the autoflight status annunciators
also comes on. If the secondary FMC fails, the primary
FMC shows the SINGLE FMC OPERATION message in the
scratch pad on the IDENT page. If the transfer switch
is in normal, the FMC warning light comes on.
MCDU
A MCDU display is blank if the MCDU fails at power-up.
Other Tests
The FMCs also do a check of these functions at power-

up:
- Airplane and engine configuration program pins for

parity
- Cross compare FMC 1 and FMC 2 data bases and
operational flight programs.
For example, the message OP PROGRAM INVALID shows if

the operational flight program (OFP) of the primary FMC
is invalid at power-up. If the secondary FMC has a
valid OFP, the message tells the operator to switch to
34-61-00-030.fm
the both on right position.
34-61-00
- 206 -

FMC PROMPT DOES

NOT SHOW
MENU I DEN T 1 / 2
MO D E L E N G R A T I N G FMC WARNING
7 37 - 7 0 0 22.0K LIGHT IS ON
NA V D A T A A C T I V E
<XXXXX T BC 6 8 8 0 4 01 M A R 18 A P R1 7 / 9 7
<XXXXX A P R 18 M A Y1 7 / 9 7
FMC WARNING OP P R O G R A M
FMC LIGHT IS ON 5 49 8 4 9 - 0 01 FMC
S U P P D A T A
P/RST A P R1 7 / 9 7 P/RST
a a
< IN D E X P OS INIT>
SI N G L E F M C O P E R A T I O N
SCRATCH PAD
MESSAGE
PRIMARY FMC FAILS POWER-UP TEST SECONDARY FMC FAILS POWER-UP TEST
FMC WARNING
LIGHT IS ON
BLANK SCREEN OP P ROG R A M IN V A LI D
SE T FMC S OURCE S E LE C T
T O BO T H - ON R
CDU DISPLAY FMC
P/RST
a
34-61-00-030.fm
CDU FAILS POWER-UP TEST PRIMARY FMC OPERATIONAL FLIGHT
PROGRAM INVALID
NON-NORMAL POWER-UP
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - GROUND POWER UP - 2
34-61-00
- 207 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - PRE-FLIGHT INTRODUCTION
34-61-00-031.fm
34-61-00
- 208 -

General POS INIT Page
This is an introduction to the MCDU pages the flight This page lets you set the reference airplane initial
crew uses to enter pre-flight data into the FMCS. More position. This data is necessary to start ADIRU
information about each page is described in detail on alignment. Access to the POS REF and POS SHIFT pages is
subsequent pages. from this page.
Data RTE Page
You use this type of data to pre-flight the FMCS: This page lets you make a flight plan or set a company
route from the navigation data base. If the entered
- Airplane initial position route or company route does not have an origin
- Route structure departure or destination approach you must also select
- Performance data. a departure runway and arrival data.
You use the line select keys (LSK) and function keys to DEP/ARR INDEX Page
enter and verify data on these pages:
This page lets you select the departure runway and
- IDENT standard instrument departure (SID) data. You can also
- POS INIT select the standard terminal arrival route (STAR),
- RTE approach, and destination runway on this page.
- DEP/ARR INDEX
- PERF INIT PERF INIT Page
- N1 LIMIT
- TAKEOFF REF. This page lets you enter aircraft and atmospheric
parameters necessary for the FMCS to calculate the
IDENT Page vertical flight profile performance data.
This page lets you verify the FMCS operational flight N1 LIMIT Page
program and data base identification numbers.
34-61-00-031.fm
This page lets you select the engine thrust limits for
display by the N1 limit bugs on the engine indication
34-61-00
- 209 -
and for use by the autothrottle. You also select
outside air temperature on this page.
TAKEOFF REF Page
This page lets you select the takeoff flaps setting and
takeoff V speed values.
CAUTION: ANY FMC ENTRIES MADE ON NON-BITE PAGES SHOULD

BE REMOVED AT THE COMPLETION OF MAINTENANCE
ACTIVITIES. THIS PREVENTS MAINTENANCE
ACTIVITIES FROM HAVING AN UNINTENTIONAL
IMPACT ON FMC FLIGHT OPERATIONS. FMC ENTRIES
MAY BE REMOVED BY USING THE DELETE KEY OR BY
TURNING OFF POWER TO THE FMC FOR AT LEAST TEN
SECONDS.
34-61-00-031.fm
34-61-00
- 210 -

IDENT 1 / 2
IDENTIFY
- EXAMINE THE DATA BASES AND PROGRAM POS INIT 1 / 3
POSITION INITIALIZATION
- SET IRS POSITION RTE 1 / X
- USE KEYBOARD FOR MANUAL ENTRY

ROUTE
- SET A COMPANY ROUTE OR WAYPOINTS
- ACTIVATE AND EXECUTE THE ROUTE DEP/ARR IN DEX 1 / 1
DEPARTURE DATA
- RUNWAYS
ACT RTE
- STANDARD INSTRUMENT DEPARTURES (SIDS) 1 / X
- STANDARD TERMINAL ARRIVAL ROUTES (STARS)
ACTIVE ROUTE
PERF INIT 1 / 2
PERFORMANCE INITIALIZATION
- SET ZERO FUEL WEIGHT OR GROSS WEIGHT
N1 LIM IT
- SET RESERVE FUEL 1 / 1
- SET CRUISE ALTITUDE

- SET CRUISE WIND AND TOP OF CLIMB OAT (OPTIONAL)
- SET COST INDEX
TAKEOFF REF 1 / 2
N1 LIMIT
- SET OAT
- SET N1 THRUST LIMITS
34-61-00-031.fm
TAKEOFF REFERENCE
- SET FLAPS
- SET V1, VR, V2
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - PRE-FLIGHT INTRODUCTION
34-61-00
- 211 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - IDENT PAGE
34-61-00-032.fm
34-61-00
- 212 -

Purpose in the word SIPART in the scratch pad and push LSK 5L.
This line is blank when the part number does not show.
The IDENT page lets the crew review the FMCS
operational flight program and data base identification Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This lets you change
numbers. The POS INIT and INDEX pages can also be the display to the INIT/REF page.
selected from the IDENT page.
Line 1R shows the engine thrust rating. This data is
Page Access set by the airframe/engine program pin configuration.
This line is blank if the FMCS finds a parity error for
The IDENT page is the first page that shows on the MCDU the airframe/engine program pin or a valid performance
when you select the FMC prompt on the MENU page. The data base is not in the FMCS memory. It is also blank if
IDENT page can also be selected from the INIT/REF INDEX data for the airframe/engine program pin configuration
page. is not in the performance data base.
Page 1 Data Lines 2R and 3R show the effective dates of the active
and inactive navigation data bases. You can do an
Line 1L shows the airplane model. The airframe/engine exchange of the data between these two lines to make a
program pin configuration sets this data. This line is new data base active or to do a recall of the old data
blank if the FMC finds a parity error for the base. You can only do the exchange when the airplane is
airframe/engine program pins or a valid performance on the ground. The active data base is compared to the
data base is not in the FMC memory. It is also blank if FMC clock input at power-up, and if the active data
data for the airframe/engine program pin configuration base is out- of-date, the CDU message NAV DATA OUT OF
is not in the performance data base. DATE shows in the scratchpad.
Line 2L shows the navigation data base identification Line 5R shows there is supplemental data and gives the
number in the FMCS memory. This data field is blank if effective date of that data. The line is blank if an
a navigation data base is not in the FMCS memory. effective date is not set or there is no supplemental
data.
Line 4L shows the FMCS operational program software
part number and the update version. Line 6R shows the POS INIT prompt. This lets you change
34-61-00-032.fm
the display to the POS INIT page.
Line 5L can show the Smiths Industries operational
program software part number. To show the number, put
34-61-00
- 213 -
Page 2 Data
Line 1L shows the identification number of the

performance default data base in the FMCS operational
flight program.
Line 2L shows the identification number of the software

options data base.
Line 3L shows the identification number of the QRH T/O

speeds data base.
Line 4L shows the identification number of the ACARS

datalink configuration file.
Line 5L shows the identification number of the

model/engine performance data base. This line is blank
if the data base is not in memory.
Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This lets you change

the display to the INIT/REF page.
Line 6R shows the POS INIT prompt. This lets you change
the display to the POS INIT page.
34-61-00-032.fm
34-61-00
- 214 -

IDENT 1 / 2
MO D E L E N G R A T I N G
1L 7 37 - X X X XX.XK 1R
FMC PROMPT ON MENU PAGE NA V D A T A A C T I V E
2L T BC 6 8 8 0 4 0 1 S E P 2 2 O CT 1 9 / 9 8 2R
3L O C T 2 0 N OV 1 6 / 9 8 3R
OP P R O G R A M
4L 5 49 8 4 9 - 0 X X ( U 1 0 . X ) 4R
S U PP D A T A
5L 1 S EP 1 7 / 9 8 5R
IDENT PROMPT ON INIT/REF INDEX PAGE
6L < IN D E X POS INIT> 6R
NEXT PREV
PAGE PAGE
I D E NT 2 / 2
P E R F D E F AU L TS
1L DEFAULT04P 1R
S W O P T I O NS
2L DEFAULT0XO 2R
Q R H T / O SP D S
3L XXXXXXXXXX 3R
D A T A L I N K C O N FI G
4L DEFAULT04D 4R
M O D E L / E N GI N E DAT A
5L XXXXXXXXXX 5R
1 PUT IN SIPART AT KEY AT 5L AND PUSH 5L TO SHOW THE 6L <INDEX POS INIT> 6R
SMITHS INDUSTRIES OPERATION PROGRAM PART NUMBER. 2
34-61-00-032.fm
2 THESE ARE EXAMPLES OF THE DATA BASE IDENT NUMBERS
AND ARE NOT THE DATA BASE IDENT NUMBERS
ON YOUR AIRPLANE(S).
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - IDENT PAGE
34-61-00
- 215 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - INIT/REF INDEX PAGE
34-61-00-033.fm
34-61-00
- 216 -

Purpose LSK 4L shows the first page of the TAKEOFF pages. These
pages are to select takeoff thrusts and speeds.
The INIT/REF INDEX page shows a menu of pages you can
use to initialize the following: LSK 5L shows the approach reference (APPROACH) page.
This page gives specific information on the condition
- FMCS of the airplane and the selected runway and approach
- ADIRU procedures of the flight plan.
- Other reference data.
LSK 6L shows the OFFSET page. This page is to start and
Also, you can use this page to go to the FMCS MAINT BITE end an offset to the flight plan route.
INDEX page.
LSK 1R shows the navigation data reference (NAV DATA)
Page Access page. This page is to enter this data into the
temporary navigation data base:
To select this page, push line select key 6L on pages
that show the index prompt and are not BITE pages. The - Waypoints
INDEX prompt on BITE pages changes the display back to - Navaids
the last menu. - Airports.
Information LSK 2R shows the message recall (MSG RECALL) page. This
page is used to see any messages cleared from the
Line select key 1L (LSK) shows the first page of the scratch pad but are still active.
configuration identification IDENT pages. These pages
show the FMCS data base and program configuration data. LSK 3R shows the alternate destination (ALTN DEST)
page. This page is used to find this data for a
LSK 2L shows the first page of the position specified alternate destination:
initialization (POS) pages. These pages are for ADIRS
initialization and to show navigation sensor positions. - Distance
- Time
LSK 3L shows the first page of the performance - Fuel remaining.
34-61-00-033.fm
initialization (PERF) pages. These pages are to enter
the airplane parameters that the FMC needs for VNAV LSK 4R shows the ACARS page. This page is customer
calculations. defined and shows prompts to uplink/downlink FMC data.
34-61-00
- 217 -
LSK 5R shows the selectable configuration (SEL CONFIG)
page. This page is used to see the configuration data
for loadable software. It shows only when the airplane
is on the ground.
LSK 6R shows the maintenance bite index MAINT page. The

MAINT prompt shows only when the airplane is on the
ground and the groundspeed is less than 20 knots. When
the airplane is in the air, the NAV STATUS prompt shows
in place of the MAINT prompt.
34-61-00-033.fm
34-61-00
- 218 -

IDENT 1/ 2
M OD E L ENG R A TI N G
7 3 7- X X X X X. X K
N AV D A T A A C TI V E
T B C6 8 2 0 4 0 1 M A R 18 A PR 1 7/ 9 8
A P R 18 M AY 1 7/ 9 8
O P P R O G R A M
5 4 88 4 9 - 0 0 1 ( U 1 0. 1 )
SU PP DA T A
APR 1 7/ 9 7
< I ND E X POS I NI T >
INIT/REF INDEX 1 /1
<IDENT NAV D A TA >
<POS MSG R E C A LL >
<PERF ALTN D E ST >

<TAKEOFF A C A RS >
<APPROACH SEL C O N F IG >
<OFFSET M A I NT >
34-61-00-033.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - INIT/REF INDEX PAGE
34-61-00
- 219 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - POSITION PAGES
34-61-00-034.fm
34-61-00
- 220 -

Purpose POS INIT Page
These are the three position pages: Line 2L shows dash prompts for an airport identifier.
The identifiers you put here must also be in the
- Position initialization (POS INIT) navigation data base. If the identifier you put in is
- Position reference (POS REF) valid and is in the data base, the latitude/longitude
- Position shift (POS SHIFT). (LAT/LON) for the airport shows at LSK 2R.
The POS INIT page is used to enter the present position Line 3L shows dash prompts for airport gate
for ADIRU alignment. identifiers. If the identifier you put in is valid and
is in the data base, the LAT/LON for the gate shows at
The box prompts show that data must be entered to LSK 3R. The airport identifier must have been entered
complete the preflight. The dash prompts show that the first.
data entry is optional.
Line 5L shows airplane clock input. The clock input
The POS REF page shows airplane position and (time and date) to both FMCs is from the GPS. If GPS is
groundspeed as calculated by the FMC, each ADIRU, each not valid, the FMCs calculate time with an FMC internal
GPS, and radio position. clock. The time may be set on this page.
The POS SHIFT page is used to shift the FMC position to Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the
the specified navigation sensor position. INIT/REF INDEX page.
Page Access Line 1R shows the last calculated present position of

the primary FMC. This data is saved in the FMC at power
You use the INIT REF function key or these CDU pages, down.
to go to the first position page:
Lines 2R and 3R show the LAT/LON position for the
- INIT/REF INDEX reference airport and gate identifiers set at Line 2L
- IDENT and 3L.
- TAKEOFF REF.
34-61-00-034.fm
Line 4R shows the header SET IRS POS and box prompts.
This data field is used to enter present position for
34-61-00
- 221 -
initialization of the ADIRUs when the airplane is on select key. The selected sensor will now be highlighted
the ground. and the EXEC light will come on. When you select EXEC,
the FMCS navigation position changes to the selected
Line 5R shows the header SET IRS HDG. This data field sensor position and UPDATE COMPLETE will show at line
is used to enter heading data when any ADIRU is in the 5L in small font.
attitude (ATT) mode. It will be blank if there is no
ADIRU in the ATT mode. The FMC, ADIRU, GPS, and radio data fields are blank on
the ground.
Line 6R shows the ROUTE prompt. This selects the route
page. Line 4L shows the RNP/ANP values.
POS REF Page Line 5L shows UPDATE COMPLETE in small font after a
position shift has been selected and executed (EXEC).
This page shows the airplane position and ground speed
calculated by the FMC, each ADIRU, each GPS and radio Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the
position. Any data field may be selected to the INIT/REF INDEX page.
scratchpad and used to initialize the ADIRUs. These
data fields will be blank if the position data is Line 5R shows the NAV STATUS prompt. This selects the
invalid. NAV STATUS pages.
The radio position will always be blank on the ground. Line 6R shows the CANCEL prompt. This shows only when a
sensor has been selected for position shift. This lets
POS SHIFT Page the crew cancel the selected sensor for position shift.
This page shows the bearing and distance between the The data in the center of the GPS and IRS data fields at
FMCS calculated position shown on the POS REF page and line 2 and 3 shows that both GPSs and ADIRUs are used in
the position of the individual FMCs, ADIRUs, GPS and the FMC position calculation.
radio systems. This page also provides the capability
to update the FMCS calculated position to one of the
positions shown when the airplane is in the air.
34-61-00-034.fm
The FMC position may be overridden by selection of the
particular navigation sensor position with the line
34-61-00
- 222 -

INIT/REF INDEX PAGE

(SELECT POS)
POS INIT 1 / 3 DASH PROMPTS
L A ST P O S
IDENT PAGE N40 38.0 W073 46.4
R E F A I R P O R T
(SELECT POS INIT) ----
G A T E
----- BOX PROMPTS
SE T I R S P O S
. .
TAKEOFF REF PAGE G M T - M O N / D Y SE T I R S H D G
(SELECT POS) 1432.2z 11/29 ---
------------------------
CDU (SELECT INIT REF) <INDEX ROUTE>
AIRPLANE IS
ON THE GROUND
AN ADIRU IS IN FMC, GPS, AND IRS RADIO POSITION

ALIGNMENT MODE NEXT PREV DATA FIELDS ARE BLANK DATA FIELD IS BLANK
PAGE PAGE ON THE GROUND ON THE GROUND
IRS DATA FIELD

IS BLANK IF THE POS REF 2 / 3
NEXT POS SHIFT 3 / 3
ADIRU IS OFF, IN F M C P O S G S PAGE F M C - L F M C - R
N40 38.1 W073 46.0 1K T <274 /0.0N M O94 /0.3N M >
ALIGN MODE (AND I R S L G P S- L G P S( 2 ) G P S- R
PRESENT POSITION N40 38.0 W073 46.3 3K T <210 /1.4N M 220 /1.3N M >
NOT SET), OR ATT I R S R I R S- L I R S( 2 ) I R S- R
N40 38.8 W073 46.1 2K T <300 / 11N M 110 /2.3N M >
G P S L R N P / A C T U A L R A D I O
N40 38.0 W073 44.3 2 . 8 0 / 0 . 1 5 N M O84 /0.1N M >
G P S R -----U P D A T E C O M P L E T E ----
N40 38.2 W073 45.8 NAV STATUS>
R A D I O
N40 38.8 W073 46.1 <INDEX CANCEL>
PREV
RADIO POSITION PAGE
34-61-00-034.fm
DATA FIELD IS BLANK
ON THE GROUND
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - POSITION PAGES
34-61-00
- 223 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - DEP/ARR INDEX PAGE
34-61-00-036.fm
34-61-00
- 224 -

Purpose data base. After you put in an airport identifier, the
ARRIVALS page for that airport shows.
The DEP/ARR INDEX page shows the departure and arrival
data for the origin and destination of each of the DEPARTURES Page
stored routes and for other selected airports in the
navigation data base. This page lets you select a departure procedure from
the origin airport.
Page Access
Lines 1L through 5L show an alphabetical list of the
Select the DEP/ARR mode select key on the CDU to get standard instrument departures (SIDs) and engine out
access to this page. SIDS (EO SIDS) for the selected airport. When you
select one of the SIDs, the selected SID shows, and the
DEP/ARR INDEX Page EXEC pushbutton light comes on. Selection of the EXEC
pushbutton makes the SID active.
Line 1L shows the <DEP prompt for the origin airport
(KJFK in this example). This selects the DEPARTURE page Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the
for that airport. DEP/ARR INDEX page.
Line 6L shows the OTHER DEP prompt. This lets you put Lines 1R through 5R show a numerical list of the
in other airport identifiers that are in the navigation runways for the selected airport. When you select one
data base. After you put in an airport identifier, the of the runways, the selected runway shows and the EXEC
DEPARTURES page for that airport shows. light comes on.
Line 1R shows the ARR> prompt for the origin airport NOTE: If a SID is subsequently selected, only the
(KJFK). This selects the ARRIVALS page for that runways associated with that SID will be
airport. displayed.
Line 2R shows the ARR> prompt for the destination Line 6R shows the ROUTE prompt. This selects the ROUTE
airport (KATL). This selects the ARRIVALS page for that page.
airport.
34-61-00-036.fm
Line 6R shows the OTHER ARR prompt. This lets you put
in other airport identifiers that are in the navigation
34-61-00
- 225 -
ARRIVALS Page
This page lets you select an arrival procedure for the

destination airport.

standard terminal arrival routes (STARs) for the
selected airport. When you select one of the STARs, the
selected STAR shows and the EXEC pushbutton light comes
on.
Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the

DEP/ARR INDEX page.
Lines 1R through 5R show a list of approaches, then a

list of runways for the selected airport. When you
select an approach, the selected approach/runway is
displayed and the EXEC pushbutton light comes on.
When the flight crew select an approach and push the

EXEC pushbutton, line 2R shows the G/S ENABLE ON/OFF
prompt. This lets the flight crew select the G/S enable
function. The default is G/S enable ON. Selection
toggles the G/S enable function between ON and OFF. The
current selected mode is displayed in large font and
the non-selected mode is displayed in small font.
Line 6R shows the ROUTE prompt. This selects the ROUTE

page.
34-61-00-036.fm
34-61-00
- 226 -

DEPARTURE OR
ARRIVAL PAGES
(SELECT LSK 6L)
DEP / ARR INDEX 1 / 1
CDU <DEP K JFK ARR>

(SELECT DEP/ARR
FUNCTION KEY) K MWH ARR>
DEP O THER ARR

<---- ---->
K J F K D E P AR T U R E S 1 / 2 KMWH ARRIVALS 1 / 1
S I D S R U N W A Y S S T A R S AP P R OA C H E S
BELLE1 4L DOUG1 I LS 32R
G / S
CYN9 4R MOSES1 O N/ O F F>
FREH8 13L POTHS1

OKWD7 13R TEST3
PLUME3 22L
- - - - - - - -- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - ------------------ --- ---
<INDEX ROUTE> <INDEX ROUTE>
34-61-00-036.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - DEP/ARR INDEX PAGE
34-61-00
- 227 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - DEPARTURE PAGE
Purpose Line 6L will also show the ERASE prompt while the
departure data is being modified. This allows the
The DEPARTURES page shows the standard instrument flight crew to erase an entry.
departures (SID) and runways for the origin of each of
the stored routes. It also shows this for other Lines 1R through 5R show a numerical list of the
selected airports in the navigation data base. runways for the selected airport. When one of the
runways is selected, the selected runway is displayed
Page Access in line 1R as <SEL> with any applicable SIDs displayed
in lines 1L through 5L. The EXEC pushbutton light also
Select the <DEP prompt on the DEP/ARR INDEX page to comes on.
access this page.
NOTE: If a SID is subsequently selected, only the
DEPARTURES Page runways associated with that SID will be
displayed.
The flight crew use this page to select a SID or
specific runway from the origin airport. Line 6R shows the ROUTE prompt. This selects the ROUTE
page.
standard instrument departures (SID). They also show
engine out SIDS (EO SIDS) for the selected airport.
Select a SID to display it in line 1L as <SEL>. The
applicable runway for that SID is shown marked <ACT>.
If there are any transitions associated with the SID,

they will be displayed in lines 2L through 5L. The EXEC
pushbutton light also comes on. Select EXEC to make the
SID active.
Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt at first, and after the

EXEC pushbutton has been pushed. You push this to
34-61-00-110.fm
select the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
34-61-00
- 228 -

K J F K D E P AR T U R E S 1 / 2 K J F K D E P AR T U R E S 1 / 2
S ID S R U N W A Y S S I D S R U N W A Y S
BELLE1 4L CYN9 <SEL> 4L
T R A N S
CYN9 4R -NONE- 4R
FREH8 13L 13L

E O S I D
OKWD7 13R <ACT> 13R
PLUME3 22L 22L

- - - - - - - -- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - -
<INDEX ROUTE> <ERASE ROUTE>
EXEC
K J F K D E P AR T U R E S 1 / 2 K J F K D E P AR T U R E S 1 / 2
S ID S R U N W A Y S S ID S R U N W A Y S
CYN9 <SEL> <SEL> 13L CYN9 <ACT> <ACT> 13L
T R A N S T R A N S
-NONE- -NONE-
- - - - - - - -- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - -
<ERASE ROUTE> <INDEX ROUTE>
34-61-00-110.fm
EXEC EXEC
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - DEPARTURE PAGE
34-61-00
- 229 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - ARRIVAL PAGE
34-61-00-111.fm
34-61-00
- 230 -

Purpose Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the
DEP/ARR INDEX page. It is displayed initially and after
The ARRIVALS page shows the standard terminal arrival the EXEC pushbutton has been pushed.
routes (STAR) and approach data for the destination of
each of the stored routes and for other selected Line 6L will also show the ERASE prompt while the
airports in the navigation data base. arrival data is being modified. This allows the flight
crew to erase an entry.
Page Access
Lines 1R through 5R show a list of approaches then a
This page may be accessed by selecting the ARR> prompt list of runways for the selected airport. If a
on the DEP/ARR INDEX page. different approach is selected, the selected approach
is displayed in line 1R as <SEL>.
ARRIVALS Page
If a different runway is selected, the selected runway
This page lets the flight crew select an arrival is displayed in line 1R as <SEL> and a runway extension
procedure for the destination airport. data field appears at line 3R. This allows the flight
crew to enter a runway extension fix. Allowable entries
Lines 1L through 5L show an alphabetical list of the are from 1NM to 25NM.
standard terminal arrival routes (STARs) for the
selected airport. When one of the STARs is selected, When a different runway is selected, a flight path
the selected STAR is displayed in line 1L as <SEL> with angle (FPA) data field appears at line 4R. The default
the applicable approach for that STAR in line 1R marked value is 3.00 degrees. Allowable entries are from 2.00
<ACT>. to 5.50 degrees.
If there are any transitions associated with the STAR, If a different approach/runway has been selected, the
they will be displayed in lines 2L through 5L. If a EXEC pushbutton will also be on and selection of EXEC
transition is selected, the selected transition is makes the STAR/approach/runway active.
displayed in line 2L as <SEL>.
When EXEC is selected, the G/S ENABLE ON/OFF prompt is
The EXEC pushbutton light also comes on and selection displayed in line 2R. This allows the flight crew to
34-61-00-111.fm
of EXEC will make the SID and transition active. select the G/S enable function. The default is G/S
enable ON. Selection toggles the G/S enable function
between ON and OFF. The current selected mode shows in
34-61-00
- 231 -
large font and the non-selected mode shows in small
font.
Line 6R shows the ROUTE prompt. This selects the ROUTE

page.
34-61-00-111.fm
34-61-00
- 232 -

KABC ARRIVALS 1 / 2 KABC ARRIVALS 1 / 2

STARS APPROACHES STARS APPROACHES
LGC2 <ACT>I LS 27L MACEY1<SEL> <ACT> I LS 27L
TRANS
MACEY1 I LS 09R KMX I LS 09R
RMG8<ACT> I LS 27R MAC I LS 27R

RUNWAYS RUNWAYS
SINCA1 09L PSK 09L
TOC
------------------ --- --- ------------- ----- --- ---
<INDEX ROU TE> <ERASE ROU TE>

STARS APPROACHES STARS RUNWAYS
MACEY1<SEL> <ACT>ILS 27L MACEY1<SEL> <SEL>09L
TRANS TRANS
PSK<SEL> ILS 09R PSK<SEL>
RWY EXT
I LS 27R - -. - N M
RUNWAYS FPA
09L 3.00
------------------ --- --- ------------------ --- ---

<ERASE ROU TE> <ERASE ROU TE>
12
12
STARS RUNWAYS STARS RUNWAYS
MACEY1<SEL> <SEL>09L MACEY1<ACT> <ACT>09L
TRANS TRANS G/S
PSK<SEL> PSK<ACT> ON/ O F F >
RWY EXT RWY EXT
1 2. 0 N M EXEC 1 2. 0 N M
FPA EXEC
FPA
3.00 3.00
34-61-00-111.fm
--------------------- --- ------------------ --- ---
<ERASE ROU TE> <INDEX ROU TE>
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - ARRIVAL PAGE
34-61-00
- 233 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - LEGS PAGE
General NOTE: If the leg is a great circle track, the computed
course to the next waypoint will be shown. If the
The LEGS page is used by the flight crew to enter and leg is a constant heading leg, the computed
review data for each leg of the active route. course will be shown with the suffix HDG.
Page Access Line select key 6L shows these prompts:
This page may be accessed from any of these pages: - ERASE (shows when data is being modified)
- LOAD (shows when data may be uplinked via an ACARS
- RTE DATA message)
- SELECT DESIRED WPT page. - RNP/ACTUAL (required navigation performance/actual
navigation performance).
Alternatively, selecting the LEGS mode key on the MCDU
will access this page. Line select key 6R shows these prompts:
Legs Page Information - RTE DATA (selects the RTE DATA page)
- ACTIVATE (shown before the route has been
Line select key 1L shows the active waypoint in the activated and executed by the flight crew)
flight plan. The computed course to the active waypoint - MAP CTR STEP.
is shown above the identifier as well as the distance
to go (DTG) to the active waypoint. Speed and altitude The MAP CTR STEP function is enabled when the PLAN mode
at the waypoint are also shown. has been selected on the EFIS control panel. It lets
the flight crew step through the active flight plan and
Line select keys 2L through 5L show subsequent review the data for each waypoint. The selected
waypoints in the active flight plan with this data: waypoint will be shown in the center of the navigation
display. The <CTR> prompt shows the selected waypoint
- Computed course to waypoint on the LEGS page.
- Computed leg length
- Speed and altitude.
34-61-00-073.fm
34-61-00
- 234 -

ACT RTE LE GS 1 / X ACT RTE LEGS 1 / X

32 1 HD G 8 N M 3 2 1 H D G 8 N M
MAR K1 1 7 5 / 1220 M ARK1 1 7 5 / 1220
24 0 7 N M 2 4 0 7 N M
IAN 2 4 0 / 2200 I AN < CT R > 2 4 0 / 2200
22 2 3 N M 2 2 2 3 N M
CHN O1 2 5 0 / 2500A C HNO1 2 5 0 / 2500 A
22 2 9 N M 2 2 2 9 N M
DOT 46 2 5 0 / 5000 D OT46 2 5 0 / 5000
21 8 12 N M 2 1 8 1 2 N M
NIC K2 2 5 0 / 8760 N ICK2 2 5 0 / 8760
RN P / A C T UA L - - - - - - - -- - - - R N P/A C T U AL - - - - - M A P C T R
<1. 0/0 . 0 5N M RTE DATA> < 1.0/ 0 . 0 5 N M STEP >
MAP MODE SELECTED ON ND PLAN MODE SELECTED ON ND
34-61-00-073.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - LEGS PAGE
34-61-00
- 235 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - PERF INIT PAGE
General performance calculations during airplane refueling. The
PLAN display is blank at engine start, at entry of a
The performance initialization pages let you do an new gross weight, or when the airplane is in the air.
initialization of the FMCS for performance
calculations. The data can be put in by the flight crew Line 3L shows the ZFW prompt. This lets you put in the
or from an uplinked ACARS message. airplane zero fuel weight.
Page Access If gross weight (LSK 1L) is put in first, the

calculated zero fuel weight shows.
Access to this page is from these pages:
Line 4L shows the RESERVES prompt. This lets you put in
- ROUTE the reserve fuel weight.
- TAKEOFF REF
- INIT/REF INDEX Line 5L shows the COST INDEX prompt. The default value
- INIT/REF mode key if ADIRUs are aligned and the for this data field is box prompts. The range of values
airplane is on the ground. is 0 to 200.
Performance Initialization Page Line 6L shows one of these prompts:
Line 1L shows the GW/CRZ CG prompt. This lets you put - INDEX - selects the INIT/REF INDEX page
in the airplane gross weight. - LOAD - shows when data can be received from an
uplinked ACARS message
If zero fuel weight (LSK 3L) was put in first, the - ERASE - shows when data changes.
calculated gross weight shows here.
LOAD shows when the ACARS performance initialization
Line 1L also shows the default value of CRZ CG. You can data has the highest load priority.
put in other values.
This data can come from an uplinked ACARS message:
Line 2L shows the PLAN/FUEL prompt. Total fuel weight
from the fuel quantity indicating system (FQIS) shows. - Gross weight
34-61-00-037.003
If a fuel value is set for PLAN fuel, this value is used - Cruise center of gravity
as an alternative to the total fuel weight from the - Plan fuel
FQIS for the calculation of gross weight. This permits - Zero fuel weight
34-61-00
- 236 -

- Reserve fuel put in other values. The value changes if the departure
- Cost Index procedure has a different transition altitude, and you
- Trip/cruise altitude do not put in a value.
- Cruise wind
- Top of climb outside air temperature Line 5R shows the PERF INIT REQUEST prompt. This lets
- Transition altitude. you get an uplink of the performance initialization
data with an ACARS message.
Line 1R shows the TRIP/CRZ ALT data field. The trip
altitude gives a reference to select the cruise Line 6R shows the N1 LIMIT prompt. This selects the N1
altitude. Trip altitude is the best cost altitude for LIMIT page.
the minimum cruise time. It is calculated and shows
after this data is set: These data fields go blank at flight completion:
- Origin and destination airports (ROUTE page) - Gross weight

- Gross weight - Cruise center of gravity
- Cost index. - Zero fuel weight
- Reserves
The CRZ ALT box prompt lets you put in the cruise - Trip/cruise altitude
altitude. The cruise altitude set on this page also - Cruise wind
shows on the CLIMB, CRUISE, and RTE legs pages. CRZ ALT - Top of climb OAT.
can be put in as an altitude (feet) or a flight level.
Performance Limits page
Line 2R shows the CRZ WIND prompt. This lets you put in
the cruise wind speed and direction. The default is Line 1L shows the TIME ERROR TOLERANCE data field. This
000/000. shows the time error tolerance at a waypoint used by
the required time of arrival (RTA) function. The FMCS
Line 3R shows the T/C OAT prompt. This shows the uses this tolerance to calculate the airplane speed.
forecast top of climb outer air temperature. The data The data entry range is five seconds to 30 seconds. The
format is +/-XX F or +/-XX C. default value is 30 seconds.
34-61-00-037.003
Line 4R shows the TRANS ALT data field. This shows the Lines 2L and 2R through 4L and 4R show the minimum and
altitude where the FMCS changes to standard barometric maximum speed limits for climb, cruise, and descent.
altitude. The default value is 18000 feet, but you can You can change the values in these data fields.
34-61-00
- 237 -
Line 5L shows the PERF LIM REPORT prompt. This lets you
do a downlink of the performance limits with an ACARS
message.
Line 6L shows one of these prompts:
- INDEX - selects the INIT/REF INDEX page

- LOAD - shows when data can be received from an
uplinked ACARS message
- ERASE - shows when data changes.
Line 5R shows the PERF LIM REQUEST prompt. This lets

you get an uplink of the performance limits with an
ACARS message.
Line 6R shows the RTA prompt. This selects the RTA

PROGRESS page.
34-61-00-037.003
34-61-00
- 238 -

INIT/REF INDEX PAGE PERF INIT 1 / 2

(SELECT PERF) G W / CR Z C G T R I P / C R Z A L T
. /18.5% FL 190/
P L A N / F U E L C R Z W I N D
- - - . -/ 5 2 . 3 --- o / ---
ACT RTE OR TAKEOFF Z F W T / C O A T
REF PAGE . --- F -
o -- o C
R E S ER V E S T R A N S A L T
(SELECT PERF INIT) . 18000
C O S T I N D E X P E R F I N I T
REQU E ST>
CDU - - - - -- -- - -- - - - - -- --- - - --
(PUSH INIT/REF <LOAD N1 LIMIT>
FUNCTION KEY)
AIRPLANE ON
THE GROUND
ADIRS INITIALIZED NEXT PREV

PAGE PAGE
PERF LIMITS 2 / 2
T I M E E R R O R T O L E R A N C E
1 5 S E C A T R T A W P T
M I N S P D -- C L B -- M A X S P D
210/.400 340/.820
--C R Z --
220/.650 340/.820
--D E S --
240/.400 320/.780
P E R F L I M P E R F L I M
<REPORT REQUEST>
------------------------
<LOAD RTA>
34-61-00-037.003
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - PERF INIT PAGE
34-61-00
- 239 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - N1 LIMIT PAGE
34-61-00-043.003
34-61-00
- 240 -

General thrust is selected. This prevents a throttle push at
transition from takeoff thrust to climb thrust.
The N1 LIMIT pages let you select engine thrust limits
to show on the common display system (CDS) and for use Line 6L shows the PERF INIT prompt. This selects the
by the autothrottle. PERF INIT page.
Page Access Line 1R shows the TAKEOFF N1 prompt. This data field
shows the active takeoff thrust calculated by the FMCS.
Access to these pages is by selection of the N1 LIMIT
mode select key on the CDU or the N1 LIMIT prompt on the Line 2R shows the CLB prompt. This enables and shows
PERF INIT or TAKEOFF REF pages. the maximum climb thrust for the autothrottle and the
N1 bugs after transition from the takeoff mode.
N1 Limits Page (On Ground)
Line 3R shows the CLB-1 prompt. This selects the first
Line 1L shows the SEL/OAT prompt. This data field shows derate climb thrust to be used after transition from
the outside air temperature (OAT) as measured by the takeoff mode.
aspirated TAT probe or manually entered. An assumed
temperature (SEL) can also be entered for reduced Line 4R shows the CLB-2 prompt. This selects the second
thrust takeoffs. derate climb thrust to be used after transition from
takeoff mode.
Line 2L shows the TO prompt. This selects full takeoff
thrust. The selected climb thrust shows by the <SEL> prompt in
large font adjacent to the selected thrust data field.
Line 3L shows The TO-1 prompt. This selects the first
reduced takeoff thrust. Line 6R shows the TAKEOFF prompt. This selects the
TAKEOFF REF page.
Line 4L shows the TO-2 prompt. This selects the second
reduced takeoff thrust. N1 Limits Page (In Air)
When a specific takeoff thrust is selected, the <ACT> The N1 limit page lets you select an N1 limit for these
34-61-00-043.003
prompt shows adjacent to the selected thrust. The FMCS thrust limit modes:
always selects the highest possible climb thrust which
would not result in a thrust increase when a takeoff - Go-around (GA)
34-61-00
- 241 -
- Continuous (CON)
- Climb (CLB)
- Cruise (CRZ)
- Climb - 1
- Climb - 2.
Line 1L shows the AUTO prompt. This selection lets the

FMCS calculate N1 limit values. AUTO is the default
selection.
Line 2L and 2R show the GA (go-around) N1 limit.
Line 3L and 3R show the CON (continuous) N1 limit.
Line 4L and 4R show the CLB (climb) N1 limit.
Line 5L and 5R show the CRZ (cruise) N1 limit.
Line 6L and 6R show the CLB-1 and CLB-2 prompts.

Selection shows the reduced climb N1 limit.
34-61-00-043.003
34-61-00
- 242 -

N1 LIMIT 1 /1
S E L /O A T 2 6 K N1
/ +15oC 99.5/ 99.5
2 6 K
<TO <ACT> <SEL> CLB>
2 4 K D E R A T E
<TO-1 CLB-1>
2 2 K D E R A T E
<TO-2 CLB-2>
- - - - --- - - ----- - --- - - -- ---

<PERF INIT TAKEOFF>
N1 LIMIT
(ON GROUND)
N1 L IM I T 1 / 1
<AUTO <ACT >
<GA 10 1 . 6 / 1 0 1 . 6 %
<CON 99.8 / 9 9.8%
<CLB 89.8 / 8 9.8%
<CRZ 83.8 / 8 3.8%

-------R E D U C E D C L B - -- ----
<CLB-1 <SEL> C LB-2
34-61-00-043.003
N1 LIMIT
(IN AIR)
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - N1 LIMIT PAGE
34-61-00
- 243 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - TAKEOFF REF PAGE
Purpose Line 2L shows the active N1 takeoff thrust calculated
by the FMCS. The data field header line changes to show
The takeoff reference pages show this data for takeoff: whether it is one of these:
- Temperature - Full rated thrust

- Takeoff thrust - Reduced thrust from a SEL (assumed) temperature
- V speed data entry
- Runway data. - First takeoff derate thrust
- Second takeoff derate thrust.
Page Access
If the takeoff N1 value is calculated from ACARS
You get access to this page from one of these pages: uplinked data, the N1 values show in small font until
the flight crew accepts the data.
- INIT/REF INDEX
- PERF INIT Line 3L shows the prompts for center of gravity (CG)
- RTE. and TRIM. This lets the flight crew enter CG. If gross
weight is entered, the trim will be calculated and
Page 1 Information shown. This data field may be uplinked in an ACARS data
message. The CG/TRIM values show in small font until
This page shows this data: the crew accepts the data.
- FMC calculated takeoff thrusts Line 4L shows the TAKEOFF DATA REQUEST prompt. This
- Crew entered takeoff data lets the flight crew request takeoff data from the
- V speed data. ACARS datalink. Selection will result in the TAKEOFF
DATA REJECT prompt in this data field and the ACCEPT
Line 1L shows the FLAPS prompt. This lets the flight prompt at line 5R.
crew enter the takeoff flap setting. Box prompts show
before there is a valid entry. Allowable entries are Line 6L shows one of these prompts:
flaps 1, 5, 10, 15, and 25. This data field may also be
uplinked in an ACARS takeoff data message. - POS INIT
34-61-00-038.004
- PERF INIT
- ROUTE
- DEPARTURE
34-61-00
- 244 -

- INDEX. Line 6R shows the QRH prompt. This lets the flight crew
show the FMC calculated V speeds or not. If the V
The INDEX prompt shows when the necessary data is set speeds show at line select keys 1R, 2R, and 3R, the
in the pre-flight pages and the pre-flight is complete. prompt shows QRH OFF. If the V speeds are selected off,
If one of the other prompts show, the necessary data is the prompt shows QRH ON.
not complete for that page. When all the necessary data
is entered, the INDEX prompt shows. Page 2 Information
NOTE: If the takeoff speeds are entered incorrectly or This page lets the flight crew see the takeoff runway
in the wrong sequence, the takeoff speeds are data and takeoff thrusts. It also lets them select a
deleted and the message TAKEOFF SPEEDS DELETED is reduced takeoff thrust limit and select the appropriate
displayed in the scratchpad. The FMC warning runway surface condition.
lights on the autoflight status annunciators
(ASA) will also be on. Line 1L shows the RW/WIND prompt. This lets the flight
crew enter the takeoff wind conditions. If this data is
Lines 1R, 2R, and 3R are for the flight crew to set the uplinked in an ACARS message, it shows in small font
calculated takeoff speeds (V1, VR, and V2). The FMC until the flight crew accepts the takeoff data. When it
calculated V speeds show in small font under the QRH is accepted, it will show in large font. The default
prompt. The flight crew accepts the V speed by value is 000/0 and dashes shown before an entry.
selection of the appropriate LSK. The V speed will then
show in large font under the V speed prompt. Line 2L shows the RW SLOPE/HDG prompt. This lets the
flight crew enter the runway gradient and the runway
Line 4R shows the GW/TOW prompt. The GW data field heading. It is entered as a percentage either U (+) or
shows the current airplane gross weight. The TOW data D (-) from the runway threshold. If the selected
field shows the GW that corresponds to the large font takeoff runway is in the navigation data base, the
takeoff speeds in lines 1R, 2R, and 3R. runway heading shows. Otherwise, it must be entered
manually. If this data is uplinked in an ACARS message,
Line 5R shows the ACCEPT prompt. This prompt shows when it shows in small font until the flight crew accepts
the flight crew requests takeoff data from an ACARS the takeoff data. When it is accepted, it will show in
uplink (LSK 4L). This lets the flight crew accept the large font.
34-61-00-038.004
uplinked takeoff data. Selection results in the V
speeds in large font and the V speed data on the common If QFE is the current selected mode and standard
display system (CDS). barometric correction is set on the EFIS control panel,
34-61-00
- 245 -
the takeoff reference changes to QNH. The selection of armed prior to takeoff roll. The default value is 1000
QFE/QNH on the takeoff reference page will show on the AGL, but may be temporarily changed by the flight crew.
approach reference page.
WARNING: DO NOT CHANGE THE TAKEOFF REF PAGES. IF YOU
The temperature is set in degrees Celsius. The MADE CHANGES, REMOVE ALL THE CHANGES. MAKE
temperature is set in Fahrenheit if you put in the SURE THERE ARE NO FIXED DERATES SELECTED. MAKE
temperature followed by the letter F. SURE THE SEL TEMP FIELD ON PAGES 1/2 AND 2/2
IS EMPTY. CHANGES TO THE TAKEOFF REF PAGES CAN
Line 4L shows acceleration height. Acceration height is CAUSE A LOWER THRUST AT TAKEOFF THAN THE
the altitude at which VNAV speed target calculations THRUST THAT THE FLIGHT CREW CALCULATED.
become active when VNAV is armed prior to takeoff roll.
The default value is 1000 AGL, but may be temporarily
changed by the flight crew.

INIT/REF INDEX page.
Line 1R shows the RW COND prompt. This lets the flight

crew select the runway condition (DRY, WET, or WET SK-
R). The selected condition shows in large font and the
other conditions show in small font. This data may be
uplinked in an ACARS message.
Line 2R shows the SEL OAT prompt. This shows the

outside air temperature measured by the TAT probe. It
also lets the flight crew enter an assumed temperature
for a reduced thrust takeoff. Before entry, dashes show
in the SEL data field. Both the SEL and OAT may be
uplinked in an ACARS message.
34-61-00-038.004
Line 4R shows engine out acceleration height. Engine
out acceration height is the altitude at which VNAV
speed target calculations become active when VNAV is
34-61-00
- 246 -

TAKEOFF REF 1 / 2
F L A P S QR H V 1
INIT/REF INDEX PAGE 1 13 3 > -- -
X X .X K N 1 V R
(SELECT TAKEOFF) 9 6 . 9/ 9 6 . 9 13 5 > -- -
C G T R I M V 2
22. 5 5. 2 5 14 0 > -- -
PERF INIT PAGE T A K E O F F D A T A G W / T O W
<REQUEST 1 1 0 .0 /
(SELECT TAKEOFF)
ACCEPT>
------------------ S E L E C T <
RTE PAGE <INDEX QRH OFF
(SELECT TAKEOFF)
NEXT PREV
PAGE PAGE
TAKEOFF REF 2 / 2
R W W I N D R W C O N D
<
--- / --- DRY/WET/SK-R
R W S L O P E / H D G S E L / O A T
--.- /130 / +15 C
T A K E O F F R E F
<QFE/QNH
A CC E L H T E O A CC E L H T
1 00 0 A G L 1 00 0 A G L
------------------------
<INDEX
34-61-00-038.004
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - TAKEOFF REF PAGE
34-61-00
- 247 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - CLIMB PAGES
34-61-00-039.fm
34-61-00
- 248 -

Purpose The MANUAL SPD CLB page show automatically when you
enter a different target speed.
The CLB pages let the flight crew review and select one
of these climb performance modes: When VNAV is armed before takeoff roll, the VNAV speed
target is based on the last value set on the mode
- Economy climb (ECON CLB) control panel plus 20 knots, until the acceleration
- Maximum angle climb (MAX ANGLE CLB) height is reached. The climb page title shows the
- Manual speed climb (XXX KT CLB) active speed target and is available prior to attaining
- Climb with VNAV armed (ACT XXX CLB) the VNAV acceleration height.
- Limit climb with VNAV armed (ACT XXX LIM CLB)
- Maximum rate of climb (MAX RATE CLB) The LIMIT CLIMB page shows when VNAV is armed prior to
- Step climb during cruise (CRZ CLB) takeoff. This page is available after attaining the
- Required time of arrival (RTA CLB). acceleration height value when flaps are not up. In
this example, the title limit speed target, based on
Also, there is an ENG OUT page that shows advisory leading or trailing edge flaps, is 5 knots below
information only (VNAV cannot be engaged in this mode). trailing edge flap placard speed, limited to 230 knots
if leading edge devices are not completely retracted.
Page Access
This data shows on each page:
Selection of the VNAV mode key on the CDU provides
access to the climb pages when the airplane is in the - Target cruise altitude
climb phase of the flight. - Target speed (highlighted)
- Speed restriction
Climb Pages - Active waypoint
- Distance and time to the active waypoint or flight
The default climb mode is the economy (ECON) mode but level
the other modes may be selected from this page. - Predicted undershoot at active waypoint
- Target N1.
The CRZ CLB page shows automatically when you enter a
higher cruise altitude on the CRZ page. Cruise climbs On the CRZ CLB page, the predicted undershoot is
34-61-00-039.fm
let you start step climbs during cruise. These climbs replaced by the wind speed and direction data (LSK 3R).
are done at cruise speed.
34-61-00
- 249 -
Also on the CRZ CLB page, the target N1 values are
replaced by the saving or penalty for the specified
step climb (line 4R). These values show as a
percentage.
On the RTA CLB page, time and distance to the active

waypoint is replaced by the time error at the active
waypoint (line 2R).
34-61-00-039.fm
34-61-00
- 250 -

ACT ECON CLB 1 / 1

C R Z A L T A T C R 1 0 2
FL330 2500 A
TGT SPD T O C R 1 0 2
280/.720 200 4.3 Z / 19 N M
SPD REST E R R C R 1 0 2
250/10000 310 L O
------------ C L B 1 - N 1 ACT MAX AN GLE CLB 1 / 1
97.3/ 97.3% C R Z A L T A T C R 1 0 2
-- ----- ----- FL330 2500 A
<MAX RATE ENG OUT> T G T S P D T O C R 1 0 2
220/.700 2004.3 Z/ 19 N M
<MAX ANGLE RTA> S P D R E S T E R R C R 1 0 2 ACT 280KT CLB 1 / 1
250/10000 260 L O C R Z A L T
------------ C L B 2 - N 1 FL350
<ECON 93.8/ 93.8% T G T S P D T O F L 3 5 0
------------ 280/.720 2056.2 Z / 88 N M
ECON CLB <MAX RATE ENG OUT> S P D
250/10000
R E S T A CT 14 5
C R Z A L T
CLB 1 / 1
RTA> ------------ C L B 2 - N 1 FL350

<ECON 93.8/ 93.8% T G T S P D T O F L 3 5 0
------------ 280/.720 2056.2 Z / 88 N M
<MAX RATE ENG OUT> S P D R E S T
250/10000
MAX ANGLE CLB <MAX ANGLE RTA> ------------ C L B
93.8/ 93.8%
2 - N 1
------ ------
<MAX RATE ENG OUT>
ACT MAX RATE CLB 1 / 1
C R Z
FL350
A L T
MANUAL SPD CLB <MAX ANGLE RTA>
T G T S P D T O F L 3 5 0
265/.720 204 3.6 Z / 82 N M
S P D R E S T MOD CRZ CLB 1 / 1
250/10000
------------ C L B 2 - N 1
C R Z A L T VNAV ARMED CLB
FL290
<ECON 9 3.8/ 9 3.8% T G T S P D T O F L 2 9 0
-- ------ ---- .780 21 45.3 Z / 15 N M
ENG OUT> S P D R E S T A C T U A L W I N D ACT RTA CLB 1 / 1
250/10000 290 o/14 CRZ ALT A T L A C R E
<MAX ANGLE RTA> ------------ P E N A L T Y FL250 2500
<ECON 1.1% T G T S P D T I M E E R R O R
------------ 294/.703 ON TIME
ACT 18 0 LI M CLB 1 / 1
250/10000 C R Z A L T
MAX RATE CLB <MAX ANGLE ERASE> ------------ FL350
<ECON T G T S P D T O F L 3 5 0
------------ 280/.720 2056.2 Z / 88 N M
250/10000
CRZ CLB <MAX ANGLE RTA> ------------ C L B 2 - N 1
93.8/ 93.8%
------------
<MAX RATE ENG OUT>
RTA CLB <MAX ANGLE RTA>
34-61-00-039.fm
VNAV ARMED LIMIT CLB
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - CLIMB PAGES
34-61-00
- 251 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - CRUISE PAGES
Purpose - Fuel remaining at destination
- Step to altitude
The cruise pages let the flight crew review and select - Step point (ETA and DTG)
one of these cruise performance modes: - Current wind speed and direction
- Predicted savings/penalty if airplane is flown to
- Economy cruise (ECON CRZ) a selected step altitude.
- Long range cruise (LRC CRZ)
- Manual speed cruise (XXX KT CLB) The turbulence N1 target is advisory information for
- Required time of arrival cruise (RTA CRZ). the flight crew only and cannot be used by the FMCS.
Also, there is an ENG OUT page that shows advisory On the RTA CRZ page, the turbulence N1 target is
information only (VNAV cannot be engaged in this mode). replaced by the RTA time error.
Page Access On the ENG OUT page, the fuel remaining data field is
replaced by the maximum continuous N1 thrust. The STEP
Selection of the VNAV mode key on the CDU provides data field is replaced by the engine out maximum
access to the cruise pages when the airplane is in the altitude and the STEP POINT is replaced by the time and
cruise phase of the flight. distance to the top of descent point.
Cruise Pages NOTE: Entry of a different cruise altitude on the CRZ

page brings up either the CRZ CLB or CRZ DES
The default cruise mode is the economy (ECON) mode but pages.
the other modes can be selected from this page.
The MANUAL SPD CRZ page shows automatically when the

flight crew enters a different target cruise speed.
- Actual cruise altitude
34-61-00-075.fm
- Optimum and maximum cruise altitudes
- Target speed (highlighted)
- Turbulence N1 target
34-61-00
- 252 -

ACT ECON CRZ 1 / 1 MOD LRC CRZ 1 / 1 ACT M.780 CRZ 1 / 1

C R Z A L T O P T / M A X S T E P C R Z A L T O P T / M A X S T E P C R Z A L T O P T / M A X S T E P
FL330 FL340/361 FL350 F L330 FL340/361 FL390 F L330 FL340/361 FL350
T G T S P D S T E P P O I N T T G T S P D S T E P P O I N T T G T S P D S T E P P O I N T
.780 2004.5 Z/100 N M . 770 2004.5 Z /100 N M . 780 2004.5 Z /100 N M
T U R B N 1 A C T U A L W I N D T U R B N 1 A C T U A L W I N D T U R B N 1 A C T U A L W I N D
o
87.3/ 87.3% 129 / 14 87.3 / 87.3% 129 o / 14 87.3/ 87.3% 129 o/ 14
F U E L A T K A T L S A V I N G S F U E L A T K A T L S A V I N G S F U E L A T K A T L S A V I N G S
W/S TEP 12.5 1.3% 12.5
W / S T E P 1.3% 12.5
W / S T E P 1.3%
------------------------ - ---- ----------- ------- - - ----- ------------------
ENG OUT> < ECON ENG OUT> < ECON ENG OUT>
<LRC RTA> ERASE> < LRC RTA>
ECON CRZ LRC CRZ MANUAL SPD CRZ
ACT RTA CRZ 1 / 1 ACT ENG OUT CRZ 1 / 1

C R Z A L T O P T / M A X C R Z A L T M A X A L T
FL250 FL 3 4 0 / 361 FL330 FL187
T G T S P D T G T S P D T O T / D
.703 280 K T 1314.0 Z / 26 N M
T I M E E R R O R A C T U A L W I N D N 1
EARLY 05: 3 1 97.9%
F U E L A T K G E G ------------------------
12.5 <LT ENG OUT RT ENG OUT>
- --- - - --- - - - - --- - - - -- -- -
<ECON ENG OUT>
<LRC RTA>
34-61-00-075.fm
RTA CRZ ENG OUT CRZ
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - CRUISE PAGES
34-61-00
- 253 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - DESCENT PAGES
34-61-00-094.fm
34-61-00
- 254 -

Purpose The XXX KT PATH DES page or the ECON SPD DES page will
show automatically when the flight crew enter a
The descent pages let the flight crew review and select different target speed for descent.
one of the following descent performance modes:
- Economy path descent (ECON PATH DES)
- Economy speed descent (ECON SPD DES) - End of descent altitude
- Manual speed descent along a path (XXX KT PATH DES) - Target speed (highlighted)
- Step descent during cruise (CRZ DES) - Speed restriction
- Required time of arrival descents (RTA DES). - Vertical deviation
- Active waypoint
Page Access - Distance and time to top of descent, waypoint or
flight level
Selection of the VNAV mode key on the CDU provides - Waypoint and altitude used for FPA, V/B and V/S
access to the descent pages when the airplane is in the - Flight path angle (FPA)
descent phase of the flight. - Vertical bearing (V/B)
- Vertical speed (V/S).
Descent pages
On the CRZ DES page, the E/D ALT is replaced by the new
The descent modes can be either economy (ECON) or cruise altitude (CRZ ALT). The waypoint and altitude
manually selected speed. The flight crew may select data is replaced by the actual wind speed and direction
either PATH or SPD descents. Both descent modes have a data. Also, the savings/penalty for the specified
maximum speed restriction of 240 knots below 10000 cruise descent shows. These values show as a
feet. percentage.
If the flight crew starts an early descent, the initial On the RTA DES pages, the distance and time is replaced
descent rate is 1000 feet per minute until the descent by the time error.
path is captured.
Descent Forecasts Page
The CRZ DES page will show automatically when the
34-61-00-094.fm
flight crew select an altitude that is below the cruise The descent forecasts page lets the flight crew enter
altitude. other performance values to more accurately define the
calculated descent profile.
34-61-00
- 255 -
Access to this page is through the FORECASTS prompt
(LSK 6L).
This data shows on the descent forecasts page:
- Transition level
- Cabin rate of descent
- Altitude wind speed and direction data
- TAI on/off altitudes
- ISA DEV/QNH selections.
34-61-00-094.fm
34-61-00
- 256 -

ACT ECON PATH D ES 1 / 1 MOD ECON SPD DES 1 / 1 ACT 270KT PATH DES 1 / 1 MOD CRZ DES 1 / 1
E / D A L T A T M A C E Y E / D A L T E / D A L T A T M A C E Y C R Z A L T
2013 2 30/ 6000 A 2013 2013 240/6000 A FL310
T G T S P D T O M A C E Y T G T S P D T O M A C E Y T G T S P D T O M A C E Y T G T S P D T O F L 3 1 0
.720/280 2004.3 Z / 19 N M 280/.720 2 0 04. 3 Z / 19N M 270 K T 2004.3 Z / 19 N M .780 2145.3 Z / 15 N M
S P D R E S T W P T / A L T S P D R E S T W P T / A L T S P D R E S T W P T / A L T S P D R E S T A C T U A L W I N D
240/10000 MA CEY /6000 240/10000 MA C E Y/6000 240/10000 M ACEY/ 6000 240/10000 129 o / 14
V E R T D E V F P A V / B V / S V E R T D E V F P A V / B V / S V E R T D E V F P A V / B V / S S A V I N G S
88 H I 3.8 6.2 2360 135 L O 3 .8 6 . 2 2360 24H I 3.8 42 9999 1.3%
----- ----------- --- ----- -- ---- ------ - --- - - ------ --- ----- ---- --- ----- ---- ------------------------
SPEED> PATH> <ECON SP EED> PLANNED DES>
<FORECAST RTA> <FORECAST ERASE> <FORECAST RTA> <FORECAST RTA>
ECON PATH DES ECON SPD DES MANUAL DES CRZ DES
ACT RTA PATH DES 1 / 1 ACT RTA SPD DES 1 / 1 ACT RTA CRZ DES 1 / 1 MOD DES FORE C AST S 1 / 1
E / D A L T A T M A C E Y E / D A L T C R Z A L T T I M E E R R O R T R A N S L V L T A I O N / O F F
2013 230/6000 A 1011 10000 LATE 10:54 FL 180 - ----/ - ----
T G T S P D T I M E E R R O R T G T S P D T I M E E R R O R T G T S P D T O F L 1 0 0 C A B I N R A T E I S A D E V / Q N H
.740/260 ON TIME .742/266 ON TIME .491 1548.6 Z / 6.6 N M 480FP M ---oC/ -----
S P D R E S T W P T / A L T S P D R E S T W P T / A L T S P D R E S T A C T U A L W I N D A L T ----- W I N D ---- D I R / S P D
240/10000 ------/------ 240/10000 000 o / 0 FL 210 078o / 69KT
240/10000 MACEY/6000
V E R T D E V F P A V / B V / S V E R T D E V F P A V / B V / S
24 H I 3.8 6.2 2360 135L O 4.1 50 00 130o / 29KT
------------------------ ------------------------ ------ --------- ----- -- --
<ECON SPEED> <ECON PATH> PLA NNED DE S> -- --- ---o / - --KT
<FORECAST RTA> <FORECAST RTA> <FORECAST RTA> E RASE>
RTA PATH DES RTA SPD DES RTA CRZ DES DES FORECASTS
34-61-00-094.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - DESCENT PAGES
34-61-00
- 257 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - PROGRESS/NAV STATUS PAGES
34-61-00-040.006
34-61-00
- 258 -

General - Fuel at the last waypoint.
The progress pages let the flight crew monitor the Lines 2L and 2R show the TO data field. They show this
airplane progress during the flight. The navigation data:
status/options pages let the flight crew monitor the
status of the navigation aids used by the FMCS. - Active waypoint
- Heading
Page Access - Distance-to-go (DTG)
- Estimated time of arrival (ETA)
Select the PROG mode key on the MCDU to access the - Fuel remaining at that waypoint.
PROGRESS page.
The active waypoint has a highlight.
Access the NAV STATUS page from one of these pages:
Lines 3L and 3R show the NEXT data field. They show
- POS SHIFT page this data:
- PROGRESS page
- INIT/REF INDEX page (in the air). - Subsequent waypoint
- Heading
Progress Page 1/4 - DTG
- ETA
This page shows airplane progress on the active route. - Fuel remaining.
The flight number put in on the ROUTE page shows in the
title line. The flight number can have as many as 8 Lines 4L and 4R show the DESTINATION data field. It
alphanumeric characters. The flight number goes away shows the same data as 3L and 3R for the destination
when the flight is complete. airport.
Lines 1L and 1R show the FROM data field. They show Line 5L shows the TO data field. This shows the time at
this data: and distance to one of these altitude profile points:
- Waypoint identifier - T/C (top of climb)
34-61-00-040.006
- Heading - STEP POINT
- Altitude - T/D (top of descent)
- Actual time of arrival (ATA) - E/D (end of descent).
34-61-00
- 259 -
Line 6L shows the WIND data field. This shows the wind Before takeoff and if an RTA waypoint is put in, this
speed and direction. data field shows the header, RECMD T/O, and the
recommended takeoff time (brake release) shows. The
Line 5R shows the FUEL data field. This shows the time shows in zulu time.
current fuel quantity from the fuel quantity indicating
system (FQIS). Line 4L shows the DIST TO data field. This shows the
distance from the present position to the RTA waypoint.
Line 6R shows the NAV STATUS prompt. This selects the
NAV STATUS page. Lines 5L and 5R show the RTA WINDOW data field. This
shows the earliest and latest arrival times at the RTA
Progress Page 2/4 waypoint. If an RTA waypoint is put in before takeoff,
this data field shows the header, T/O WINDOW, and the
This page lets the flight crew set the required time of earliest and latest takeoff times show. The time shows
arrival (RTA) function. in zulu time.
The flight number does not show on this page. Line 6L shows one of these prompts:
Line 1L shows the RTA WPT prompt. This lets the flight - LIMITS - selects the PERF LIMITS page
crew put in the waypoint identifier for the RTA - LOAD - shows when RTA data can be sent on an uplink
function. Entry of an RTA waypoint shows the remainder with an ACARS message
of the data fields and headers for this page after the - ERASE - shows when RTA data is being changed.
EXEC key is pushed. This data field shows dashes if no
RTA waypoint is put in, and no other data shows on this Line 1R shows the RTA prompt. The flight crew puts the
page. RTA time in this data field. If no RTA waypoint is put
in line 1L, line 1R is blank.
Line 2L shows the RTA SPD data field. This shows the
speed schedule for the current flight phase necessary Line 2R shows the TIME ERROR data field. This shows the
to make the RTA. most current time error at the RTA waypoint.
Line 3L shows the SPD REST data field. This shows the Line 3R shows the GMT data field. This shows current
34-61-00-040.006
active default speed restriction during climb and time.
descent. If no speed restriction is active, the data
field is blank. This data field is blank during cruise.
34-61-00
- 260 -

Line 4R shows the ALT/ETA data field. This shows the Line 1R shows the CROSSWIND data field. This shows the
predicted altitude and the estimated time of arrival at current crosswind component direction and speed.
the RTA waypoint.
Line 2R shows the SAT/ISA DEV data field. This shows
Progress Page 3/4 the current static air temperature (SAT) and the
equivalent international standard atmosphere (ISA)
This page shows wind data and vertical and lateral deviation.
track deviation.
Line 3R shows the VERT DEV data field. This shows the
The flight number put in on the ROUTE page shows in the present vertical deviation from the calculated vertical
title line. guidance path during descent. In climb and cruise this
data field is blank.
Line 1L shows the HEADWIND/TAILWIND data field. This
shows the current headwind or tailwind component. The Line 4R shows the TAS data field. This shows the
header changes to show the wind component. current true airspeed.
Line 2L shows the WIND data field. This shows the Line 5R shows the PROGRESS REPORT prompt. This lets the
current wind speed and direction. flight crew do a downlink of a flight progress report
with an ACARS message.
Line 3L shows the XTK ERROR data field. This shows the
current cross-track error direction and magnitude. Line 6R shows the POSITION REPORT prompt. This lets the
flight crew do a downlink of a position report with an
Line 4L shows the GPS-L TRK data field. This shows the ACARS message.
current GPS track in relation to true north.
Progress Page 4/4
Line 5L shows the PRE-FLIGHT REPORT prompt. This lets
the flight crew do a downlink of the pre-flight report This page shows status data for lateral and vertical
with an ACARS message. required navigation performance (RNP).
Line 6L shows the WEATHER REQUEST prompt. This lets the Line 1L shows the approach WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER data
34-61-00-040.006
flight crew make a request for the weather at the field. This the active waypoint in the flight plan. The
destination and alternate airports with an ACARS computed course and the distance to go (DTG) to the
message. active waypoint shows above the identifier.
34-61-00
- 261 -
Line 2L shows the RNP/ACTUAL data field. These are the entered value for the approach RNP shows in this data
required and actual lateral navigation performance field.
values. If the flight crew manually put in the RNP, the
RNP shows in large font. If the RNP is not manually put Nav Status Page
in, then the lowest RNP value from the navigation data
base for this approach shows in small font. This page shows the status of the navaids tuned or in
use by the FMCS.
Line 3L shows the XTK ERROR data field. This shows the
current cross-track error direction and magnitude. Lines 1L and 1R show the VOR/ILS/GLS data fields. This
shows the VOR, ILS, or GLS identifiers and currently
Line 6L shows the approach lateral required navigation selected frequencies/channels. The frequency has a one-
performance (RNP). The lowest value or the manually character code prefix in small font. This shows the
entered value for the approach RNP shows in this data procedure used to tune the frequency. These codes can
field. show:
Line 1R shows the speed and altitude at the active - M - manual tune
waypoint. The approach glide path angle shows above the - P - procedural tune
speed/altitude data field. - A - auto tune.
Line 2R shows the VERT RNP/ANP data field. These are If deviation data from the tuned/selected navaid is
the required and actual vertical navigation performance invalid, the message FAIL is displayed in the data
values. If the flight crew manually put in the RNP, the field.
RNP shows in large font. If the RNP is not manually put
in, then the lowest RNP value from the navigation data Lines 2L and 2R through 4L and 4R show the DME data
base for this approach shows in small font. fields. This shows the status of the DME identifiers of
frequencies tuned by the FMCS through the DME
Line 3R shows the VERT DEV data field. This shows the interrogators.
present vertical deviation from the calculated vertical
guidance path. The status of each tuned DME identifier/frequency shows
this data:
34-61-00-040.006
Line 6R shows the approach vertical required navigation
performance (RNP). The lowest value or the manually
34-61-00
- 262 -

- If the navaid input is used in the navigation Nav Options page
calculation, the navaid identifier and frequency
show in large font, and the identifier has a This page lets the flight crew inhibit the use of
highlight specified navaids in the FMCS navigation sub-function.
- If the navaid input is received but not used in the
navigation calculation, the identifier and Lines 1L and 1R show the DME INHIBIT prompt. This lets
frequency show in large font, and there is no the flight crew inhibit the use of as many as two DME
highlight navaids.
- If the frequency is tuned, but valid data is not
received, the identifier and frequency show in Lines 2L and 2R show the VOR INHIBIT prompt. This lets
small font, and there is no highlight the flight crew inhibit the use of as many as two VOR
- If no frequency is received, or the frequency sign navaids.
status matrix (SSM) is fail, FAIL shows in small
font Line 3L shows the DME UPDATE ON/OFF prompt. This lets
- If there is no identifier for a frequency shown, the flight crew select the DME update mode. The default
the identifier field is blank is DME update ON. Selection toggles the DME update mode
- If the navaid frequency SSM is no computed data between ON and OFF. The current selected mode shows in
(NCD), the identifier and frequency are blank. large font, and the non-selected mode shows in small
font.
Lines 5L and 5R show the currently selected GPS and IRS
used in the FMCS navigation sub-function calculations. Line 4L shows the VOR UPDATE ON/OFF prompt. This lets
The GPS display is blank if the GPS is inhibited for the flight crew select the VOR update mode. The default
use in the navigation sub-function. is VOR update ON. Selection toggles the VOR update mode
Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the large font and the non-selected mode shows in small
INIT/REF INDEX page. font.
Line 6R shows the POS SHIFT prompt. This selects the Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the
POS SHIFT page. INIT/REF INDEX page.
34-61-00-040.006
Line 3R shows the GPS UPDATE ON/OFF prompt. This lets
the flight crew select the GPS update mode. The default
is GPS update ON. Selection toggles the GPS update mode
34-61-00
- 263 -
large font and the non-selected mode shows in small
font.
Line 4R shows the LOC UPDATE ON/OFF prompt. This lets

the flight crew disable the LOC update mode when GPS
position updating is active. The default is LOC update
ON. Selection toggles the LOC update mode between ON
and OFF. The current selected mode shows in large font
and the non-selected mode shows in small font.
34-61-00-040.006
34-61-00
- 264 -

XXXXXXXX PROGRESS 1 / 4 AC T R TA PR O GR ES S 2 / 4 XXXXXXXX PROGRESS 3 / 4

F R O M A L T A T A F U E L R T A W P T R T A H E A D W I N D C R O S S W I N D
ENO F L20 4 1 3 5 5 Z 18.0 EPH 1012:00ZA 27K T R 3K T
o R T A S P D T I M E E R R O R
2 4 9 D T G E T A F U E L W I N D S A T / I S A D E V
o o
GVE
o
192 1411 Z 16.0 250 /.6 33 EA RL Y 01:30 1 04 / 57 -4 0 C/ 0o C
2 5 2 S P D R E S T G M T X T K E R R O R V E R T D E V
CWL 433 1441 Z 12.0 / 1000:30Z L 0.1N M 12 HI
D I S T - - T O E P H - - A L T / E T A G P S - L T R K T A S
KATL 600 1510 Z 8.2 o 426 K T
2 5NM F L 2 5 0 / 1010:30 Z 1 04 T
T O T / C F U E L Q T Y F I R S T - - R T A W I N D O W - - - L A S T P R E - F L I G H T P R O G R E S S
1402Z / 82N M 17.0 100 8:2 3 Z 1010:30 Z < REPORT REPORT>
W I N D --- - -- -- - -- - -- -- - --- ---- W E A T H E R P O S I T I O N
080o/ 23K T NAV ST ATUS > <LI MIT S < REQUEST REPORT>
N A V ST A T U S 1 / 2 N AV OPTION S 2 / 2 R NP PRO GRES S 4 / 4

V O R- L I L S - R DM E I N H I B I T 2 8 6 6 . 3 N M G P 3 . 0
SEA M 11 6 . 80 IBFI M 11 0.9 0 ---- ---- FF28 15 0/ 2 90 0
D M E- L D M E - R VO R I N H I B I T R N P / A CT U A L V E R T R N P / A N P
SEA 11 6 . 80 IBFI 11 0.9 0 ---- ---- 0.5 0/ 0 . 2 1 N M 1 00 / 8 0 F T
ELN 11 7.9 0 D M E U P DA T E G P S U P D A T E X T K E RR O R V E R T D E V
P A E 1 1 4 . 2 0 <ON/O F F ON/O F F > L 0 .11NM 1 2 3HI
A L W 11 6 . 4 0 V O R U P DA T E L O C U P D A T E
H Q M 11 7 . 7 0 MWH 11 5.0 0 <ON/O F F ON/O F F >
G P S ( L ) I R S ( 2 )
R N P -- A P P R O A C H -- VE R T R N P
<IN DEX POS SH IFT > <INDEX 0.5 0NM 100FT
34-61-00-040.006
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - PROGRESS/NAV STATUS PAGES
34-61-00
- 265 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - ALTERNATE DESTINATION PAGES
34-61-00-041.fm
34-61-00
- 266 -

General present position. The nearest airport shows in line 1L,
the second nearest in line 2L etc.
The alternate destination pages let the flight crew
review and select several different alternate Nearest Airports Page
destinations.
Lines 1L through 5L show the alternate destination
Page Access airports and this data:
Access to this page is from any one of these pages: - VIA (direct-to route to the alternate destination
or missed approach from original destination
- INIT/REF INDEX airport to the alternate destination)
- APPROACH REF - DTG (distance to alternate destination)
- ROUTE. - ETA (estimated time of arrival at alternate
destination)
Initial Page - FUEL (fuel remaining at alternate destination).
Lines 1L through 5L show ALTN prompts. These data The default for the VIA data field is the DIRECT-TO
fields let the flight crew enter alternate destination route to the alternate destination. For this, the FMCS
identifiers. Valid entries are airports, navaids, or calculates the data for a direct route to the alternate
waypoints. The identifiers must be 5 characters or destination.
less.
Line 6L shows the WEATHER REQUEST prompt. This lets the
Line 6L shows the WEATHER REQUEST prompt. This lets the flight crew request weather data for the original
flight crew request weather data for the original destination airport and the alternate destinations.
destination airport and the alternate destinations.
Line 6R shows the PREVIOUS prompt. This selects the
Lines 1R through 5R show carets. Selection of a caret initial alternate destination page and any previously
selects the individual alternate destination page. saved aternate destinations.
Line 6R shows the NEAREST AIRPORTS prompt. Selection of Alternate Destination Individual Pages
34-61-00-041.fm
this key causes the FMCS to search the navigation data
base for the five airports that are nearest to the This page lets the flight crew enter or review an
alternate destination.
34-61-00
- 267 -
Line 1L shows the ALTN prompt. This shows the alternate This shows the calculated distance from the original
destination identifier. The data field at 1C shows the destination to the alternate destination.
VIA information, either DIRECT or MISAPP.
Line 6R shows the NEAREST AIRPORTS prompt. Selection of
Line 2L shows the DTG data field. This shows the this key causes the FMCS to search the navigation data
distance to the alternate destination. base for the five airports that are nearest to the
present position.
Line 3L shows the ETA data field. This shows the
estimated time of arrival at the alternate destination.
Line 4L shows the FUEL data field. This shows the

predicted fuel remaining at the alternate destination.
Line 5L shows the MISSED APP prompt. This lets the

flight crew select a missed approach route to the
alternate destination airport. The FMCS calculates the
data based on descent to the original destination
followed by a missed approach and then climb, cruise,
and descent to the alternate destination. When MISSED
APP is selected, the prompt changes to DIRECT-TO.

initial alternate destination page.
Line 1R shows the TRIP ALT data field. This shows the
FMCS calculated optimum cruise altitude to the
alternate destination.
Line 2R shows the WIND data field. This shows the

current wind speed and direction.
34-61-00-041.fm
Line 3R shows the DESTINATION-ALTERNATE data field only
when the missed approach mode is selected at LSK 5L.
34-61-00
- 268 -

AL TERNATE DESTS 1 / 6
A L T N
----- >
----- > NEAREST AIRPORTS
A L T N V I A D T G E T A F U E L
----- > KYKM M 35 1151z 8.0>
ALTERNATE DEST 2 / 6
----- > KEPH D 55 1156z 8.0> A L T N V I A T R I P A L T
KGEG DIRECT F L 2 1 1
----- > KSEA D 63 1157z 8.0> D T G A C T U A L W I N D
W E A T H E R 1 2 0 0 0 0 / 0 0 0
<REQ UEST NEAREST ARPTS> KBFI D 65 1157z 8.0> E T A
1207z
KGEG D 120 1207z 7.7> F U E L
W E A T H E R 7.7
<R EQ UEST PREVIOUS>
INITIAL DISPLAY <MISSED APP
<INDEX NEAREST ARPTS>
NEAREST AIRPORTS
KGEG AIRPORT SELECTED
34-61-00-041.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - ALTERNATE DESTINATION PAGES
34-61-00
- 269 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - LATERAL OFFSET PAGE
General Waypoint identifiers may contain up to 6 alphanumeric
characters. If the entered identifier is not a valid
The LATERAL OFFSET page lets the flight crew select a waypoint, the message INVALID ENTRY shows in the
lateral offset to the left or the right of the normal scratchpad.
route. Offsets are available from 0.1 nautical miles
(nm) up to a maximum of 99.9 nm and are set in 0.1 nm If the entered waypoint identifier is valid but is not
increments. in the flight plan, the message NOT IN FLIGHT PLAN
shows.
Page Access
If the entered waypoint identifier is a non-offsetable
Access to this page is from these pages: waypoint, the entry is rejected and the message NO
OFFSET AT LEG XXXXX shows in the scratchpad.
- ROUTE
- INIT/REF INDEX. After the data is entered, the EXEC light comes on.
Push the EXEC key to activate the offset route. The
Lateral Offset Page OFST annunciators on the CDUs come on to show that the
offset is active and the offset route shows on each
Line 2L shows the OFFSET DIST prompt. This lets the crew members navigation display.
flight crew enter the specific distance for the offset
route. Dashes show initially. Line 6L shows the ERASE prompt. This shows on pages
that are modified and they let the flight crew erase
Line 3L shows the START WAYPOINT prompt. This lets the the entered data and return to the initial lateral
flight crew enter the specific waypoint where the offset page.
offset will begin. This data field is blank until a
valid distance is entered in LSK 2L. Then the box
prompts show.
Line 4L shows the END WAYPOINT prompt. This lets the

flight crew enter the specific waypoint where the
offset is to end. This data field also is blank until a
34-61-00-042.fm
valid distance is entered in LSK 2L. Then the box
prompts show.
34-61-00
- 270 -

ACT RTE 2 / X
V I A T O
J126 SAC
O F S T L 1 0 O
DIRECT ECA F
O F S T L 1 0 S
DIRECT MOD T
O F S T L 1 0
MO D, LOC KE1 UPEND
DIRECT RW19L
------------------------
<ALTN DEST OFFSET>
CDU (2)
INIT/REF INDEX 1 / 1 LATERAL OFFSET 1 / 1
<IDENT NAV DATA>

O F F S E T D I ST
<POS MSG RECALL> L10
ST A R T W A Y P O I N T
<PERF ALTN DEST> S AC
E N D W A Y P O I N T
<TAKEOFF ACARS> U PE ND
<APPROACH SEL CONFIG>
<OFFSET MAINT> < ER A SE
34-61-00-042.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - LATERAL OFFSET PAGE
34-61-00
- 271 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - NAVIGATION REFERENCE PAGES
General access by selection of INDEX on the NAV SUMMARY page or
the individual identifier pages.
The navigation reference data pages let you see data
from the permanent, temporary, or supplemental Line 1L shows the WPT IDENT prompt. The waypoint or
navigation data base for these references: runway identifier is entered here.
- Waypoint The waypoint identifier page shows this data for the
- Navaid specified waypoint:
- Runway
- Airport. - Latitude and longitude
- Magnetic variation
Waypoints, navaids, and airports not in the data base - Reference identifier
are entered into the temporary navigation data base - Radial/distance.
from these pages. This is the reference data you can
see on the CDUs: The runway identifier page shows this data in feet and
meters for the specified runway:
- Reference navigation data (REF NAV DATA)
- Temporary navigation data (TEMP NAV DATA) - Airport identifier
- Supplementary navigation data (SUPP NAV DATA). - Latitude and longitude
- Elevation
Reference Navigation Data - Runway length (feet and meters).
On these pages, you see navigation data for these Line 2L shows the AIRPORT IDENT prompt. The airport
references that are in the data base: identifier is entered here.
- Waypoints The airport identifier page shows this data:

- Airports
- Navaids - Latitude and longitude
- Runways. - Elevation
- Magnetic variation for the airport.
34-61-00-067.fm
You get access to this page by selection of NAV DATA
(LSK 1R) on the INIT/REF INDEX page. Also, you get Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the
34-61-00
- 272 -

Line 1R shows the NAVAID IDENT prompt. The navaid Temporary Navigation Data
identifier is entered here.
The temporary navigation data base holds up to this
The navaid identifier page shows this data for the many items:
entered navaid:
- 40 navaids
- Classification - 6 airports.
- Latitude and longitude
- Frequency The total storage capacity of the temporary navigation
- Elevation data base is shared with the supplemental data base.
- Magnetic variation. The entries in this data base are deleted at flight
completion.
If the identifier that is entered is not in the
permanent, temporary, or supplemental data base, a This page may be accessed by selecting the SUMMARY
display that shows only box prompts in all the data prompt on the REF NAV DATA page.
fields except the entered identifier shows.
Supplementary Navigation Data
In the example, the navaid identifier SEA was entered
and the data base does not contain any data for this The supplemental navigation data base provides long
identifier. term storage of navigation data that is not in the
permanent data base. The supplemental data base holds
Line 2R shows the SUMMARY prompt. This selects the NAV up to this many items:
SUMMARY page that shows the temporary and supplemental
data base data. The temporary data shows first. If - 40 navaids
there is no temporary or supplemental data, this data - 6 airports.
field is blank.
To get access to this page, enter SUPP in the
Line 6R shows the NAV OPTIONS prompt. This selects the scratchpad on the INIT/REF INDEX page and select NAV
NAV OPTIONS page. DATA (LSK 1R). Also, you can get access by selection of
INDEX from the SUPP SUMMARY page or the individual
34-61-00-067.fm
identifier pages.
34-61-00
- 273 -
Line 3R shows the effectivity date of the supplemental
data base. For this data base to be valid, an
effectivity date must be entered. If no valid date has
been entered, box prompts show in this data field. This
effectivity date also shows on the IDENT page.
Line 4L and 4R show the ACARS prompts. This lets the

flight crew uplink or downlink the contents of the
supplemental data base in an ACARS message.
Individual entries are removed with the DEL key on the

CDU or all of the supplemental data base is removed by
selection of DELETE ALL SUPP DATA (LSK 6R).
34-61-00-067.fm
34-61-00
- 274 -

REF NAV D ATA R EF NAV DA T A REF NAV D ATA

W P T I D E N T N A V A I D I D E N T W P T I D E N T N A V A I D I D E N T
----- ----- MACO N S EA
A I R P O R T I D E N T C L A S S
---- SUMMARY> V T HA
L A T I T U D E L O N G I T U D E L A T I T U D E L O N G I T U D E
o o
N30 o
36.4 W 082 o 1 6.4 N47 26.1 W122 1 8 .5
M A G V A R F R E Q E L E V A T I O N
W 5 o 116. 80 340F T
R E F I D E N T R A D I A L / D I S T M A G V A R
E 22 o
SAVN H 2 7 0 / 15 0N M
------------ - ----------- ---- -------- ---- --------
<INDEX NAV OPTIONS> <IND EX <IND EX
INITIAL REF NAV DATA PAGE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER NAVAID IDENTIFIER
RE F NAV DATA REF NAV DAT A REF NAV DA TA

R U N W A Y I D E N T R U N W A Y I D E N T
N A V A I D I D E N T
RW09 ----- SEA
A I R P O T
R I D E N T A I R P O R T I D E N T
C L A S S
KATL KATL
L A T I T U D E L O N G I T U D E L A T I T U D E L O N G I T U D E L A T I T U D E L O N G I T U D E
o o o
N51 48.7 W082 o 12.3 N51 48.7 W082 1 2 .3 o . o .
E L E V A T I O N E L E V A T I O N F R E Q E L E V A T I O N
1 572F . F T
1572 F T T
M A G V A R M A G o V A R
L E N G T H
o ----
9000 F T /2748 M E 21
----- ------- -------- ---- - -----------
<INDE X <INDEX < INDEX
RUNWAY IDENTIFIER AIRPORT IDENTIFIER IDENTIFIER NOT IN DATA BASE
TEMP N A V SUMMARY 1 / 1 SUPP NAV DATA S U P P N A V S U M M A RY 1 / 2

W A Y P O I N T S W P T I D E N T N A V A I D I D E N T W A Y P O I N T S
B C S D N 1 9 o 5 6 . 3 W O 6 3 o 1 1 . 4 ----- ----- A B C D N 2 9 o 3 6 . 4 W O 8 2 o 1 6 . 4
0 U K A C N 2 3 o 4 1 . 7 W 0 5 2 o 4 7 . 6 A I R P O R T I D E N T T O U T L N 4 2 o 2 3 . 9 W 1 2 0 o 3 5 . 6
N A V A I D S ---- SUM MARY> B A K E R H U M P P 0 3 5 / 1 0 2
o o
F O L N 3 9 2 6 . 2 W 0 5 5 1 4 . 1 C O W L Z N 4 3 o 1 8 . 0 W 1 2 1 o 1 2 . 6
E F F F R M M O N D Y / Y R
J AN 15/99 G F K R D R 0 2 5 / 5
S U P P N A V S U P P N A V S Q U A K S 1 3 o 4 5 . 9 E 0 6 4 o 1 1 . 6
<REPORT REQ UEST> N A V A I D S
R D R N 3 7 o 4 6 . 2 W 0 7 5 o 5 4 . 1
B F I N 4 5 o 2 3 . 1 W 1 2 2 o 4 5 . 3
-------------- D E L E T E A L L
34-61-00-067.fm
I I S S N 4 5 o 0 2 . 6 E 1 2 3 o 5 4 . 2
<I N D EX <INDEX S U PP DATA> <INDEX
TEMP DATA BASE SUMMARY SUPP NAV DATA PAGE SUPP DATA BASE SUMMARY
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - NAVIGATION REFERENCE PAGES
34-61-00
- 275 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - HOLD PAGE
34-61-00-074.fm
34-61-00
- 276 -

General Line 6L shows the HOLD AT box prompts. The flight crew
enters the desired waypoint for the holding pattern fix
The flight crew uses the RTE LEGS HOLD AT page to point.
select the airplane present position or any other
waypoint as a holding pattern fix. Line 6R shows the PPOS prompt. The flight crew enters
the desired position for the holding pattern fix point.
The flight crew uses the RTE HOLD page to enter and
review data for a specific holding pattern. RTE HOLD Page
Page Access Line 1L shows the FIX data. This is the holding pattern
fix point as defined on the HOLD AT page.
Access to the RTE LEGS HOLD AT page is by selection of
the HOLD mode key on the MCDU while the RTE LEGS page Line 2L shows QUAD/RADIAL prompt. This data field shows
shows. the holding quadrant and radial of the holding pattern.
It is entered through the MCDU.
To get to the RTE HOLD page from the HOLD AT page, do
one of these steps: Line 3L shows the INBD CRS/DIR prompt. This data field
shows the inbound course and the direction of the
- Enter HOLD AT XXXXX in the scratchpad and select holding pattern. It is entered through the MCDU or in
LSK 6L the navigation data base. It shows in small font for
- Enter the holding pattern fix waypoint in line 6L default holding patterns or in large font if pilot
and select LSK 6L entered or from the naviagation data base (NDB).
- Enter PPOS at line 6R and select LSK 6R.
Line 4L shows the LEG TIME prompt. The leg time is
RTE LEGS HOLD AT Page Information entered through the MCDU. The default times are 1.5
minutes above 14000 feet and 1.0 minutes at or below
Lines 1L through 5L show the active waypoint and 14000 feet. It shows in small font for default holding
subsequent waypoints in the active flight plan with patterns or in large font if pilot entered or from the
this data: naviagation data base.
34-61-00-074.fm
- Course to waypoint Line 5L shows the LEG DIST (leg distance) prompt. This
- Leg length data field lets the flight crew enter the leg distance
- Speed and altitude. for the holding pattern.
34-61-00
- 277 -
Line 6L shows one of these prompts:
- NEXT HOLD (selects the HOLD AT page)

- ERASE (shows when data is being modified).
Line 1R shows the SPD/TGT ALT prompt. This data field

shows the best speed and altitude for the holding
pattern. It is entered through the MCDU or in the NDB.
Line 2R shows the FIX ETA prompt. This data field shows
the when you will arrive at the holding pattern fix.
Line 3R shows the EFC TIME prompt. This data field

shows the time when you will exit the holding pattern.
Line 4R shows the HOLD AVAIL prompt. This data field

shows the holding time available before exit is
necessary to reach the destination with the necessary
fuel reserves.
Line 5R shows the BEST SPEED prompt. This data field

shows the best holding speed for the current altitude
and conditions.
Line 6R shows the EXIT HOLD prompt. This data field

shows when the airplane is in an active holding
pattern. After selection of this prompt, the EXEC key
lights and EXIT HOLD is replaced with EXIT ARMED. When
the EXEC key is pushed, the airplane exits the holding
pattern from the FIX point and resumes the active
34-61-00-074.fm
flight plan.
34-61-00
- 278 -

A C T RT E L E GS 1 /XX MOD RTE HOLD 1 /X

3 2 1 HDG 9.7 N M BYP ASS F I X S P D/ T G T A LT
MA R K 1 2 5 0 / 7000 MARK1 210/FL 240
3 2 4 27 N M Q U A D / R AD I AL F I X E TA
IA N 3 2 0 / 105 00 NE/030 10 3 4 .5Z
2 4 7 65 N M I N B D C RS / DI R E F C T I ME
CH N O 1 . 7 9 0 / FL2 30 210 /R TU RN - - --Z
2 4 9 73 N M L E G T I ME H OL D A V A IL
DO T 4 6 . 8 0 0 / FL3 50 1.5 M I N 0 + 48
2 5 8 117 N M L E G D I ST B E S T S P E ED
NI C K 2 . 8 0 0 / FL3 50 --.- N M 220KT
-- - - -- - - H O LD A T - - - --- --- - - - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - --
PP OS> <ERASE
RTE LEGS HOLD AT PAGE RTE HOLD PAGE
34-61-00-074.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - HOLD PAGE
34-61-00
- 279 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - FIX PAGE
General entered data is again put in the scratchpad for line
selection.
The flight crew uses the FIX INFO page to show the
current bearing and distance from a selected reference These calculated bearings and distances also show from
point (SRP). The flight crew also uses it to calculate the fix identifier:
the abeam point of the airplane along the flight plan
route from the SRP. - Estimated time of arrival (ETA)
- Distance to the fix waypoint (DTG)
Page Access - Altitude (ALT) at the fix waypoint.
To get access to the FIX INFO page, push the FIX mode The specified radial then shows on the CDS navigation
key on the MCDU. displays.
Fix Info Page Information Line select key 5L shows the ABM prompt. Selection of
this prompt causes the FMC to calculate and show the
Line select key 1L shows the FIX prompt. You use the abeam point with these results:
scratchpad and line select to put in the FIX identifier
here. These are the valid entries in the navigation - Bearing/distance
data base: - ETA
- DTG
- Airports - Altitude at the abeam point.
- Navaids
- Waypoints (up to a maximum of six alphanumeric You can select to the scratchpad one or more of the fix
characters). waypoints in LSK 2L through 5L for possible use on the
RTE or LEGS pages as a waypoint.
After you put in the fix identifier, the bearing and
distance from that fix shows in line 1 on the MCDU. The You use the DELETE key to erase the FIX identifier and
fix identifier also shows on the CDS navigation its entries.
display.
The second FIX INFO page lets the flight crew select a
34-61-00-090.fm
The flight crew uses select keys 2L through 4L to put second fix waypoint and put in the bearings and/or
in bearings or distances from the fix identifier. The distances to that fix waypoint. The FMC is has a
limitation of two FIX INFO pages.
34-61-00
- 280 -

FIX IN F O 1 /2 F IX IN FO 1 /2
F I X R AD/ D I S F R F IX R AD / D I S F R
CHN 111/ 29
R A D / DI S E T A DTG ALT R A D/ DI S E TA DT G ALT
---
---
---
<ABM
CHN 130/
FIX IN F O 1 / 2 FIX IN F O 1 / 2
F IX RAD / DI S F R F I X RAD /DI S F R
CHN 1 1 1/ 2 9 CHN 111/ 2 9
R A D/ D IS E TA DTG A LT R A D / DIS ETA DT G A L T
1 3 0/ 2 4 2 0 04 . 5 10 1 2 0 00 130/2 4 2004 . 5 1 0 1 2 0 0 0
--- 180/2 6 2008 . 9 3 2 F L 1 9 0
--- ---
A B E A M
< A BM 150/2 3 2006 . 5 1 8 1 5 5 0 0
34-61-00-090.fm
1 8 0/
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - FIX PAGE
34-61-00
- 281 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - SELECT DESIRED WAYPOINT PAGE
General
The SELECT DESIRED XXXXX page is used by the flight

crew to select a specific non-unique identifier for
waypoints, navaids, airports and NDBs. The identifier
can be up to 5 characters in length and a maximum of 12
identifiers can be displayed on 2 pages.
Page Access
This page may be accessed from any of the following

pages whenever a non-unique waypoint identifier has
been entered:
- RTE page
- RTE LEGS page
- DES page
- REF NAV DATA page
- SUPP NAV DATA page
- FIX INFO page.
Select Desired Waypoint Page
The flight crew use the line select key next to select
the desired waypoint, navaid, airport or NDB. The
specific page on which they entered the identifier will
now appear again.
34-61-00-112.fm
34-61-00
- 282 -

SEL D E SIRE D A M B 1/X

ND B A M BA T O
3 60.00 S01 1 2. 8 W 0 7 8 3 4 .6
ND B A M BO I S E
3 41.00 N47 2 5. 1 E 0 0 1 0 2 .5
VO R DM E A M BO I S E
1 13.70 N47 2 5. 7 E 0 0 1 0 3 .9
VO R DM E A M BO L O R
1 16.10 S33 2 5. 2 W 0 7 0 4 7 .1
TA CAN A M BE R L EY
1 14.70 S27 3 8. 5 E 1 5 2 4 3 .0
ND B A M BE R L EY
3 59.00 S27 3 8. 9 E 1 5 2 4 3 .4
SELECT DESIRED XXXXX PAGE
34-61-00-112.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - SELECT DESIRED WAYPOINT PAGE
34-61-00
- 283 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - FMC COMM PAGE
General
The FMC COMM page lets the flight crew get access to
the airline operational communications page to start
ACARS uplinks or downlinks of FMC data.
Page Access
Access to this page is by selection of the FMC COMM

mode key on the MCDU.
FMC COMM Page
Line 1L shows the FLT PLAN REQUEST prompt. This lets

the flight crew request flight plan data with an ACARS
message.
Line 2L shows the WINDS REQUEST prompt. This lets the

flight crew request enroute waypoint wind data with an
ACARS message.
Lines 3L through 5L may be defined for the individual

operators configuration.

34-61-00-072.fm
34-61-00
- 284 -

FMC COMM
F L T P L A N
<R E Q U E S T
W I N D S
<R E Q U E S T
<I N D E X
34-61-00-072.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - FMC COMM PAGE
34-61-00
- 285 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDU - MESSAGES
General Advisory messages show the FMCS status and some flight
profile parameters and necessary conditions. The MSG
The FMCS shows alerting or advisory messages when there annunciators are on for these messages.
is a degraded system condition. The FMCS also shows
entry error and ACARS messages. ACARS status messages show ACARS system availability
and status. The MSG annunciators are not on for these
The messages have a priority and show in the CDU messages.
scratch pad. This is the priority:
The message with the highest priority shows in the
- Data entry error advisory messages scratch pad. If there are two messages of the same
- ACARS uplink alerting messages priority, the one that occurs first shows. When you
- Alerting messages remove the message, the next message shows.
- Advisory messages
- ACARS status messages. To remove a message, push the CLR key or remove the
conditions that caused the message. Some messages go
Entry error messages show that the data put in is not away when you change the page. You can not remove the
correct. You must first remove the message, and then PROGRAM PIN ERROR message with the CLR key or a page
you must correctly put in the data. These messages only change.
show on the CDU on which the incorrect data was put in.
The MSG annunciator only shows on this CDU. Message Recall
ACARS uplink alerting messages show the status of the Messages removed from the scratchpad that continue to
current uplink data. The MSG annunciators and the FMC have valid set conditions show again if you select MSG
warning lights on the autoflight status annunciators RECALL (LSK 2R) on the INIT/REF index page.
(ASA) are on for these messages.
Message Groups
Alerting messages show an FMC condition to the flight
crew that they must correct before continued operation Below are the messages in the different categories. The
of the FMC. The MSG annunciators and the FMC warning airplane operations manual has a complete list of the
lights on the ASAs are on for these messages. CDU messages.
34-61-00-044.007
34-61-00
- 286 -

Entry Error Advisory Messages ENTRY ERROR CORRECTIVE
CAUSE
MESSAGE ACTION
TRIED TO SAVE
ENTRY ERROR CORRECTIVE DUPLICATE FLT FLT PLAN WITH SELECT DIFFERENT
CAUSE
MESSAGE ACTION PLAN ID (PILOT NAME THAT IS NAME TO SAVE FLT
CHANGE OF CRZ DEF RTE OPTION) ALREADY IN DATA PLAN
ALT OR ALT BASE
CONSTRAINT EXAMINE DELETE KEY REMOVE MESSAGE
ALT CONSTRAINT
CAUSED ALT ALTERNATES AND OPERATION NOT AND SELECT
XXXXX
CONSTRAINT REMOVE MESSAGE INVALID DELETE APPLICABLE TO CORRECT FIELD
CONFLICT AT WPT DATA FIELD AFTER YOU PUSH
XXXXX SELECTED DEL KEY
ENTERED ALT DATA ENTRY HAS
CONSTRAINT PUT IN ENTRY
INCORRECT FORMAT
CONFLICTS WITH INVALID ENTRY WITH CORRECT
FOR THE SELECTED
THE CRZ DATA
CRZ ALT CHANGED CLEAR THE DATA FIELD
ALTITUDERESULTIN OFFSET WPT PUT
TO XXXXX MESSAGE
G IN RAISING THE IN IS NOT REMOVE MESSAGE
CRZ ALTITUDE TO NO OFFSET AT LEG
APPLICABLE FOR AND PUT IN
MATCH THE XXXXX
START OR END OF CORRECT WPT
HIGHEST WPT ALT OFFSET
TEMP OR SUPP REMOVE MESSAGE
DATA BASE IS AND DO A CHECK OF
MORE THAN FMC CAN NOT FIND
REMOVE DATA NOT DATA ENTRY OR
CAPACITY BY NECESSARY DATA
DATA BASE FULL NECESSARY FROM NOT IN DATA BASE PUT IN NECESSARY
ENTRY OF FOR ENTERED
DB DATA INTO TEMP
WAYPOINTS, IDENTIFIER
OR SUPP DATA
NAVAIDS, OR BASE
AIRPORTS
34-61-00-044.007
34-61-00
- 287 -
ENTRY ERROR CORRECTIVE ACARS Uplink Alerting Messages
CAUSE
MESSAGE ACTION
REMOVE MESSAGE
ENTERED RTA WPT ACARS UPLINK CORRECTIVE
AND SELECT WPT CAUSE
NOT IN FLIGHT IS NOT IN THE ALERTING MESSAGE ACTION
THAT IS PART OF
PLAN CURRENT FLIGHT
THE CURRENT ACARS UPLINK OF
PLAN EXAMINE
FLIGHT PLAN ALTERNATE
ALTN DEST UPLINK ALTERNATES AND
REMOVE MESSAGE AIRPORT DATA WAS
ENTRY OF MORE REMOVE MESSAGE
AND EXAMINE LOADED
THAN 99 WPTS OR 5
ROUTE FULL ROUTE SEGMENTS ACTIVE ATC
HOLDING PATTERNS ATC COMM CLEAR THE
FOR POSSIBLE CONNECTION
IS TRIED ESTABLISHED MESSAGE
DELETION ESTABLISHED
ATC CONNECTION
TERMINATED
ATC COMM CLEAR THE
ENTRY ERROR CORRECTIVE WITHOUT TRANSFER
CAUSE TERMINATED MESSAGE
MESSAGE ACTION TO ANOTHER
REMOVE MESSAGE SERVICE STATION
SUPP RTE DATA TRIED TO SAVE
AND ONE OF THE CLEAR THE
BASE FULL (PILOT 11TH SUPP FLIGHT
SAVED FLT PLANS RECEIPT OF VALID MESSAGE AND
DEF RTE OPTION) PLAN
IF NECESSARY ATC MESSAGE ATC DATALINK DISPLAY THE
MESSAGE RECEIVED ATC
UPLINK
ATC REPORT CLEAR THE
BUFFER IS FULL MESSAGE AND
ATC REPORT LIST
WHEN 10 REPORTS SEND/DELETE
FULL
HAVE BEEN REPORTS LISTED
GENERATED ON REPORTS PAGE
SELECT THE RTE
ACARS UPLINK OF
34-61-00-044.007
CRZ WIND UPLINK DATA PAGE AND
CRUISE WIND DATA
READY SELECT THE LOAD
WAS RECEIVED
PROMPT
34-61-00
- 288 -

ACARS UPLINK CORRECTIVE ACARS UPLINK CORRECTIVE
CAUSE CAUSE
ALERTING MESSAGE ACTION ALERTING MESSAGE ACTION
ACARS UPLINK OF EXAMINE AND DO ACARS UPLINK
CRZ WIND XXXXX CRUISE WIND DATA AN EXEC OF OR DATA RECEIVED PUT A LIMIT ON
UPLINK WAS LOADED INTO ERASE THE CRUISE INVALID TAKEOFF FOR SELECTED TAKEOFF WEIGHT
THE FMC WIND DATA XXXXXXX (RUNWAY RUNWAY SHOWS A OF AIRPLANE OR
THE LOADED IDENT) LIMIT ON SELECT A NEW
DATALINK CONFIG DATALINK CONFIG LOAD THE TABLE AIRPLANE RUNWAY
INVALID TABLE FAILED ITS AGAIN PERFORMANCE
CRC CHECK MORE THAN FIVE
ACARS UPLINK OF EXAMINE AND DO MESSAGE LIMIT MESSAGES CLEAR THE
OF DESCENT AN EXEC OF OR EXCEEDED SELECTED FOR MESSAGE
DESCENT DOWNLINK
FORECASTS DATA ERASE THE
FORECASTS UPLINK
WAS LOADED INTO DESCENT ACARS UPLINK OF
EXAMINE DATA AND
THE FMC FORECASTS DATA NAV DATA UPLINK SUPP NAV DATA
REMOVE MESSAGE
WAS LOADED
BECAUSE OF DO AN EXEC OF,
ACARS UPLINK CORRECTIVE ERRORS, ONLY A ERASE, OR MAKE A
CAUSE PARTIAL ALTN
ALERTING MESSAGE ACTION PART OF ALTN REQUEST FOR A
DEST UPLINK
SELECT THE DEST UPLINK WAS NEW UPLINK OF
DESCENT RECEIVED THE DATA
ACARS UPLINK OF
FORECASTS PAGE CLEAR THE
FORECASTS UPLINK DESCENT
AND LOAD THE FMC ONLY ABLE TO MESSAGE AND
READY FORECASTS DATA PARTIAL
DATA BY LOAD A PORTION REQUEST THE
WAS RECEIVED CLEARANCE LOADED
SELECTION OF THE OF THE DATA FLIGHT PLAN
LOAD PROMPT AGAIN
ATC UPLINK BECAUSE OF DO AN EXEC OF,
INVALID ATC RECEIVED BY FMC CLEAR THE ERRORS, ONLY A ERASE, OR MAKE A
PARTIAL
34-61-00-044.007
UPLINK BUT CONTAINS MESSAGE PART OF DESCENT REQUEST FOR NEW
FORECASTS UPLINK
ERRORS FORECASTS UPLINK DESCENT
WAS RECEIVED FORECASTS DATA
34-61-00
- 289 -

CAUSE CAUSE
BECAUSE OF EXAMINE AND DO
DO AN EXEC OF, PERF LIMITS DATA
ERRORS, ONLY A AN EXEC OF OR
ERASE, OR MAKE A PERF LIMITS FROM AN ACARS
PARTIAL LIMITS PART OF ERASE THE PERF
REQUEST FOR NEW UPLINK UPLINK WAS
UPLINK PERFORMANCE LIMITS UPLINK
PERFORMANCE LOADED
LIMITS UPLINK DATA
LIMITS DATA
WAS RECEIVED UPLINK OF PERF SELECT THE PERF
PERF LIMITS
EXAMINE, DO AN LIMITS DATA WAS LIMITS PAGE AND
BECAUSE OF UPLINK READY
EDIT, OR REMOVE RECEIVED LOAD THE DATA
ERRORS, ONLY A
PARTIAL NAV DATA NOT NECESSARY A CDU DOWNLINK
PART OF SUPP NAV
UPLINK SUPP NAV DATA MESSAGE STARTED, REMOVE THE
DATA BASE UPLINK
AND MAKE A NEW AND THE FMC CAN MESSAGE AND
WAS RECEIVED RESEND MESSAGE
UPLINK REQUEST NOT SEND THE START THE
BECAUSE OF MESSAGE TO THE DOWNLINK AGAIN
DO AN EXEC OF,
ERRORS, ONLY A ACARS MU
PARTIAL PERF ERASE, OR MAKE A
PART OF PERF NO ATC DATALINK
INIT UPLINK REQUEST FOR NEW CLEAR THE
INIT UPLINK WAS EXIST AND ATC
PERF INIT DATA RE-LOGON TO ATC MESSAGE AND
RECEIVED LOGON WAS
COMM RESEND THE LOGON
BECAUSE OF TRANSMITTED FROM
DO AN EXEC OF, MESSAGE
ERRORS, ONLY A THE AIRCRAFT
PARTIAL ROUTE ERASE, OR MAKE A
PART OF NON-ATC CLEAR THE
UPLINK REQUEST FOR NEW ATC UPLINK
ROUTE UPLINK WAS RESPOND TO ATC MESSAGE AND
ROUTE DATA PENDING STORAGE
RECEIVED UPLINKS RESPOND TO OPEN
FULL
PERF INIT DATA EXAMINE AND DO UPLINKS
FROM THE ACARS AN EXEC OF OR EXAMINE AND DO
PERF INIT UPLINK NON-ATC ROUTE
UPLINK WAS ERASE THE PERF AN EXEC OF OR
ROUTE DATA DATA FROM AN
34-61-00-044.007
LOADED INIT UPLINK DATA ERASE THE NON-
UPLINK ACARS UPLINK WAS
UPLINK OF PERF SELECT THE PERF ATC ROUTE DATA
PERF INIT UPLINK RECEIVED
INIT DATA WAS INIT PAGE AND UPLINK
READY
RECEIVED LOAD THE DATA
34-61-00
- 290 -

CAUSE CAUSE
SELECT THE LOAD TAKEOFF DATA
NON-ATC ROUTE EXAMINE AND
PROMPT ON THE TAKEOFF DATA FROM AN ACARS
DATA FROM AN ACCEPT OR REJECT
ROUTE UPLINK RTE OR LEGS PAGE UPLINK UPLINK WAS
ACARS UPLINK IS THE TAKEOFF DATA
READY TO LOAD THE LOADED
READY TO LOAD
ROUTE DATA FMC UNABLE TO
INTO THE FMC UNABLE TO LOAD CLEAR THE
UPLINK LOAD ANY DATA
CLEARANCE MESSAGE
EXAMINE AND DO FROM UPLINK
RTA DATA FROM AN AN EXEC OF OR CLEAR THE
RTA DATA UPLINK ACARS UPLINK WAS ERASE THE NON- MANUAL
UNABLE TO SEND MESSAGE AND
LOADED ATC ROUTE DATA INITIATION OF
MSG INITIATE A NEW
UPLINK DOWNLINK FAILED
DOWNLINK MESSAGE
Alerting Messages
ACARS UPLINK CORRECTIVE
CAUSE
ALERTING MESSAGE ACTION
SELECT THE LOAD CORRECTIVE
ALERTING MESSAGE CAUSE
RTA DATA FROM AN PROMPT ON THE ACTION
ACARS UPLINK IS RTA PROGRESS VNAV DISENGAGES REMOVE MESSAGE
RTA UPLINK READY
READY TO LOAD PAGE TO LOAD THE AND AIRPLANE ALT AND PUT IN NEW
INTO THE FMC ROUTE DATA CHECK ALT TGT
IS BETWEEN FMC CRZ ALTITUDE ON
UPLINK AND MCP ALT MCP
THE SELECTED CUTBACK STATE
EXAMINE AND CUTBACK DISARMED CLEAR MESSAGE
DEPARTURE RUNWAY CHANGES FROM ON
TAKEOFF DATA ACCEPT OR REJECT (QUIET CLIMB AND SELECT
IS IN ONE OF THE TO OFF DUE TO
LOADED THE ENTERED SYSTEM OPTION) CUTBACK ON
TAKEOFF DATA RUNWAY DELETION
TAKEOFF DATA
SETS CUTBACK
FMC CAN NOT
34-61-00-044.007
TAKEOFF DATA UNAVAILABLE PUT IN CORRECT
EXAMINE AND COMPUTE CUTBACK
TAKEOFF DATA FROM AN ACARS (QUIET CLIMB CUTBACK DATA
ACCEPT OR REJECT N1
UPLINK UPLINK WAS SYSTEM OPTION)
THE TAKEOFF DATA
LOADED
34-61-00
- 291 -
CORRECTIVE CORRECTIVE
ALERTING MESSAGE CAUSE ALERTING MESSAGE CAUSE
ACTION ACTION
A MANUAL START TURN THE IRS 2 MINS BEFORE
CYCLE IRS OFF - OF THE ALIGNMENT MODE SWITCH TO AIRPLANE GETS TO
END OF OFFSET NONE NECESSARY
NAV OF IRS LOGIC IS OFF AND THEN TO OFFSET LEG
NECESSARY NAV TERMINATION
VALIDITY TEST OF AIRPLANE AT LAST GO TO RTE OR RTE
DATA BASE LOAD THE DATA
NAV DATA BASE END OF ROUTE ROUTE LEG LEGS PAGE AND DO
INVALID BASE AGAIN
HAS FAILED TERMINATION A ROUTE MOD
GEOMETRY OF NEXT ENG OUT SID WAS GO TO RTE OR RTE
ENG OUT SID MOD
WPTS DOES NOT AUTOMATICALLY LEGS PAGE AND DO
(ENG OUT SID
LET THE FMC PUT IN THE FLT OR ERASE ENGINE
CHANGE THE OPTION)
DISCO INSRTD OPERATE THE PLAN OUT SID
ACTIVE FLIGHT
AFTR XXXXX ACTIVE PLAN WITH IRS DID NOT
PLAN
NO BYPASS OF ALIGN TO THE SET
MORE THAN ONE POSITION OR IRS PUT IN THE IRS
WPT ENTER IRS
IS IN THE ALIGN POSITION ON THE
POSITION
SELECT THE RTE MODE AND A POS INIT PAGE
OR RTE LEGS PAGE POSITION ENTRY
PASSED THE LAST
TO SET THE WPTS IS NECESSARY
WPT IN THE PLAN
DISCONTINUITY FOR A CONTINUOUS FMS APP IN FLT REMOVE MESSGAE
BEFORE A ROUTE
PLAN OR DO A FMC APP/TUNE PLAN AND APP AND SELECT G/S
DISCONTINUITY
CAPTURE OF NEXT DISAGREE NAVAID IS TUNED AS NECESSARY ON
LEG WITH G/S ON ARR PAGE
PREDICTED SPEED
AT WAYPOINT
XXXXX IS GREATER CLEAR MESSAGE
DRAG REQ AFTER
THAN 10 KNOTS AND APPLY
XXXXX
34-61-00-044.007
ABOVE THE REQUIRED DRAG
WAYPOINT SPEED
CONSTRAINT
34-61-00
- 292 -

CORRECTIVE
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ACTION AIRPLANE IS LESS
STATE OF THAN 5 MINS FROM REMOVE MESSAGE
LNAV BANK ANGLE
DISAGREEMENT CLEAR MESSAGE TURN AND WILL AND TELL ATC IF
LIMITED
FMC DISAGREE BETWEEN THE FMCS AND VERIFY EXCEED AIRSPACE NECESSARY
IN THE APPROACH POSITION CONTAINMENT AREA
PHASE OF FLIGHT ALTITUDE
FMCS AND RUNWAY REMOVE MESSAGE INTERVENTION
FMC POS/RW
POSITION AND VERIFY TRIED TO
DISAGREE
DISAGREE POSITION MAX ALT FLXXX INCREASE CRZ ALT REMOVE MESSAGE
FMC IS NOT REMOVE MESSAGE WHEN MCP ALT IS
GPS-L(R) INVALID RECEIVING GPS AND VERIFY ABOVE THE MAX
DATA POSITION ALTITUDE
CHANGE IN CORRECT LOC
CONDITIONS OR CAPTURE STARTED
CHANGE ROUTE MISSED CAPTURE REMOVE MESSAGE
FLIGHT PLAN BUT DFCS DID NOT
PLAN OR CRUISE GET A CAPTURE
INSUFFICIENT ROUTE CAUSES
ALTITUDE OR
FUEL PREDICTIONS TO
CHANGE ROUTE TO
SHOW LESS THAN
GET MORE FUEL
2000 LBS FUEL AT CORRECTIVE
DESTINATION ACTION
IRS FOUND TOO REMOVE THE THE AIRPLANE
IRS MOTION MUCH MOTION MESSAGE AND STOP MODEL/ENGINE
DURING ALIGNMENT AIRPLANE MOTION MODEL ENGINE PERFORMANCE DATA LOAD THE DATA
IRS AND AIRPORT REMOVE MESSAGE DATA INVALID BASE IS NOT BASE AGAIN
IRS POS/ORIGIN LOADED OR IS NOT
POSITION AND VERIFY
DISAGREE VALID
DISAGREE POSITION
34-61-00-044.007
NAV DATA BASE SELECT CORRECT
NAV DATA OUT OF DATE IS NOT THE NAV DATA BASE OR
DATE SAME AS CLOCK LOAD NEW NAV
DATE DATA BASE
34-61-00
- 293 -
CORRECTIVE
ACTION CORRECTIVE
FMC CAN NOT DO DO A CROSS-CHECK ACTION
NAV INVALID-TUNE AN AUTOTUNE OR OF RADIOS AND RTA IS OUT OF
XXXXX RECEIVE APPROACH MANUALLY TUNE THE COMPUTED
PROCEDURE NAVAID RELATED NAVAID WINDOW PLUS A
REMOVE MESSAGE,
DECREASE TIME MARGIN AND
GO OUT OF RTA
AIRPLANE SPEED RTA UNACHIEVABLE NO CORRECTIVE
FUNCTION OR PUT
AIRPLANE IS MORE TO LESS THAN 10 ACTION CAN BE
OVERSPEED IN CORRECT RTA
THAN 15 KTS OF KTS OF SPEED MADE BECAUSE OF
DISCONNECT SPEED
RESTRICTION TARGET AND
ENGAGE VNAV CONSTRAINTS
AGAIN MCP SELECTED
REMOVE MESSGAE
DO AN EXEC OF OR COURSE DOES NOT
PARTIAL ROUTE ONLY PART OF THE RW/APP CRS ERROR AND SET CORRECT
ERASE THE MOD AGREE WITH APP
LOADED ROUTE WAS LOADED COURSE ON MCP
ROUTE IN FLT PLAN
FAILURE OF TUNED APP FREQ
RLOAD THE PERF REMOVE MESSGAE
PERF DEFAULTS LOADED PERF RW/APP TUNE DOES NOT AGREE
DEFAULTS DATA AND TUNE CORRECT
INVALID DEFAULTS DATA DISAGREE WITH APP IN FLT
BASE AGAIN FREQUENCY
BASE CRC CHECK PLAN
LESS THAN 5NM OF FAILURE OF REMOVE THE
SELECT CORRECT SCANNING DME INPUTS FROM MESSAGE AND DO A
TOP OF DESCENT
RESET MCP MCP ALTITUDE AS FAIL FREQUENCY CHECK OF NAV
AND MCP ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE CLEARANCES SCANNING DME RADIO FUNCTION
IS AT CRZ
PERMIT
ALTITUDE RTA FUNCTION REMOVE MESSAGE
SELECT MODE DOES AN EXIT BY OR SELECT
AFTER RTA WPT DELETION OR ALTERNATE PERF
RTA WPT SEQUENCE MODE
34-61-00-044.007
34-61-00
- 294 -

CORRECTIVE
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ACTION REMOVE MESSAGE
ACTUAL NAV
FMC HARDWARE MOVE FMC SOURCE AND MAKE SURE OF
SINGLE FMC UNABLE REQD NAV PERFORMANCE IS
FAILURE OR SELECT SWITCH TO FMCS POSITION
OPERATION (DUAL PERF-RNP MORE THAN RNP
INTERSYSTEM BUS BOTH ON L OR DATA ON POS
FMC ONLY) VALUES
FAILURE BOTH ON R SHIFT PAGE
REMOVE MESSAGE NEXT WAYPOINT REMOVE MESSAGE
SW OPTIONS DATA
SW OPTIONS AND LOAD SW UNABLE XXX KTS SPEED AND ADJUST
BASE FAILED BITE
INVALID OPTIONS DATA AT YYYYY RESTRICTION WAYPOINT SPEED
OR INVALID
BASE AGAIN CANNOT BE MET CONSTRAINT
MANUALLY FAILURE OF TOTAL
SELECTED TAKEOFF REMOVE MESSAGE FUEL QTY OR IT
REMOVE MESSAGE
SPEEDS REMOVED AND SELECT IS MORE THAN 30
TAKEOFF SPEEDS AND DO A CHECK
BECAUSE OF NECESSARY VERIFY GW AND MINUTES SINCE
DELETED OF GW AND FUEL
CHANGE IN ONE OR TAKEOFF SPEEDS FUEL MANUAL FUEL QTY
MANUALLY PUT IN
MORE NECESSARY AGAIN ENTRY. MESSAGE
GW AS NECESSARY
PARAMETERS INHIBITED IN
AIRPLANE IS 17 REMOVE MESSAGE DESCENT
KNOTS BELOW AND CORRECT IRS l AND R
THRUST REQUIRED REMOVE MESSAGE
HIGHEST SPEED UNDERSPEED POSITION
AND DO A CHECK
TARGET CONDITION VERIFY POS:IRS- DIFFERENCES ARE
OF POSITIONS ON
HOLD PATTERN IRS MORE THAN
THE POS SHIFT
FROM FMCS PERMITTED
REMOVE MESSAGE PAGE
UNABLE HOLD GUIDANCE TOLERANCES
AND TELL ATC IF
AIRSPACE FUNCTION IS MORE FMCS IRS AND
NECESSARY REMOVE MESSAGE
THAN HOLD POSITION
AND DO A CHECK
AIRSPACE VERIFY POS:IRS- DIFFEREENCES ARE
OF POSITIONS ON
FMC MORE THAN
34-61-00-044.007
NEXT CLB/DESC REMOVE MESSAGE THE POS SHIFT
UNABLE NEXT ALT CONSTRAINT CAN AND EXAMINE FMCS PERMITTED
PAGE
NOT BE MADE PREDICTION ERROR TOLERANCES
34-61-00
- 295 -
ALERTING MESSAGE CAUSE ALERTING MESSAGE CAUSE
ACTION ACTION
IRS AND RADIO DEFAULT VALUE OF REMOVE MESSAGE
REMOVE MESSAGE
NAV POSITION RNP IS LESS THAN AND DO A CHECK
AND DO A CHECK VERIFY RNP
VERIFY POS:IRS- DIFFERENCES ARE THE VALUE OF RNP VALUE
OF POSITIONS ON
RADIO MORE THAN MANUALLY PUT IN MANUALLY PUT IN
THE POS SHIFT
PERMITTED SYSTEM GROSS
PAGE
TOLERANCES WEIGHT OR ZERO
FMCS AND RADIO FUEL WEIGHT
REMOVE MESSAGE VERIFY TAKEOFF SELECT TAKEOFF
NAV POSITION CHANGED SINCE
AND DO A CHECK SPEEDS SPEEDS AGAIN
VERIFY POS:FMC- DIFFERENCES ARE THE T/O REF
OF POSITIONS ON
RADIO MORE THAN SPEEDS WERE
THE POS SHIFT
PERMITTED SELECTED
PAGE
TOLERANCES
FMCS AND GPS
REMOVE MESSAGE
POSITION CORRECTIVE
AND DO A CHECK ALERTING MESSAGE CAUSE
VERIFY POS:FMC- DIFFERENCES ARE ACTION
OF POSITIONS ON
GPS MORE THAN MANUALLY ENTERED REMOVE MESSAGE
THE POS SHIFT
PERMITTED RNP IS GREATER AND PUT IN
PAGE VERIFY VERT RNP
TOLERANCES THAT DEFAULT RNP CORRECT RNP
FMC L AND R REMOVE MESSAGE VALUE VALUE
POSITION SENSORS AND DO A CHECK MANUALLY CONTROL
VERIFY POS:FMC-
ARE MORE THAN OF POSITIONS ON NO LONGER IS THE VERTICAL
FMC
PERMITTED THE POS SHIFT THERE CRITERIA PATH. MESSAGE
TOLERANCES PAGE VNAV DISCONNECT
FOR VNAV GOES AWAY IF
ENGAGEMENT VNAV ENGAGES
AGAIN
34-61-00-044.007
34-61-00
- 296 -

Advisory Messages CORRECTIVE
ADVISORY MESSAGE CAUSE
ACTION
CURRENT
CORRECTIVE CONDITIONS
ADVISORY MESSAGE CAUSE BRING AIRPLANE
ACTION RESULT IN
BACK IN
DO A DESCENT TO BUFFET ALERT MANEUVER MARGIN
AIRPLANE IS OPERATION
AN ALTITUDE LESS THAN THAT
ABOVE ITS ENVELOPE
ABOVE MAX CERT BELOW THE SELECTED FOR
MAXIMUM
ALT MAXIMUM AIRPLANE
CERTIFIED
CERTIFIED THE FMCS FOUND A
ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE DECREASE IN FUEL DO A CHECK OF
CHECK FMC FUEL
FLIGHT PLAN EDIT QUANTITY (> 1500 THE FUEL QUANITY
QUANTITY
CAUSED AN LBS FOR 120 SYSTEM
ALTITUDE SECONDS)
DO AN EDIT OF
CONSTRAINT THAT WHILE IN
THE FLIGHT PLAN CHANGE THE
HAS A CONFLICT DESCENT, THE FMC
ALT CONSTRAINT TO CORRECT THE ACTIVE ROUTE
WITH A PREDICTIONS SHOW
XXXXX ALT CONSTRAINT DESCENT PATH LEGS OR DES PAGE
CONSTRAINT THE PROFILE
CONFLICT AND UNACHIEVABLE PLANS AND ENGAGE
ALTITUDE AT CONSTRAINTS AT
REMOVE MESSAGE LNAV AND VNAV
OTHER WPTS IN THE NEXT WPT CAN
THE ROUTE. XXXXX AGAIN
NOT BE MADE
IS THE FIRST WPT
FMC IN APPROACH
SELECT VREF ON
APPRCH VREF NOT ENVIRONMENT AND
APPROACH REF
SELECTED VREF NOT
PAGE
SELECTED
RUNWAY OR
APPROACH GO TO ARRIVALS
ARR N/A FOR
SELECTED IS NOT PAGE AND CHANGE
34-61-00-044.007
RUNWAY
COMPATIBLE WITH SELECTION
ARRIVAL SELECTED
34-61-00
- 297 -
ADVISORY MESSAGE CAUSE ADVISORY MESSAGE CAUSE
ACTION ACTION
BECAUSE OF ACARS UPLINK OF
CONDITIONS NOT ALTN DESTINATION
USE SPEEDBRAKES INVALID ALTN MAKE AN UPLINK
IN THE FORECAST, CAN NOT BE USED
OR TRIM AS DEST UPLINK REQUEST AGAIN
THE AIRPLANE IS BECAUSE OF
NECESSARY TO
DRAG REQUIRED 10 KTS OR MORE ERRORS
BRING AIRPLANE
ABOVE FMCS ACARS UPLINK OF
BELOW FMCS
TARGET SPEED OR CRZ WIND DATA
TARGET SPEED INVALID CRZ WIND MAKE AN UPLINK
LESS THAN 5 KTS CAN NOT BE USED
OF VMO UPLINK REQUEST AGAIN
BECAUSE OF
FMS APP IN FLT ERRORS
PLAN AND FINAL REMOVE MESSAGE ACARS UPLINK OF
FMC APP MODE
APP ANGLE CHECK AND PUT CORRECT DESCENT
UNAVAILABLE
HAD A FAILURE OR VALUES BACK IN INVALID FORECASTS CAN MAKE AN UPLINK
QFE IS SELECTED FORECASTS UPLINK NOT BE USED REQUEST AGAIN
FMS APP IN FLT REMOVE MESSAGE BECAUSE OF
FMC APP MODE PLAN AND FAILURE AND PUT CORRECT ERRORS
UNAVAIL-GP OF FINAL APP APP VALUES BACK ACARS UPLINK OF
ANGLE CHECK IN PERF LIMITS DATA
INVALID LIMITS MAKE AN UPLINK
FMS APP IN FLT REMOVE MESSAGE CAN NOT BE USED
FMC APP MODE UPLINK REQUEST AGAIN
PLAN AND QFE IS AND SELECT QFE BECAUSE OF
UNAVAIL-QFE
SELECTED OFF ERRORS
ACARS UPLINK OF
SUPP NAV DATA
INVALID NAV DATA MAKE AN UPLINK
CAN NOT BE USED
UPLINK REQUEST AGAIN
BECAUSE OF
34-61-00-044.007
ERRORS
34-61-00
- 298 -

CORRECTIVE
ACTION CORRECTIVE
A FLIGHT PLAN ACTION
MOD THAT CAUSES ERASE MOD AND AIRPLANE GETS
REMOVE MESSAGE
INVALID OFFSET THE START OF THE PUT IN VALID WPT CLOSE TO ITS
LOC CAP ACTIVE OR HOLD FOR DFCS
OFFSET TO BECOME FOR OFFSET START TURN ONTO LOC
TO DO A RESET
OFFSETTABLE COURSE
ACARS UPLINK OF FLIGHT PLAN MOD REMOVE MESSAGE
PERF INIT DATA OR AIRPLANE OR HOLD FOR DFCS
INVALID PERF MAKE AN UPLINK LOC CAP
CAN NOT BE USED CONDITION DID TO GIVE A SIGNAL
INIT UPLINK REQUEST AGAIN CANCELLED
BECAUSE OF NOT PERMIT LOC OF RESET STATUS
ERRORS CAPTURE TO THE FMCS
INCORRECT DATA ALT ENTRY ON A REMOVE MESSAGE
REMOVE MESSAGE
IS PUT IN QUAD PAGE IS ABOVE AND CHANGE DATA
INVALID QUAD AND PUT IN MAX ALT FLXXX
FIELD ON HOLD MAXIMUM ALTITUDE ENTRY IN SCRATCH
CORRECT DATA
PAGE FOR ECON MODE PAD
ACARS UPLINK OF THERE IS AN
ACCEPT LIMITED
ROUTE DATA CAN ENTERED TARGET
INVALID ROUTE MAKE AN UPLINK SPEED AND REMOVE
NOT BE USED SPEED LIMIT
UPLINK REQUEST AGAIN MAX CAS XXX MESSAGE OR PUT
BECAUSE OF BECAUSE IT IS
IN NEW TARGET
ERRORS MORE THAN THE
SPEED
ACARS UPLINK OF MAX BUFFET SPEED
INVALID RTA RTA DATA CAN NOT MAKE AN UPLINK THERE IS AN
ACCEPT LIMITED
UPLINK BE USED BECAUSE REQUEST AGAIN ENTERED TARGET
SPEED AND REMOVE
OF ERRORS SPEED LIMIT
MAX MACH XXX MESSAGE OR PUT
ACARS UPLINK OF BECAUSE IT IS
IN NEW TARGET
TAKEOFF DATA CAN MORE THAN THE
INVALID TAKEOFF MAKE AN UPLINK SPEED
NOT BE USED MAX BUFFET SPEED
UPLINK REQUEST AGAIN
34-61-00-044.007
BECAUSE OF A CHANGE IN THE
REMOVE MESSAGE
ERRORS MCP APP DISARM VERTICAL APP IS
AND SELECT G/S
REQD NECESSARY FROM
OFF ON ARR PAGE
G/S TO G/P
34-61-00
- 299 -
CORRECTIVE
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ACTION MANUALLY CONTROL
THERE IS AN AIRPLANE ONTO
AIRPLANE IS NOT
ENTERED TARGET ACCEPT LIMITED NOT ON INTERCEPT HEADING THAT CAN
IN LEG CAPTURE
SPEED LIMIT SPEED AND CLEAR HEADING MAKE AN
MIN CAS XXX CRITERIA
BECAUSE IT IS MESSAGE OR ENTER INTERCEPT WITH
LESS THAN MIN NEW TARGET SPEED PLANNED ROUTE
BUFFET SPEED THE START WPT IS
PUT IN THE
THERE IS AN REMOVED FROM THE
OFFSET AGAIN AS
ENTERED TARGET ACCEPT LIMITED FLIGHT PLAN BY A
OFFSET DELETED NECESSARY FOR
SPEED LIMIT SPEED AND CLEAR FLIGHT PLAN EDIT
MIN MACH XXX THE NEW FLIGHT
BECAUSE IT IS MESSAGE OR ENTER ON OTHER THAN
PLAN
LESS THAN MIN NEW TARGET SPEED THE OFFSET PAGE
BUFFET SPEED
SELECT RTE LEGS
THE PROFILE
OR DES PAGES TO
CONSTRAINTS CAN
NO DES PATH REMOVE OR CHANGE
NOT BE MADE AND
AFTER XXXXX THE CONSTRAINTS
THE PATH HELD AS
AT THE DESCENT
PLANNED
WPTS
34-61-00-044.007
34-61-00
- 300 -

ACTION ACTION
ENTRY OF AN END THE AIRFRAME OR CORRECT THE
WPT WHICH ENGINE PROGRAM PROGRAM PIN
CHANGE THE
RESULTS IN A PINS DO NOT CONFIGURATION OR
OFFSET
OFFSET ENDS NON-OFFSETTABLE PROGRAM PIN NOT COMPARE TO DATA LOAD THE CORRECT
PARAMETERS TO
ABEAM XXXXX LEG BEWEEN THE IN DB IN THE AIRPLANE AIRPLANE
GIVE A COMPLETE
END WPT AND THE MODEL/ENGINE MODEL/ENGINE
OFFSET PATH
START OF THE PERFORMANCE DATA PERFORMANCE DATA
OFFSET BASE BASE
THE AIRFRAME REMOVE POWER NORMAL FMCS
/ENGINE PROGRAM FROM THE FMCS OPERATION CAUSES CHANGE THE MCP
RESET MCP
PIN PARITY IS AND CORRECT THE THE AIRPLANE TO ALTITUDE TO
ALTITUDE
PROGRAM PIN NOT VALID OR THE PROBLEM. THE MOVE AWAY FROM CORRECT VALUE
ERROR FMC CLEAR KEY OR A MCP ALTITUDE
IDENTIFICATION PAGE CHANGE DOES A CHANGE IN THE REMOVE MESSAGE
DISCRETES ARE NOT REMOVE THE RESET MCP APP VERTICAL APP IS AND PUT APP
NOT VALID MESSAGE MODE MADE WITH AN FCC PARAMETERS IN
ARMED OR ENGAGED AGAIN
NO MEMORY SPACE
REMOVE MESSAGE
AVAILABLE FOR
AND EXAMINE
PHANTOM WPTS
ROUTE FULL ROUTE SEGMENTS
MADE NECESSARY
FOR POSSIBLE
BY THE VERTICAL
DELETION
FLIGHT PLAN
THE SELECTED
RUNWAY IS NOT
REMOVE MESSAGE
RUNWAY N/A FOR APPLICABLE TO
34-61-00-044.007
AND DO A CHECK
SID THE SELECTED
OF SELECTIONS
DEPARTURE
PROCEDURE
34-61-00
- 301 -
ACTION ACTION
DO A DIRECT-TO A VALID LATERAL MAKE SURE OF THE
POWER-UP RESTART
OR LEG-INTERCEPT OFFSET CAN NOT NECESSITY TO
OR INSERTION OF
SELECT ACTIVE TO GIVE FMCS AN BE MADE BECAUSE OPERATE ON A
A DIFFERENT
WPT/LEG INDICATION OF UNABLE TO OFFSET THE TURN LATERAL OFFSET
FLIGHT PLAN
WHICH LEG IS SEGMENTS CAN NOT AND CHANGE THE
WHILE AIRBORNE
ACTIVE FIT TO AND FROM FLIGHT PLAN AS
FMC ALTITUDE THE OFFSET PATH NECESSARY
DO A CHECK OF
CONSTRAINT AT A CHANGE IN
STEEP DES AFTER THE CONSTRAINT
XXXXX RESULTS IN ROUTE OR
XXXXX AND REMOVE IF REMOVE MESSAGE
A HIGH DESCENT CONDITIONS
PERMITTED AND CHANGE THE
TO NEXT WPT CAUSES PREDICTED
USING RSV FUEL ACTIVE FLIGHT
AIRPLANE FUEL AT
REMOVE MESSAGE PLAN IF
OPERATES WITH DESTINATION TO
TAI ON ABOVE 10 AND DO A CHECK NECESSARY
ANTI-ICING WITH BE LESS THAN THE
DEGREES C OF ANTI-ICING ENTERED RESERVES
TAT ABOVE 10
USE
DEGREES C REMOVE, CHANGE,
FMCS GIVES A FMC CAN NOT AND PUT IN
V SPEEDS
PREDICTION OF NO REMOVE MESSAGE CALCULATE T/O INPUTS AGAIN FOR
UNAVAILABLE
UNABLE CRZ ALT CRUISE TIME AND EXAMINE CRZ SPEEDS THE T/O SPEED
POSSIBLE AT ALT SELECTION CALCULATIONS
ENTERED CRZ ALT CHANGE IN FLIGHT
CLEAR MESSAGE
SPEED PUT IN PLAN CAUSES
AND AMEND THE
TARGET SPEED USING RSV FUEL PREDICTED FUEL
ACTIVE FLT PLAN
FIELD IS NOT PUT IN A NEW TO BE LESS THAN
IF NECESSARY
UNABLE MACH .XXX POSSIBLE TO MAKE TARGET SPEED ENTERED RESERVES
34-61-00-044.007
AT ANY ALTITUDE AGAIN MANUALLY ENTERED REMOVE MESSAGE
AT THE CURRENT RNP IS LARGER AND MAKE SURE OF
VERIFY RNP VALUE
AIRPLANE WEIGHT THAN DEFAULT MANUALLY ENTERED
VALUE VALUE
34-61-00
- 302 -

ACARS Status Messages
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
MANUALLY ENTERED REMOVE MESSAGE CORRECTIVE
ACARS MESSAGE CAUSE
VERIFY VERT RNP RNP IS GREATER AND PUT IN ACTION
VALUE THAT DEFAULT RNP CORRECT RNP SELECT ACARS MU
VALUE VALUE A REQUEST FOR ON MCDU AND DO
A REF AIRPORT IS ACARS ALERT FLIGHT CREW NECESSARY
PUT IN ON THE SELECT THE ACTION FOR ACARS ACTION. REMOVE
POS INIT PAGE AIRPORT MESSAGE
XXXX (AIRPORT
AND NO ENTRY OF IDENTIFIER INTO THE ACARS MU
NAME) SELECT THE ACARS
ORIGIN YET THE ORIGIN DATA MAKES A REQUEST
ACARS CALL MU ON THE MCDU
APPEARS ON RTE FIELD FOR SERVICE FROM
MENU PAGE
PAGE 1 THE FLIGHT CREW
A RESET OF MCP THE ACARS MU HAS MAKE SURE THAT
SELECT MCP
ALTITUDE TO A ACARS MU FAIL A HARDWARE ACARS MU HAS
ALTITUDE INTO
VALUE NOT EQUAL FAILURE POWER
XXXXX (ALT THE APPLICIBLE
TO THE CRZ ALT THERE IS NO REMOVE THE
VALUE) TARGET ALTITUDE
CAUSES THE VALUE ACARS LINK MESSAGE AND MAKE
FIELD OR REMOVE ACARS NO COMM
TO SHOW IN THE AVAILABLE (SAT, SURE OF COMMS
THE DATA
SCRATCH PAD VHF, OR MODE S) STATUS
SELECT ACARS MU
ON MCDU AND DO
ACARS MESSAGE
ACARS UPLINK NECESSARY
HELD
ACTION. REMOVE
MESSAGE
VHF TRANSCEIVER
ACARS VOICE REMOVE MESSAGE
SET TO VOICE
34-61-00-044.007
MESSAGE GOES
ALL VHF CIRCUITS AWAY WHEN A
ACARS VOICE BUSY
ARE BUSY CIRCUIT BECOMES
AVAILABLE
34-61-00
- 303 -
CORRECTIVE
ACARS MESSAGE CAUSE
ACTION
ACARS MESSAGES 7
USER DEFINED USER DEFINED
THRU 19
FLIGHT DO A CHECK OF
PRINTER FAIL
COMPARTMENT THE PRINTER AND
(OPTIONAL)
PRINTER FAILURE REMOVE MESSAGE
SELECT ACARS MU
ACARS UPLINK HAS ON THE MCDU AND
PRINTER UPLINK
A MESSAGE FOR DO NECESSARY
(OPTIONAL)
THE PRINTER ACTIONS. REMOVE
MESSAGE
34-61-00-044.007
34-61-00
- 304 -

INIT/REF INDEX 1 / 1 MESSAGE RECALL 1 / 1
<IDENT NAV DATA> NAV DATA OUT OF DATE

<POS MSG RECALL> ENTER IRS P O SI T I O N
<PERF
<TAKEOFF
<APPROACH SEL CONFIG>
<OFFSET MAINT>
TYPE OF MESSAGE OTHER INDICATION EXAMPLE CDU MESSAGES

FOR THIS MESSAGE
ACARS UPLINK ROUTE UPLINK READY

ALERTING M TAKEOFF DATA LOADED
FMC S DATA BASE INVALID
G IRS MOTION
P/RSTa MODEL ENGINE DATA INVALID
ALERTING w
RESET MCP ALTITUDE
M
ENTRY ERROR INVALID ENTRY
S
ADVISORY G NOT IN DATA BASE
w
M
PROGRAM PIN ERROR
ADVISORY S CHECK FMC FUEL QUANTITY
G PROGRAM PIN NOT IN DB
w
34-61-00-044.007
ACARS NONE ACARS NO COMM
STATUS
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDU - MESSAGES
34-61-00
- 305 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - FLIGHT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS
FMCS Flight Mode Annunciation LNAV can be armed before takeoff by selecting the LNAV
push button on the DFCS mode control panel (MCP). LNAV
The DFCS provides all the FMC flight mode annunciations will be displayed as the active roll mode. However, it
(FMA). They are displayed in green at the top of the only becomes truly active above 50 feet radio altitude
primary flight displays. (RA).
These are flight mode annunciations for autothrottle, If a missed approach is included in the active route
pitch and roll operation. and the FMC is "on approach", LNAV is armed
automatically. On approach is defined as the airplane
Autothrottle Mode Annunciation being within 2 NM of the first waypoint in the approach
procedure.
These are the active autothrottle modes that can be
displayed during FMCS operation: LNAV will become the active roll mode automatically
with the following conditions set:
- FMC SPD
- N1 - TOGA selected
- RETARD - Altitude greater than 50 feet RA with pilot flying
- ARM. or single channel autopilot engaged
- Altitude greater than 400 feet RA with dual
Pitch Mode Annunciations channel autopilot engaged.
These are the active pitch modes that can be displayed

during FMCS operation:
- VNAV PTH
- VNAV ALT
- VNAV SPD.
Roll Mode Annunciation
34-61-00-045.fm
The only active roll mode annunciation that can be
displayed during FMCS operation is LNAV.
34-61-00
- 306 -

FMCS A/T MODE FMCS/DFCS ROLL FMCS/DFCS PITCH

ANNUNCIATION MODE ANNUNCIATION MODE ANNUNCIATION
- FMC SPD - LNAV - VNAV PTH
- N1 - VNAV SPD
- RETARD - VNAV ALT
- ARM
FMC SPD LNAV VNAV PTH
CMD
LNAV/VNAV OPERATION
MCP SPD VOR/LOC G/S

LNAV
CMD
34-61-00-045.fm
APPROACH
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - FLIGHT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS
34-61-00
- 307 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - THRUST MODE
General Only one thrust mode can be active and show at one
time.
The thrust mode annunciation display shows the active
N1 limit mode calculated by the FMCS. The reference N1 Display Control
bugs (2) show the N1 limit for the active mode. The N1
limit mode controls the N1 limit for autothrottle When you set the N1 SET CONTROL outer knob to the AUTO
operation. position, the FMCS sets the thrust mode display and N1
bug position as a function of DFCS mode logic. To do an
Thrust Mode Display override of automatic control, you can use a line
select to select a different mode from the N1 limit
The FMCS calculates thrust modes and sends them to the page. The displays go back to automatic control when
display electronic units (DEU). They show at the top of the DFCS pitch mode changes.
the upper display unit and are green in color. If the
N1 data is NCD, three dashes show. When the outer knob is set to the BOTH, 1 or 2 position,
you can manually set the reference N1 bugs, and MAN
These are the thrust modes that can show: shows as the thrust mode. The N1 reference readout
always shows regardless of the outer knob position.
- TO - takeoff
- TO 1 - reduced takeoff 1 Non-Normal Operation
- TO 2 - reduced takeoff 2
- D-TO - derated takeoff In automatic operation, the FMCS calculates the thrust
- D-TO 1 - derated takeoff 1 mode display and reference N1 bug readout. If the FMCS
- D-TO 2 - derated takeoff 2 calculations are not valid, the autothrottle limit
- CLB - climb message A/T LIM shows. The autothrottle then calculates
- CLB 1 - reduced climb 1 an N1 limit for the two engines.
- CLB 2 - reduced climb 2
- CON - continuous
- CRZ - cruise
- --- - no computed data
- MAN - manual
34-61-00-046.fm
- GA - go around.
34-61-00
- 308 -

N1 SET N1 LIMIT 1 /1
S E L /OA T 2 6 K N1
AUTO / +15 o
C 99.5/ 99.5
2 6 K
1 BOTH <TO <ACT> < SEL> CLB>
2 4 K DE R A T E
<TO-1 CLB-1>
2 2 K DE R A T E
2 <TO-2 CLB-2>
-- -----------------------
ENGINE DISPLAY <PERF INIT TAKEOFF>
ENGINE DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL

N1 LIMIT
(ON GROUND)
THRUST MODE
DISPLAY
- TO
- TO 1
- TO 2
- D-TO
- D-TO 1
- D-TO 2
- CLB
- CLB 1 N1 LIMIT 1 / 1
- CLB 2
- CON <AUTO <A C T >
N1 REF READOUT CRZ - CRZ
- - - - <GA 10 1 . 6 / 1 0 1 . 6 %
ACTUAL N1 TAI 89.8 TAI 89.8 - GA <CON 99.8/ 9 9.8%
- MAN
REF N1 BUG 10 87.1 10 87.1 - A/T LIMIT <CLB 89.8/ 8 9.8%
0 0
8 8 <CRZ 83.8/ 8 3.8%
2 2 - - - - - --R E D U C E D C L B - - - - - - -
6 6
4 4 <CLB-1 <SEL> C LB-2
N1
34-61-00-046.fm
N1 LIMIT
(IN AIR)
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - THRUST MODE
34-61-00
- 309 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - AIRSPEED INDICATIONS
34-61-00-047.002
34-61-00
- 310 -

22General - VREF - shows the landing reference speed (REF) in
the air and shows INVALID ENTRY on the ground
The takeoff and landing airspeed bugs show on the PFD - Triangle symbol - shows an airspeed bug the pilot
speed tape indication. The FMC sets the bugs or the can set
flight crew can use the speed reference selector on the - SET - the FMC and the inner control cannot move the
engine control panel to set the bugs. When the crew airspeed bugs.
sets the bugs, the airspeeds show on the PFD speed tape
indication and a digital display of the set value The message NO VSPD replaces V1 decision speed if V1 is
shows. NCD or not valid while in AUTO mode or less than 80
knots in the manual mode. NO VSPD is displayed in
You also use the speed reference selector to set the amber.
airplane takeoff or landing gross weight. CDS uses this
weight value to calculate and show the flap maneuvering NOTE: It will also be displayed prior to the flight
speeds. crew entering the performance data via the CDU.
Ground speed shows as a digital readout below the The inner control sets the selected bug to the
airspeed tape when Mach number is not shown. During a necessary airspeed or sets gross weight. The control is
change between Mach number and ground speed, a spring-loaded to center.
highlight box shows for ten seconds. Ground speed shows
in white. Takeoff
Speed Reference Selector This data shows on the PFD speed tape indication:
The outer control has these functions: - Digital display - shows if the airspeed bugs or
weight is set with the speed reference selector
- AUTO - the FMCS supplies the reference airspeeds - V1 - decision speed
and gross weight - VR - rotation speed
- V1 - shows the takeoff decision speed on the ground - Selected speed - shows the airspeed set in the
and shows INVALID ENTRY in flight IAS/MACH display on the DFCS mode control panel
- VR - shows takeoff rotation speed on the ground and (MCP) or the FMC computed airspeed when the
34-61-00-047.002
shows INVALID ENTRY in flight IAS/MACH window is blank
- WT - the pilot can set the gross weight manually - V2+15 - single engine climb speed plus 15 knots
34-61-00
- 311 -
- Flap maneuver speed - maneuver speed for flap
position shown; it does not show for 30 or 40 units
of flap
- Flaps up speed - shows after zero fuel weight is
set in the CDU, and takeoff gross weight is
calculated, or after takeoff gross weight is set
with the speed reference selector
- Airspeed bug at 100 knots - this shows during
preflight and goes away when the flaps start to
retract.
All the above takeoff indications are green in color

but not the airspeed bugs, which are white in color.
Approach/Landing
This data can show on the PFD speed tape during

approach:
- REF landing reference speed VREF is set on the CDU

APPROACH REF page or set with the speed reference
selector
- VREF+20 - shows after VREF is set
- Flap/VREF speed indication - flap/VREF is set on
the CDU APPROACH REF page
- VNAV speed bands - permitted airspeed range during
VNAV PATH descents
- Flap maneuver speed - maneuver speed for flap
position shown.
34-61-00-047.002
All the above approach/landing indications are green in
color but not the VNAV speed bands, which are magenta
in color.
34-61-00
- 312 -

SELECTED
SPEED
148 V2+15 200 132 MANUALLY

180 SELECTED 220 220 SET BUG
SPEED BUG
160 200 200 FLAP
REFERENCE MANEUVER
TAKEOFF SPEED
140 VR
SPEEDS 180 180
V1
135
SPEED VREF+20
122 TREND 202 VNAV SPEED 162
15
BANDS LANDING
VECTOR
REFERENCE
100 180 140 SPEED BUG
CURRENT LANDING REF
AIRSPEED 160 REFERENCE 120

80 MINIMUM
REMINDER BUG SPEED BUG MANEUVER
WT LB
104000
REF
30/130 30/130 SPEED
MANUAL
GS134 AIRSPEEDS GS208 LANDING GS168 MINIMUM
OR WEIGHT FLAP/REF SPEED
SPEED
GROUNDSPEED
DISPLAY
TAKEOFF APPROACH LANDING
SPD REF
OUTER CONTROL AUTO
V1
INNER CONTROL
SET VR
34-61-00-047.002
WT
VREF
SPEED REFERENCE SELECTOR

FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - AIRSPEED INDICATIONS
34-61-00
- 313 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - MAP DISPLAY
34-61-00-048.003
34-61-00
- 314 -

General - T/D altitude profile point - top of descent
position in the active route; green
The FMCS supplies the navigation data for the MAP mode - E/D altitude profile point - end of descent
displays on the common display system (CDS). There are position in the active route; green
two types of navigation data, dynamic data and - S/C altitude profile point - step climb position
background data. Dynamic data changes as a function of in the active route; green
time, while background data does not move as a function - Speed profile point - deceleration point in the
of time. active route; green
- Active waypoint - subsequent waypoint in the
The FMCS does a format of and transmits the data (FMC active route; magenta
bus 08 and FMC bus 09) to show the airplane position in - Range to altitude arc - range at which the airplane
relation to the flight plan and vertical profile. The will get to the MCP altitude; green
CDS controls symbol color, size and brightness. - Trend vector - predicted position of airplane at
the end of 30, 60, or 90 second intervals; white
Map Mode - Inactive waypoint - waypoint other than the active
waypoint in the active route; white
The map mode shows the movement of the flight and is - Vertical deviation scale - vertical deviation from
the normal display the crew uses for navigation in the calculated descent profile; scale is white and
flight. This display can show in the expanded mode or pointer is magenta
the centered mode. The display is dynamic and moves as - Map options - options selected on the EFIS control
the airplane moves. panel; cyan
- Wind data - wind speed and direction; white
Symbol Definitions - Map source - source of dynamic and background
data; green
This data shows: - Navaids - navigation stations in the selected map
area; cyan
- Active waypoint distance - distance to go to the - Off route waypoints - waypoints in the selected
active waypoint; white map area but not in the active route; cyan
- Active waypoint ETA - estimated time of arrival - Airports - airports in the selected map area; cyan
for the active waypoint; white - Route data - altitude constraints and ETAs for the
34-61-00-048.003
- T/C altitude profile point - top of climb position waypoints in the active route; the active waypoint
in the active route; green altitude constraint always shows; magenta or white
34-61-00
- 315 -
- Lateral path deviation - deviation from active
route; white
- Vertical path deviation - acceptable deviation
from vertical path; magenta
- Track angle - airplane track; white
- Lateral ANP/RNP display - current ANP/RNP values;
green. If ANP exceeds RNP; amber
- Vertical ANP/RNP display - current ANP/RNP values;
green. If ANP exceeds RNP; amber.
34-61-00-048.003
34-61-00
- 316 -

TRUE AIR
SPEED ACTIVE WAYPOINT
GROUND SPEED ESTIMATED TIME
GS 351 TAS 338 IAN01 OF ARRIVAL
WIND SPEED AND ANGLE o
336 /15 TRK 140 MAG 0838.4z
32.5 NM ACTIVE WAYPOINT
WIND POINTER DISTANCE
T/D
ALTITUDE PROFILE POINT

MERRY
ACTIVE ROUTE
RANGE TO ALTITUDE ARC 40 ACTIVE WAYPOINT
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT
VERTICAL DEVIATION
NUMERIC
TRACK LINE IAN01 43 VERTICAL PATH
21000
RNP
DEVIATION LIMITS
400 VERTICAL RNP
ANP
CURVED TREND VECTOR 60 VERTICAL DEVIATION
POINTER
AIRPLANE SYMBOL VERTICAL ANP
14.6 L
VOR 1 VOR 2 VERTICAL DEVIATION
116.00 RNP ANP ELN SCALE
DME 35.1 FMC L 1.00 0.04 DME 28.5
34-61-00-048.003
MAP SOURCE LATERAL RNP LATERAL ANP LATERAL PATH DEVIATION
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - MAP DISPLAY
34-61-00
- 317 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - VSD INTRODUCTION
General
The vertical situation display (VSD) shows a side view

of the airplane and the ground below the the current
airplane track. The VSD is provided to enhance the
flight crew's situational awareness. It is not intended
to be a control display.
The lower 35% of the MAP display is used for the VSD and
the upper display area shows the centered MAP display.
VSD is selected by first selecting MAP as the display
mode and then pushing the DATA pushbutton on the EFIS
control panel.
This is the data that can be displayed on the VSD:
- Airplane altitude
- Vertical flight path vector
- Selected vertical speed
- Selected altitude
- Waypoints
- Waypoint altitude constraints
- Destination runway
- VNAV final descent angle
- Terrain data.
34-61-00-103.fm
34-61-00
- 318 -

GS 237 TAS 237 CF13R

058 o /24 TRK 130 MAG Z
1.0 NM
13R
10 NOLLA
DECEL
CF13R
PAE
1100
2000 CF13R NOLLA RW13R
2200 50
8000
4000
0
0 10 20
FMC
34-61-00-103.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - VSD INTRODUCTION
34-61-00
- 319 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - VSD - MAP DISPLAY
General 3000 feet above field elevation and is within 6
nautical miles of the runway.
The upper portion of the MAP/vertical situation display
(VSD) shows some specific symbols and data. These
symbols and data show this data:
- Runway symbol
- Runway identifier
- Missed approach waypoint
- Active route
- Active waypoint
- Approach swath.
Display Data
The runway display represents the lateral position and

the runway identifier. The runway symbol and identifier
are white in color.
The missed approach waypoint is represented by a dot on

the airplane track line. It is white in color.
The active route is represented with a magenta line and

the active waypoint is magenta in color as is the
active waypoint identifier in the top right corner of
the display.
The approach swath shows the area of the ground below

the airplane on the lower VSD display. They show as
dashed lines that are cyan in color. The distance
34-61-00-104.fm
between the two lines is the current required
navigation performance (RNP). The swath lines are
removed from the display when the airplane is below
34-61-00
- 320 -

GS 237 TAS 237 CF13R

o
058 /24 TRK 130 MAG Z
1.0 NM
13R RUNWAY IDENTIFIER
RUNWAY
APPROACH SWATH
MISSED APPROACH
WAYPOINT 10 NOLLA
DECEL
ACTIVE WAYPOINT
ACTIVE ROUTE
CF13R
PAE
1100
2000 CF13R NOLLA

2200
RW13R
50
34-61-00-104.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - VSD - MAP DISPLAY
34-61-00
- 321 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY
34-61-00-105.fm
34-61-00
- 322 -

General is 4000 feet and above a range of 80NM, the interval is
8000 feet.
The lower portion of the combined MAP/vertical
situation display (VSD) shows many different symbols Normally, the background color of the altitude tape is
and data. These are the symbols and data that is shown: gray. However, if QFE has been selected on the FMCS
takeoff or approach reference pages, then the tape
- Altitude reference tape background color is green.
- MCP selected altitude displays
- Minimum descent altitude displays MCP Selected Altitude Displays
- Horizontal reference scale
- Airplane symbol The pilot uses the DFCS mode control panel to set the
- Vertical flight path vector selected altitude which will be represented by a bug on
- MCP selected vertical speed line the VSD altitude reference tape and a digital readout
- Range to target speed display of the selected altitude above the tape. The MCP
- Terrain profile display selected altitude line represents the MCP selected
- Waypoint display altitude across the VSD display. Both the bug, the
- Runway display digital readout and the dashed line are magenta in
- Reference approach angle display color.
- Decision gate display.
When the selected altitude is off scale, only half the
Altitude Reference Tape bug shows at the top or bottom of the altitude tape.
With the bug "parked", the dashed line is not
The altitude reference tape shows the barometric displayed.
altitude from the air data reference section of the
onside ADIRU on a moving scale. The scale has major and Minimum Descent Altitude Display
minor tick marks with numbers placed at the major tick
marks. The barometric minimums (minimum descent altitude)
setting is selected from the onside EFIS control panel.
The altitude range shown will depend on the display The bug and the line point to the selected barometric
selected on the EFIS control panel. With a range set to minimum value on the altitude reference tape. They are
34-61-00-105.fm
10NM or less, the altitude interval is 1000 feet. At green in color. Barometric minimums can be set from -
20NM, the interval is 2000 feet. At 40NM, the interval 100 feet to a maximum of 15000 feet in 1 foot
increments.
34-61-00
- 323 -
When the airplane descends to the barometric minimums and minor tick marks with numbers placed at the major
altitude, the minimums bug and line will flash amber in tick marks.
color for three seconds and then remain on steady amber
until reset. Airplane Symbol
The barometric minimums alert can be reset by one of The airplane symbol is represented by a right angled
the following: triangle as viewed from the right side. The top side of
the triangle represents a 3 degree glide path angle for
- The airplane climbing above the minimums value EFIS control panel ranges of 5 - 40NM. The point
- Selecting the reset (RST) button on the EFIS represents the actual airplane position and the bottom
control panel represents the actual altitude. It is white in color.
- The airplane landing.
The symbol moves vertically but not horizontally and it
The barometric minimums display can be blanked by one will park at the limits of the display.
of the following:
Vertical Flight Path Vector
- Selecting the (RST) button on the EFIS control
panel while the switch is set to BARO minimums The vertical flight path vector represents the vertical
- Selecting radio minimums on the EFIS control panel path of the airplane. It is a fixed length, straight
to make the BARO minimums digital value blank; the line and rotates about the point of the airplane
BARO minimums bug stays in view. symbol. It is white in color.
- Selecting BARO minimums of -100 feet or greater.
MCP Selected Vertical Speed Line
NOTE: The line dashes for both MCP selected altitude
and minimum descent altitude are staggered so The MCP selected vertical speed line represents the
that when they are set to the same altitude, they selected speed as a target angle when V/S mode is
form a line of alternating magenta and green engaged on the MCP. It is a dashed line and is magenta
dashes. in color.
Horizontal Reference Scale Range to Target Speed Display
34-61-00-105.fm
The range displayed on the VSD is half of the range The range to target speed dot represents the point at
selected on the EFIS control panel. The scale has major which the airplane will reach the FMC or MCP target
34-61-00
- 324 -

airspeed. The dot is green in color and may be filled for the waypoint will be represented by small triangles
or unfilled. It is displayed for all phases of flight. on the dashed line with the constraint numbers
positioned below the waypoint identifier. The dashed
If the airspeed is within 5 knots of the target lines, altitude constraints and identifiers are
airspeed the dot will be removed from the display. If displayed in either magenta or white.
the target airspeed is more than 10 knots greater than
current airspeed the dot will be filled and is Runway Display
displayed along the flight path vector line.
The runway symbol represents the lateral position,
If the target airspeed will not be achieved within the runway identifier and altitude on the VSD. The runway
length of the flight path vector line or within the identifier and altitude are displayed at the top of the
display area, it will be displayed at the end of the VSD with a dashed vertical line drawn to the runway
flight path vector line and will be unfilled. threshold. The identifier, altitude, dashed line and
runway symbol are white in color.
Terrain Profile
Reference Approach Angle
The terrain profile represents a side view of the
terrain below and forward of the airplane's flight The reference approach angle is provided to give the
path. The terrain profile line is colored in green, flight crew additional situation awareness during the
amber and red to match the color coding used for the final approach.
terrain display on the MAP display.
When an FMCS generated glide path angle is available,
Waypoint Display it is represented by a solid magenta line and will
extend 10NM. It terminates at the missed approach
Waypoints that fall within the limits of the VSD are waypoint (50 feet above the landing threshold).
displayed along the airplane flight path. A maximum of
5 waypoints can be displayed at one time. The active When an FMCS generated flight path angle is not
waypoint is displayed in magenta and subsequent available, a default 3 degree angle path is displayed.
waypoints are displayed in white. It terminates 1040 feet from the runway threshold. It
is a dashed line and is cyan in color.
34-61-00-105.fm
The waypoint identifier is displayed at the top of the
VSD with a dashed vertical line to represent the
lateral position of the waypoint. Altitude constraints
34-61-00
- 325 -
Glideslope Intercept Waypoint
The glideslope intercept waypoint represents the

precise point at which the airplane will intercept the
glideslope. It is magenta or white in color depending
whether it is active or inactive.
Decision Gates
The decision gates represent points along the FMCS

final approach glide path or the reference 3 degree
line that correspond to 500 feet and 1000 feet above
runway elevation. The 1000 feet decision gate is white
in color and the 500 feet decision gate is amber in
color.
34-61-00-105.fm
34-61-00
- 326 -

RANGE TO TARGET VERTICAL FLIGHT WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER

SPEED PATH VECTOR AND ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT RUNWAY IDENTIFIER
AND ALTITUDE
MCP SELECTED MINIMUM DESCENT
ALTITUDE ALTITUDE LINE
2000 CF13R NOLLA RW13R G/S INTERCEPT POINT
2200 50 MCP SELECTED
MINIMUM DESCENT GS VERTICAL SPEED
ALTITUDE BUG
WAYPOINT ALTITUDE
8000 CONSTRAINT
REFERENCE APPROACH
AIRPLANE SYMBOL ANGLE
4000 MCP SELECTED

ALTITUDE LINE
MCP SELECTED RUNWAY SYMBOL
ALTITUDE BUG
0 TERRAIN PROFILE
ALTITUDE REFERENCE
0 10 20
HORIZONTAL RANGE
SCALE SCALE
1000 FEET DECISION 500 FEET DECISION

GATE GATE
34-61-00-105.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY
34-61-00
- 327 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - VSD FAILURE INDICATIONS
General
These are the flags that can be displayed on the

vertical situation display (VSD):
- VSD
- VSD TERR
- RWY DATA
- MOD RTE.
The VSD flag is displayed when the data necessary to

format the VSD is not available. It is amber in color.
The VSD TERR flag is displayed when EGPWS data is not

being received by CDS. It is amber in color. The flag
will also appear for these conditions:
- EGPWS geometric altitude failure

- If the indications TERR FAIL or TERR POS are set.
The VSD TERR INHIBIT flag is displayed when the Terrain

Inhibit switch on the GPWS module is set to INHIBIT.
The RWY DATA flag is displayed when the runway/approach

data is not received from the FMCS. It will also appear
if the origin/destination runway has not been selected.
It is amber in color.
The MOD RTE flag is displayed when the FMCS active

route is being modified. It is white in color. Only the
34-61-00-106.fm
first waypoint is displayed during the modification.
34-61-00
- 328 -

2000
8000
VSD
4000
0 VSD TERR
0 10 20
VSD FAILURE VSD TERRAIN FAILURE
2000
8000
4000
0 VSD TERR INHIBIT

0 10 20
VSD TERRAIN INHIBIT
2000 2000 CF13R MOD RTE
8000 8000
4000 4000
34-61-00-106.fm
0 RWY DATA 0
0 10 20 0 10 20
RUNWAY DATA FAILURE MOD RTE FLAG
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - VSD FAILURE INDICATIONS
34-61-00
- 329 -
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - PLAN DISPLAY
General Display Data
The FMCS provides the navigation data for the PLAN mode Ground speed, wind data, and true airspeed show the
displays on the common display system (CDS). There are same as for the APP, VOR, and MAP modes except that the
two types of navigation data, dynamic data and wind direction arrow does not show.
background data. Dynamic data changes as a function of
time. Background data is stationary data that does not This data shows in the upper right corner:
move as a function of time.
- Active waypoint identifier
The FMCS formats and transmits the data on FMC bus 08 - Estimated time of arrival at the active waypoint
and FMC bus 09. This data is to accurately show the - Distance to the waypoint.
airplane position with respect to the flight plan and
vertical profile. The CDS controls symbol color, size, Only TCAS traffic data messages show in the plan mode.
and brightness. TCAS mode/status information shows in the lower left
corner.
Plan Mode
Symbol Definitions
The plan mode shows NORTH UP. The crew uses the plan
mode with the FMC/CDU LEGS page and the STEP line This data shows:
select key to review the route. The plan mode display
is a static display. - Distance to go to the active waypoint (white)
- Estimated time of arrival for the active waypoint
Range information shows as circles around the reference (white)
point that is in the middle of the display. - Active waypoint (next waypoint in active route)
(magenta)
The airplane symbol shows the current position and - Waypoints other than the active waypoint in the
track if the airplane is in the range of the flight active route (white)
plan shown. - Options selected on the EFIS control panel (cyan)
- Source of the dynamic and background data (green).
34-61-00-095.fm
34-61-00
- 330 - Config #

GROUND
SPEED GS 351 TAS 338 CHN ACTIVE
N
336o/15 0838.4z WAYPOINT ETA
WIND DATA 80 5.8NM
ACTIVE
INACTIVE WAYPOINT
WAYPOINTS DISTANCE
SOTON
40
ACTIVE
WAYPOINT
MAP
W E
CHN AIRPLANE
OPTIONS ARPT SYMBOL
WPT
STA
40
MHN
TCAS MODE/STATUS
INFORMATION TA ONLY
MAP SOURCE 80
FMC L S
34-61-00-095.fm PLAN MODE
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - PLAN DISPLAY
34-61-00
- 331 - Config #
FMCS -- DISPLAYS - CDS - NON-NORMAL DISPLAYS
General The MAP flag shows if the map data from the FMC is
invalid or NCD. All map data is blanked in this
These non-normal messages can show: condition.
- UNABLE REQD NAV PERF - RNP The VTK (vertical track) flag shows when the vertical
- FMC DISAGREE deviation data from the FMC is invalid or NCD. Only the
- MAP RANGE DISAGREE. vertical deviation scale is blanked in this condition.
These non-normal flags can show: All these non-normal messages and flags can show in the
map and plan modes. They are amber.
- MAP flag
- Vertical track (VTK).
The UNABLE REQD NAV PERF - RNP message shows when the
actual navigation performance (ANP) exceeds the
required navigation performance (RNP) for the current
flight environment. The map data is not blanked in this
condition.
The FMC DISAGREE message shows when there is a data

miscompare between the two FMCs in approach or on the
ground. The message is amber in color.
NOTE: If both the UNABLE REQD NAV PERF - RNP and FMC
DISAGREE messages are active at the same time,
they will show on two independent lines on the
display.
The MAP RANGE DISAGREE message shows when a new range

has been selected on the EFIS control panel and new map
34-61-00-097.fm
data is not received from the FMC. All map data is
blanked in this condition.
34-61-00
- 332 - Config #

GS 351 TAS 338 CHN GS 351 TAS 338

336o/15 TRK 140 MAG 0838.4z 336o/15 TRK 140 MAG
32.5 NM
MARK
DECEL
IAN DOT
FMC DISAGREE
UNABLE REQD NAV PERF-RNP
AMY26
40 MAP RANGE DISAGREE
T/D
MAP
CHN 2100
ARPT
WPT
STA KJAN
V
T
K
BREN
FMC L FMC L
EXPANDED MAP MODE EXPANDED MAP MODE
34-61-00-097.fm
FMCS - DISPLAYS - CDS - NON-NORMAL DISPLAYS
34-61-00
- 333 - Config #
FMCS -- VNAV - SPEED INTERVENTION
General
The speed intervention function lets the flight crew

change the FMC target airspeed without having to
disengage VNAV.
Speed Intervention
The flight crew enable speed intervention by pushing

the speed intervention pushbutton on the DFCS mode
control panel (MCP). The current FMC target airspeed
now shows in the MCP speed window and the pilot can
change the target speed to the desired value and use
the MCP speed selector.
The FMC now uses the entered target airspeed instead of

its own calculated value and the active flight plan is
not affected. The new selected airspeed shows on the
IAS/MACH display and the applicable CLB/CRZ/DES page on
the MCDUs.
Speed intervention is exited when you push the speed

intervention pushbutton again and the FMC now reverts
to its own calculated target airspeed. The MCP speed
window is blank again. Disengaging VNAV also disables
speed intervention.
NOTE: If the FMC is flying a path descent (VNAV PATH)

and speed intervention is selected, the FMC
changes to a speed descent (VNAV SPD).
34-61-00-071.fm
34-61-00
- 334 -

IAS/MACH V NAV IAS/MACH V NAV

ACT ECON CRZ ACT ECON CRZ
C/O CRZ ALT C/O CRZ ALT
SPD FL290 SPD FL290
INTV INTV
SPEED LVL CHG

TGT SPD SPEED LVL CHG
TGT SPD
310 310
MCP CDU MCP CDU
1 - VNAV ACTIVE SO FMC TARGET SPEED 2 - PUSH SPEED INTERVENTION PUSHBUTTON AND
DOES NOT SHOW IN IAS/MACH DISPLAY. FMC TARGET SPEED SHOWS IN IAS/MACH DISPLAY.
IAS/MACH V NAV IAS/MACH V NAV

ACT ECON CRZ ACT ECON CRZ
C/O CRZ ALT C/O CRZ ALT
SPD FL290 SPD FL290
INTV INTV
TGT SPD TGT SPD

SPEED LVL CHG SPEED LVL CHG
330/MCP 310
MCP CDU MCP CDU
3 - TURN IAS/MACH SELECTOR TO SELECT 4 - PUSH SPEED INTERVENTION PUSHBUTTON TO
34-61-00-071.fm
NEW FMC SPEED. NEW SPEED SHOWS ON CDU. RETURN TO ORIGINAL FMC TARGET SPEED.
FMCS - VNAV - SPEED INTERVENTION
34-61-00
- 335 -
FMCS -- VNAV - ALTITUDE INTERVENTION
34-61-00-089.fm
34-61-00
- 336 -

General Increase Cruise Altitude during Climb
The altitude intervention function allows the flight During the climb or cruise phases of the flight, the
crew to do these operations without having to disengage flight crew can increase the cruise altitude by setting
VNAV: the higher altitude in the MCP and pressing the
altitude intervention pushbutton. In order to do this
- Delete the next altitude constraint (climb or in the climb, there must be no altitude constraints in
descent) the climb phase.
- Increase the cruise altitude while in the climb
phase If the selected altitude is above the maximum allowable
- Resume a climb or descent after holding an MCP cruise altitude, the use of the altitude intervention
altitude pushbutton does not change the cruise altitude and the
- Cruise climb/descent transition. message MAX ALT FLXXX shows in the MCDU scratchpad.
Altitude Constraint Deletion NOTE: Cruise altitude can not be decreased using
altitude intervention.
During a climb or a descent, the next altitude
constraint may be deleted by setting the DFCS mode Resuming Climb/Descent
control panel (MCP) altitude above/below the next
altitude constraint in the flight plan and pressing the During a hold of the selected MCP altitude, the flight
altitude intervention pushbutton. The airplane will now crew can resume the climb/descent by setting the new
climb/descend to the MCP selected altitude. Up to a altitude in the MCP and pressing the altitude
maximum of eight altitude constraints can be deleted intervention pushbutton.
using the altitude intervention pushbutton.
Cruise Climb/Descent Transition
During a descent, if the MCP altitude is set to or
above the end of descent (E/D) altitude, the airplane During the cruise phase of the flight, the flight crew
will descend at 1000 feet/minute until it gets to the can select a cruise climb to a higher altitude by
altitude from where it can make the planned VNAV PATH setting the new altitude on the MCP and pressing the
descent. If the MCP altitude is set to below the E/D altitude intervention pushbutton.
34-61-00-089.fm
altitude, the airplane will descend in VNAV SPD mode.
Also, the flight crew can select a lower altitude on
the MCP and pressing the altitude intervention
34-61-00
- 337 -
pushbutton will initiate a transition to descent to the
selected altitude.
34-61-00-089.fm
34-61-00
- 338 -

ALTITUDE ALTITUDE ALTITUDE ALTITUDE
ALT ALT ALT ALT

SEL INTV SEL INTV SEL INTV SEL INTV
ALT HLD V/S ALT HLD V/S ALT HLD V/S ALT HLD V/S
MCP ALTITUDE SET MCP ALTITUDE SET TO MCP ALTITUDE SET TO PUSH ALTITUDE
TO 5000 FEET FMC ALT 9000 FEET E/D ALT 2200 FEET INTERVENTION PUSHBUTTON
TWO TIMES
T/C 9000 FEET T/D
KPAE
5000 FEET
LACRE
NOLLA
E/D
2200 FEET
34-61-00-089.fm
FMCS - VNAV - ALTITUDE INTERVENTION
34-61-00
- 339 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMC DATA LOADING
General - Set the data loader 3-position switch to the FMC
you will load (the L position will load FMC 1 and
You use the airborne data loader (ADL) to load data the R position will load FMC 2)
into the FMCS and other airplane systems. The steps to - Set the data load selector to the FMC position
load data into the FMCS and the other systems are - Open the data loader access door
similar. - Put the necessary diskette into the ADL.
To load data into the FMCS, you set the data loader NOTE: The FMC source select switch on the P5 panel must
control panel selector to the FMC position. This be set in the BOTH ON L or NORMAL positions to
connects the loader to the primary FMC. see the load progress on the MCDUs if FMC 1 is
loaded. If the 3-position switch is in the R
You can load these databases into the FMCS: position, the FMC source select switch must be
set to BOTH ON R to see the load progress on the
- Operational flight program (OFP) MCDUs.
- Navigation data base
- Performance default data base The CDUs automatically go to the FMCS DATALOAD page
- Airplane model/engine performance data base when the CDU receives valid data from the loader.
- ACARS data link data base
- Software options data base. The data load process is automatic. When the data
loader 3-position switch is set to the L position, the
NOTE: The performance default data base is part of the data loads into FMC 1. You then do a crossload and load
OFP and cannot be loaded seperately. the data into FMC 2 via the FMCS inter system bus.
Preparation Return the data loader control panel to the NORM

position after the transfer is complete.
The information below shows the steps to load a
navigation data base. The procedure to load the other NOTE: Do not interrupt electrical power to the system
systems data or the other FMCS data is similar. during software loading. If power is interrupted,
you will need to do the software load procedure
This is a summary of the steps to load data with an ADL: again.
34-61-00-049.fm
- Airplane must be on the ground
- Apply electrical power to the airplane
34-61-00
- 340 -

DATA LOAD SELECTOR

C
SINGLE SYS
L R
CAPT F/O
UPR LWR
SYSTEM SELECT
NORMAL
FMC
CDU
DATA LOADER
DATA LOADER DATA LOADER
CONTROL PANEL
P18-2 CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL
INTER
SYSTEM
BUS
FMC 1
34-61-00-049.fm
FMC 2
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMC DATA LOADING
34-61-00
- 341 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU DATA LOADING
General Return the data loader selector to the NORM position
after the transfer is complete.
You use the airborne data loader (ADL) to load the
operational program software (OPS) into the CDUs. NOTE: Do not interrupt electrical power to the system
during software loading. If power is interrupted,
To load the OPS into the CDUs, set the data loader you will need to do the software load procedure
selector to the CDU position and the data loader 3- again.
position switch to the L or R position depending on
which CDU is to be loaded. This connects the loader to
the CDU being loaded.
Preparation
This is a summary of the steps to load the OPS with an

ADL:
- Airplane must be on the ground

- Apply electrical power to the airplane
- Set the data loader selector to the CDU position
- Set the data loader 3-position switch to the CDU
you will load (the L position loads CDU 1 and the R
position loads CDU 2)
- Open the data loader access door
- Put the CDU OPS software diskette into the ADL.
The CDUs show the DATA LOADER page when the CDU
receives valid data from the loader.
The data load process is automatic. When the CDU shows

the message LOAD COMPLETE, remove the diskette from the
34-61-00-092.fm
ADL and perform the applicable software verification
procedure.
34-61-00
- 342 -

DATA LOAD SELECTOR

C
SINGLE SYS
L R
CAPT F/O
UPR LWR
SYSTEM SELECT
NORMAL
FMC
CDU
DATA LOADER DATA LOADER DATA LOADER

CONTROL PANEL
P18-2 CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL
34-61-00-092.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU DATA LOADING
34-61-00
- 343 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - DATABASE LOAD
Load - RESET COUNT EXCEEDED (five load attempts have
failed)
After you put the diskette into the loader, the load - DB-OFP INCOMPATIBLE (the data on the disk does not
process is automatic. Except to change diskettes, no compare with the FMC operational program)
further operation is necessary. - CHECK MEDIA (part of the data on the disk cannot be
read by the loader)
CURRENT RECORD shows the number of data base records - INCORRECT DISK INSERTED (the diskette does not
that are loaded into the FMC data base memory. TOTAL compare with the diskette you used before).
RECORDS show the total number of records to be loaded
into the FMC data base memory.
During the loading process, the message LOAD IN

PROGRESS shows. INSERT NEXT DISK shows during multi-
disk data base load.
The load is complete when LOAD COMPLETE shows on the

CDU. Push the eject button on the loader to remove the
diskette.
Load Failure Indications
If the loader finds a problem, a message shows on the

data loader display and DATA LOAD INOP shows on the
CDUs.
If the FMC finds a problem with the data from the

loader, the CDU shows one of these messages:
- CHECK DBL OR INTERFACE (there is a problem that the

FMCS cannot isolate to the FMC or the loader)
34-61-00-050.fm
- DB EXCEEDS FMC (the data on the disk is too large
for FMC memory)
34-61-00
- 344 -

FMCS DATA LOADER FMCS DATA LOADER FMCS DATA LOADER

CURRENT RECORD XXXX CURRENT RECORD XXXX CURRENT RECORD XXXX
TOTAL RECORDS XXXX TOTAL RECORDS XXXX TOTAL RECORDS XXXX
----LOAD IN PROGRESS---- ----LOAD COMPLETE------- ----LOAD FAILURE--------
D A T A L O A D I N O P
OR C H E C K D B L O R I N T E R F A C E
NDB LOADING NDB LOADED NDB FAIL
NORMAL LOAD INDICATION LOAD FAILURE
FMCS DATA LOADER FMCS DATA LOADER FMCS DATA LOADER

CURRENT RECORD XXXX CURRENT RECORD XXXX CURRENT RECORD XXXX
TOTAL RECORDS XXXX TOTAL RECORDS XXXX TOTAL RECORDS XXXX
----LOAD IN PROGRESS---- ----LOAD COMPLETE------- ----LOAD FAILURE--------
D A T A L O A D I N O P
OR C H E C K D B L O R I N T E R F A C E
SW OPTIONS LOADING SW OPTIONS LOADED SW OPTIONS LOADED

MODEL/E NG MODEL/E NG LOADED MODEL/E NG FAIL
34-61-00-050.fm
NORMAL LOAD INDICATION LOAD FAILURE
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - DATABASE LOAD
34-61-00
- 345 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - OFP CROSSLOAD PAGE
34-61-00-076.fm
34-61-00
- 346 -

General - CROSSLOAD FMC-R TO FMC-L
- CROSSLOAD IN PROGRESS
The OFP CROSSLOAD page lets you review and, if - CROSSLOAD COMPLETE
necessary, transfer the operational flight program - CROSSLOAD FAIL (the data base in the source FMC did
(OFP) between the primary and secondary FMCs. not crossload to the target FMC)
- CROSSLOAD UNAVAILABLE (the source FMC can not
Page Access interface with the other FMC)
- SET FMC SOURCE SELECT TO BOTH ON R (shows when the
This page shows for any of these conditions: primary FMC is also the target FMC).
- If, during ground power-up, the primary FMC finds To start the crossload, select COPY FROM LEFT or COPY
a mismatch between its valid OFP and that of the FROM RIGHT on the MCDU and push the EXEC key. The
secondary FMC message CROSSLOAD IN PROGRESS shows during the
- An OFP with a different update version is loaded crossload process. When the crossload is complete, the
into one FMC message, CROSSLOAD COMPLETE shows on the MCDU.
- Selection of the CROSSLOAD prompt on the FMCS BITE
INDEX page if there is an OFP mismatch currently. Line 6L shows one of these prompts:
If there is no mismatch between the OFPs but there is - INDEX (selects the FMCS BITE INDEX page)
an analog discrete mismatch, the ANALOG DISCRETE page - CANCEL (shows when the source FMC for the
shows with the specific mismatch highlighted. crossload has been selected but the EXEC key has
not been pressed)
OFP Crossload Page Information - NEXT MISMATCH.
Lines 1L and 1R show the OFP software part numbers for The NEXT MISMATCH prompt shows the specified ANALOG
the left and right FMCs if there is an OFP mismatch. If DISCRETE page if there is a discrete mismatch currently
there is no mismatch these data fields are blank. or the DATABASE CROSSLOAD page if there is not a
discrete mismatch but there is a data base mismatch.
Lines 5L and 5R show the crossload status. These
messages may show: If there are no more mismatches between the FMCs, the
34-61-00-076.fm
INDEX prompt shows.
- COPY FROM <LEFT/RIGHT>
- CROSSLOAD FMC-L TO FMC-R This line is blank while the crossload is in progress.
34-61-00
- 347 -
NOTE: The example on the graphic shows a mismatch
between the OFPs and also the position of the
right ECS pack switch and a navigation data base
mismatch between the FMCs.
34-61-00-076.fm
34-61-00
- 348 -

OP PROGRAM CROSSLOAD 1 / 1 OP PROGRAM CROSS LO AD 1 / 1

L E F T R I G H T L E F T R I G H T
549849-001 549250-005 5498 49-001 549 25 0- 0 05
EXEC
C O P Y F R O M C O P Y F R O M
<LEFT RIGHT> CROS SLOAD FMC-L TO FMC -R
<INDEX <CAN CEL
OP PROG RAM C RO S S LO AD 1 / 1 OP PR O G R AM C R O S S LO A D 1 / 1 OP PRO GRA M CROSSLOAD 1 / 1

L E F T R I G H T L E F T R I G H T L E F T R I G H T
5 4 98 4 9 - 0 0 1 5 4 9 25 0- 0 05 549849-001 5 4 9 84 9 - 0 0 1 549849- 001 549250-005
OR
CR O S S L O A D IN P R OG RE S S CRO S S L OAD C O M P LE T E C R O S S LO A D FAIL
<NEXT M I S MAT C H <INDEX
FMC-L ANALOG DISC 1 / 4 DATABASE CROSSLOAD 1 / 1

L E F T R I G H T L E F T N A V D A T A R I G H T
E C S P A C K O N O F F TBC120010P TBC6820551
E C S P A C K H / L L O H I
I S O L V A L V E O P
C O W L A / I C E O F F O N
W I N G A / I C E O F F
O L E O S W I T C H A I R OR
34-61-00-076.fm
<LEFT RIGHT>
< IN D E X <INDEX
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - OFP CROSSLOAD PAGE
34-61-00
- 349 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - DATABASE CROSSLOAD PAGE
34-61-00-052.fm
34-61-00
- 350 -

General Data Base Crossload Page Information
The database crossload page lets you review and, if Lines 1L through 4L show the data fields for the
necessary, transfer data bases between the FMCs. individual data bases. If there are no mismatches, the
data fields are blank.
These are the applicable data bases:
Lines 5L and 5R show the crossload status. These
- Model/engine messages may show:
- Navigation
- Performance defaults - COPY FROM <LEFT/RIGHT>
- QRH T/O speeds - CROSSLOAD FMC-L TO FMC-R
- ACARS datalink - CROSSLOAD FMC-R TO FMC-L
- Software options. - CROSSLOAD IN PROGRESS
- CROSSLOAD COMPLETE
Page Access - CROSSLOAD FAIL (the data base in the source FMC did
not crossload to the target FMC)
This page shows for any of these conditions: - CROSSLOAD UNAVAILABLE (the source FMC cannot
interface with the other FMC)
- During ground power-up, if there is a data base - SET FMC SOURCE SELECT TO BOTH ON R (shown when the
mismatch between the primary and secondary FMCs primary FMC is also the target FMC).
- Data base with a different update version is
loaded into one FMC To start the crossload, select COPY FROM LEFT or COPY
- Selection of the CROSSLOAD prompt on the FMCS BITE FROM RIGHT on the MCDU and push the EXEC key. The
INDEX page if there is a data base mismatch. message, CROSSLOAD IN PROGRESS shows during the
crossload process. At the end of the crossload, the
NOTE: The data base crossload page shows if there is message, CROSSLOAD COMPLETE shows on the MCDU.
not an OFP mismatch or an analog discrete
mismatch between the FMCs. These have higher Line 6L shows one of these prompts:
priority than the data base crossload pages.
- INDEX - selects the FMCS BITE INDEX page
34-61-00-052.fm
- CANCEL - shows when the source FMC for the
crossload is selected but the EXEC key was not
pushed
34-61-00
- 351 -
- NEXT MISMATCH - shows when there is another data
base that has a mismatch.
If there are no more mismatches between the FMCs, the

INDEX prompt shows.
This line is blank while the crossload is in progress.
NOTE: The example on the graphic shows a mismatch

between the navigation data bases of the two
FMCs.
34-61-00-052.fm
34-61-00
- 352 -

DATA BASE CROSSLO AD 1 / 1 D A T A B A S E C R O S SL O AD 1 / 1

L E F T N A V D A T A R I G H T L E F T N A V DA T A R I G H T
TB C120 010P TBC6 820551 TBC120010 P T BC 6 82 0 5 5 1
EXEC
<LEFT RIGHT> CROSSLOAD FM C- L T O FMC-R
<I NDEX <CANCEL
D ATABASE CROSSLOAD 1 / 1 D A TA BA S E C R O S S LO AD 1 / 1 DATABASE CROSSLOAD 1 / 1

L E F T N A V D A T A R I G H T L E F T N AV D A T A R I G H T L E F T N A V D A T A R I G H T
TBC 120010P TBC6820551 T BC 1 20 01 0 P T B C1 20 0 10 P TB C120010P TBC682 0551
OR
C ROSSLOAD IN PROGRESS C RO S SLO A D C OM PL E TE CROSSLOAD FAIL
<NE XT MI S MAT C H <I NDEX
34-61-00-052.fm
CROSSLOAD IN PROGRESS CROSSLOAD COMPLETE CROSSLOAD FAILURE
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - DATABASE CROSSLOAD PAGE
34-61-00
- 353 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMC DOWNLOAD
General
The FMCS lets maintenace personnel download diagnostic

engineering data to specially formatted diskettes.
Page Access
Access to the VERIFY page is from the MAINT BITE INDEX

page.
Download Pages
The VERIFY page shows the steps necessary for a file

system download.
The INSERT DISK page starts the download process after

you insert a suitable disk into the data loader. When
the disk has been inserted, the download starts
automatically.
The DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS page shows the download

progress. It shows as a percentage.
The DOWNLOAD COMPLETE page shows when the download is

complete.
The DISK ERROR page shows if an operational flight

program (OFP) disk or a data base disk is inserted in
the data loader.
34-61-00-102.fm
The DISK UNUSABLE page shows if an unformatted disk is
inserted in the data loader.
34-61-00
- 354 -

F MCS D A TA LOA DE R F M CS D A T A L O A D E R F MCS D A TA L O AD E R

V E R I FY T H E F OL L O W I N G FM C F ILE SYSTE M FM C F I LE S Y S TE M
DATALOA D ER I S POWE R E D DOWNLO A D U TILI T Y DOWNLO A D U TILI T Y
NO DISK IN D A TALOA D E R
S E L E C T S O U RC E F M C O N INSERT I NTO DATA L O A DE R D O W N L O A D IN P RO G R ES S
D A T A L O A D SE L EC T P A N EL D I S K FO R M A TT E D B Y T HE FI L EN AM . TYP
F M C P R E P PC U TILI T Y
XX % C O M P L E T E
OR
P RES S HERE TO EXI T >
<INDEX C O N T I N UE >
VERIFY PAGE INSERT DISK PAGE IN PROGRESS PAGE
F M CS D A TA L O ADE R F M CS D A T A L O AD E R FM CS D A TA L O A D ER
FM C F I LE S Y S TE M F MC F I L E S Y ST E M FM C F I LE S Y S T EM
DO W N LO A D U T I LI T Y D O WN L O A D U T I LI T Y DO WN L O A D U T I L I TY
D OW N L O A D CO M PL ET E W A R N I N G : D I S K U NU S A B L E W A R NI NG : D ISK U N U SA B L E
O F P OR D B D I S K I NSE R TE D F O R MA T D I S K U S I N G T H E
F MC PR E P PC U T I L IT Y
RE M OV E DIS K T H E N RE M O V E DI S K RE MO V E DIS K T H EN
P RESS H E RE T O EX I T > P RE SS H E RE T O E XI T >
34-61-00-102.fm
DOWNLOAD COMPLETE PAGE DISK ERROR PAGE DISK UNUSABLE PAGE
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMC DOWNLOAD
34-61-00
- 355 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - INTRODUCTION
34-61-00-054.002
34-61-00
- 356 -

General CDU TEST
The FMCS has BITE functions for maintenance and test of The MCDU test page shows the tests for the MCDU display
the system. The BITE is in the FMC. You operate the and keyboard.
BITE with the MCDUs.
SENSORS
The BITE functions continuously monitor the status of
the FMC and MCDU. The functions also continuously The sensor status pages show the status of all the
monitor the status of airplane sensor systems that sensors that send data to the FMC selected as the BITE
interface with the FMCS. The monitors operate at all source.
times. This includes power-up.
DISCRETES
These are the BITE functions:
These pages show the status of the analog discretes
- INFLT FAULTS that send data to the FMC selected as the BITE source.
- CDU TEST
- SENSORS FMCS - FIXED OUTPUTS
- DISCRETES
- FMCS - FIXED OUTPUTS This function shows the values of the FMCS outputs to
- MODEL/ENG the common display system (CDS) and the autoflight
- SW OPTIONS status annunciators (ASAs).
- PERF FACTR
- IRS MONITOR MODEL/ENG
- LCD CDU.
The model/engine configuration page shows the airplane
INFLT FAULTS and engine configuration. It also shows the engine
combustor type and the brake option selected.
The FMCs record their in-flight faults and in-flight
faults for the MCDUs and the LRUs they interface with. SW OPTIONS
They have storage capacity for nine flights. Also, the
34-61-00-054.002
FMCs record their ground faults and ground faults for The software option pages show the status of the
the MCDUs. options that are in the software options database.
34-61-00
- 357 -
PERF FACTOR
The performance factors page permits the display and

entry of performance factors to optimize airplane
performance for individual operators or airplane
characteristics.
IRS MONITOR
This page shows the ADIRU position error rate

calculated by the FMC.
LCD CDU
The LCD CDU page shows the MCDU BITE pages.
H/W CONFIG
This page shows the this FMCS data:
- Part number
- Serial number
- Elapsed time
- Processor speed.
34-61-00-054.002
34-61-00
- 358 -

FAULT 1
ISOLATION CURRENT STATUS OF FMCS INPUT SENSORS (ADIRU,
SENSORS DFCS, DME, ETC.)
INFLIGHT 2 INFLIGHT FAULTS GROUND FAULTS FLIGHT 01 FLIGHT 09

FAULT SELECT (G)
TEST AND
MONITOR CURRENT STATUS OF FMCS INPUT SENSORS (ADIRU,
SENSORS DFCS, DME, ETC.)
KEYBOARD TEST
CDU TEST
DISPLAY TEST
CURRENT STATUS OF ANALOG DISCRETE

DISCRETES INPUTS TO THE FMCS
FIXED FLIGHT DECK INSTRUMENT DATA

OUTPUTS
IRS MONITOR ADIRU DRIFT RATE
PERFORMANCE DRAG AND FUEL FLOW FACTORS

FACTOR
SOFTWARE SOFTWARE OPTION DATA BASE

OPTIONS
MODEL/ENGINE
CONFIG AIRPLANE MODEL AND ENGINE CONFIGURATION
LCD CDU DATA

AND TEST LCD CDU DATA AND TEST
34-61-00-054.002
H/W CONFIG HARDWARE CONFIGURATION DATA
1 ENGINEERING DATA AVAILABLE WITH ACCESS CODE 100 2 ENGINEERING DATA AVAILABLE WITH ACCESS CODE 300
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - INTRODUCTION
34-61-00
- 359 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - BITE ENTRY
34-61-00-055.002
34-61-00
- 360 -

General right CDU. In this configuration, sensor data can be
compared for both FMCs.
You use the MAINT> prompt (LSK 6R) on the INIT/REF
INDEX page to access the MAINT BITE INDEX page. If the BITE information from the FMC is not available,
or invalid, the caret (<) does not show. The message
The MAINT prompt only shows if both these are true: LEFT (or RIGHT) FMC BITE INOP shows.
- The airplane is on the ground The CROSSLOAD prompt lets you crossload the OFP or
- The groundspeed is less than 20 knots, as sensed by other data bases between FMCs.
the IR section of the ADIRU.
Select the CROSSLOAD prompt (LSK 6R) to start the
NOTE: In the air, NAV STATUS shows at LSK 6R on the process. The CDU shows the FMCS CROSSLOAD page. This
INIT/REF INDEX page. page has instructions for crossload of the applicable
data base between FMCs.
The MAINT BITE INDEX page shows these airplane sub-
systems: Primary/Secondary FMC Select
- FMCS The primary FMC provides the CDU display data. The
- DFCS arrow direction in the top left corner of the CDUs
- A/T shows which FMC is primary. You use the FMCS transfer
- ADIRS switch to select the primary FMC.
- CDS
- ENGINE In the example on the graphic, the arrow points to the
- APU left. This shows that FMC 1 is the primary FMC.
- FQIS.
When the FMC select switch on the P5 overhead panel is
There is a prompt for FMC DOWNLOAD at LSK 6R. in the NORMAL or BOTH-ON-LEFT position, FMC 1 is the
primary FMC. In the BOTH-ON-RIGHT position, FMC 2 is
On the FMCS BITE page, select either the left FMC (FMC the primary FMC.
1) or right FMC (FMC 2) to be the BITE data source.
34-61-00-055.002
FMCS BITE Pages
It is possible to select FMC 1 as the BITE data source
on the left CDU and FMC 2 as the BITE data source on the FMCS BITE page 1 has these FMC maintenance categories:
34-61-00
- 361 -
- INFLT FAULTS
- CDU TEST
- SENSORS
- DISCRETES
- FIXED OUTPUTS
- MODEL/ENG
- SW OPTIONS
- PERF FACTOR
- LCD CDU
- IRS MONITOR
FMCS BITE page 2 has only one FMC maintenance category.

It is H/W CONFIG.
FMC Download
The FMC DOWNLOAD prompt lets you copy FMC internal

diagnostic data to a 3.5-inch diskette without removal
of the FMC from the airplane. The data is downloaded to
the airborne data loader (ADL) to specially formatted
diskettes.
Select the FMC DOWNLOAD prompt (LSK 6R)to start the

process. The CDU shows the FMCS DATA LOADER page. This
page has instructions for the data download to the ADL.
The position of the FMC select switch determines which

FMC gives the download data.
34-61-00-055.002
34-61-00
- 362 -

INIT/REF INDEX 1 / 1 MAINT BITE INDEX 1 / 1
<IDENT NAV DATA> <FMCS ENGINES>

<POS <DFCS APU>
<PERF <A/T FQIS>
<TAKEOFF <ADIRU
<APPROACH SEL CONFIG> <CDS
<OFFSET MAINT> <INDEX FMC DOWNLOAD>
FMCS BITE 1 / 1 LT FMCS BITE 1 / 2
<FMC LEFT <INFLT FAULT MODEL/ENG>

FMC RIGHT BITE INOP <CDU TEST SW OPTIONS>
<SENSORS PERF FACTR>
<DISCRETES IRS MONITR>
<FIXED OUTPUTS LCD CDU>
<INDEX CROSSL OAD> <INDEX
34-61-00-055.002
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - BITE ENTRY
34-61-00
- 363 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - AUTOMATIC BITE ENTRY
General In Flight Restarts
At start-up on the ground, the primary and secondary For in flight restarts, the two FMCs also compare their
FMCs compare this information over the intersystem bus information. If the information does not agree, the
from one FMC to the other: secondary FMC is conditionally failed and the message
SINGLE FMC OPERATION shows in the scratchpad on the
- Operational flight programs (OFP) CDUs.
- Navigation data base
- Supplemental navigation data base
- Model/Engine data base
- Software options data base
- Analog discretes/program pins
- Performance factors.
Ground Start-up
If the two OFPs do not agree, the primary FMC shows the
OP PROGRAM CROSSLOAD page. You use this page to
crossload the correct OFP.
If the databases do not agree, a crossload page for

that particular database shows on the CDU.
If an analog discrete/program pin or a performance

factor does not agree, the analog discrete or the
performance factor page shows. A highlight shows around
the item that does not agree.
If you exit BITE before corrective action is taken, the
34-61-00-056.fm
secondary FMC is conditionally failed and the message
SINGLE FMC OPERATION shows in the scratch pad on the
CDUs.
34-61-00
- 364 -

DIFFERENCE HAS DIFFERENCE HAS

HIGHLIGHT HIGHLIGHT
FMC-L ANALOG DISC 1 / 4 FMC-L PERF FACTORS 1 / 1
L E F T R I G H T
E C S P A C K O N O F F
E C S P A C K H / L L O H I D R A G F A C T O R
I S O L V A L V E O P +0.0 M I N R / C
C O W L A / I C E O F F O N F - F F A C T O R C L B
W I N G A / I C E O F F +0.0 300
O L E O SW I T C H A I R M N V R M A R G I N C R Z
1.30 100
M I N C R Z T I M E E N G O U T
1 100
<INDEX <INDEX ---
ANALOG DISCRETES PERFORMANCE FACTORS

DISAGREE AT POWER UP DISAGREE AT POWER UP
DATABASE CROSSLOAD 1 / 2 OP PROGRAM CROSSLOAD 1 / 1

N A V D A T A L E F T R I G H T
TBC120010P TBC6820551 549849-001 549250-005
C O P Y F R O M C O P Y F R O M C O P Y F R O M C O P Y F R O M
<LEFT RIGHT> <LEFT RIGHT>
<INDEX <INDEX
NAV DATABASE OPERATION FLIGHT PROGRAM
34-61-00-056.fm
DISAGREE AT POWER UP DISAGREE AT POWER UP
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - AUTOMATIC BITE ENTRY
34-61-00
- 365 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - IN-FLIGHT FAULTS
Purpose - Fault was recorded by one or both FMCs
- Flight leg when the fault occurred.
The inflight faults page lets you view faults that have
occurred during the last nine flights. All of the LRU/sub-systems that interface with the FMCS
show on the IN FLTS FAULTS pages. These LRU/sub-systems
The FMC stores in-flight faults for the last nine show on pages 1, 2, and 3:
flight legs and faults that occur on the ground. The
FMC can store up to 20 faults for each flight leg. - Air data inertial reference system (ADIRS)
- Digital flight control system (DFCS)
A new flight leg starts when the groundspeed is more - Distance measuring equipment (DME)
than 20 knots and the airplane goes into the air mode. - Fuel quantity indicatng system (FQIS)
The flight stops when the airplane touches down and the - Common display system (CDS)
groundspeed is less than 20 knots. - VHF omni-directional range (VOR)
- Multi-mode receiver (MMR)
Faults that occur on the ground are stored as ground - Clock
faults. These faults clear from the non-volatile memory - Airborne communication and reporting system
in the FMC when the groundspeed is more than 20 knots (ACARS)
and the airplane becomes airborne. If the fault is - Flight management computer (FMC)
still present at this time, it becomes an in-flight - Control display unit (CDU).
fault.
The LRU/sub-systems with a failure show one of these
Page Access letters:
This page is accessed by selecting the INFLT Faults - L (FMC 1)

(LSK 1L) on the FMCS BITE page 1. - R (FMC 2)
- B (FMC 1 and FMC 2).
INFLT FAULTS Page
This shows the FMC that recorded the fault. The alpha-
The INFLT FAULTS page shows this data: numeric characters at the top of the page show which
flight leg the fault occurred in or if it occurred on
34-61-00-057.003
- Name of the LRU/sub-system the ground.
- Where the fault occurred (in flight or on the
ground)
34-61-00
- 366 -

Flight number 1 is the last flight and flight number 9 FLIGHT Page
is 9 flights ago. The letter G shows that the fault was
recorded on the ground after the last flight. This page shows the engineering data for the selected
flight leg. The faults show in chronological order
NOTE: Ground faults are FMC and MCDU faults only.
This engineering data shows for each fault:
If no faults were recorded by the FMCS for that LRU,
the display to the right of the LRU is blank. - System code
- Label code
Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the FMCS - Fault state
BITE INDEX page. - Failure time
- Monitor code.
To see more details about the possible LRU failures,
you can set the engineering code 300 into the scratch The system code shows the failed LRU or sub-system. The
pad and push LSK 6R. This shows the FLIGHT SELECT page. following show examples of system codes:
FLIGHT SELECT Page - ADIRS - L

- ADIRS - R
This page shows a menu of the flight legs that have - DFCS
faults recorded. If no faults were recorded by the FMCS - DME - L
for a particular flight leg, the flight leg does not - DME - R
show on the CDU. - FQIS
- CDS - L
The engineering data can be selected for a particular - CDS - R
flight leg or ground fault from this page and show on - VOR - L
the FLIGHT page. - VOR - R
- MMR - L
Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the IN FLT - MMR - R
FAULTS page. - CLOCK
- ACARS - MU
34-61-00-057.003
- CDU - L
- CDU - R
- FMC.
34-61-00
- 367 -
The label code identifies the ARINC word with the fault
for a sensor input fault. For an FMC fault, the label
code shows the the failed circuitry or program fault in
the FMC.
These are the monitor codes for ARINC 429 failures:
- Rate (receive rate failure)

- Parity (parity failure)
- SSM (sign/status matrix failure)
- Reason (reasonableness failure).
The FMCS checks each new ARINC input word for rate
errors. The sensor inputs are expected from the other
systems at certain rates and a rate error will be set
by the FMCS if they are not received in the allotted
time.
The FMCS checks each ARINC input word for parity

errors. A parity error is set if even parity is found.
The FMCS checks each ARINC input word for sign status
matrix (SSM) errors. An SSM error is set if an invalid
SSM is found.
The FMCS checks each ARINC input word to see that the
incoming values are within specified limits. If an
input word is not within these prest limits, a
reasonableness error is set.
34-61-00-057.003
34-61-00
- 368 -

LT FMCS BITE 1 / 2 FMC- L I N F LT FAULTS 1 / 3 FMC-L FLIGHT SELECT 1 / 1

L R U G 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9
<INFLT FAULT MODEL/ENG > A D I R S LEF T L <FLIGHT G
A D I R S RIG HT B
<CDU TEST SW OPTIONS > D F C S R <FLIGHT 1
D M E LEF T
<SENSORS PERF FACTR > D M E RIG HT B <FLIGHT 2 F LIGHT 7>
F Q I S B
<DISCRETES IRS MONITR > <FLIGHT 3
<FIXED OUTPUTS LCD CDU> C D S D EU LEF T

C D S D EU RIG HT
<INDEX <INDE X <INDEX
300
FMC- L I N F LT FAULTS 2 / 3 FMC-L FLIGHT 1 1 / 1

L R U G 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 1 7 - S E P - 9 9
V O R LE F T A D I RS - L A D R S 1 8 0 7 Z
V O R RI G H T B A RO A L T 1 S S M
A D I RS - R I R S 1 8 3 5 Z
M M R LE F T B P I TC H A N G L E R E A S O N
M M R RI G H T
C L O C K LE F T
C L O C K RI G H T
<INDE X <INDEX
FMC - L I N F LT FAULTS 3 / 3
L RU G 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9
A C AR S
C D U LE F T B
C D U RI G HT
F M C LE F T R
F M C RI G HT B
34-61-00-057.003
< IND E X
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - IN-FLIGHT FAULTS
34-61-00
- 369 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - CDU TEST
General When you push the INIT/REF key the second time, the
MCDU goes back to the INIT/REF page.
The CDU test page lets you verify that the pushbutton
and display functions of the MCDU are working
correctly.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting the CDU TEST (LSK

2L) on the FMCS BITE page 1.
CDU TEST Page
The two tests on this page can be started by selecting

the KEY TEST (LSK 5L) or the DISP TEST (LSK 5R).
DSPLY TEST Page
This test shows the complete MCDU character set.
When you push LSK 6L, the display returns to the CDU
TEST page.
KEY TEST Page
This test shows the MCDU faceplate keys on the MCDU

screens. As you push each key on a keyboard, the MCDUs
highlight the key on the screen while the scratchpad
shows the name of the key you pushed.
34-61-00-058.002
When you push LSK 6L the second time, the MCDU goes
back to the FMCS CDU TEST page.
34-61-00
- 370 -

LT FMC S BITE 1 / 2 FMCS CDU TEST 1 / 1
< INFLT FA ULT M O DE L/ E NG >
<CDU TEST SW OP TI O NS >
< SENSORS PER F FA C TR >
< DISCRETE S IRS M ON I TR >
< FIXED OU TPUTS LC D C DU > <KEY TEST DSPLY TEST>

< INDEX <INDEX
FMCS KE Y TEST 1 / 1 - - F MC S-D SP LY - T E S T -- 1 /1-

INI RTE FMC A TC VN A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X 0 1 2 3 4 56 7
LEG DEP H OL PR O EXE 8 9 X X # ! " o F o % o C ' ( ) * + , -. /
1L N1 FIX A BCDE 1R 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? A B C D EF G
2L PRE NEX FGHIJ 2R H I J K LM NOP QR ST U V W X Y Z [ K ] T _
3L 123 KLMNO 3R A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T UV W
4L 456 PQRST 4R W Y Z _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X
5L 789 UVWXY 5R 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X X # ! " o F o % o C '
6L .0+ Z D/C 6R ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < => ?
--- ---- ----- -- ----- ----- A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T UV W
PUSH KEYS T O TES T WYZ [ K ] T _ A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O
KE Y K E Y IND IC ATES VALID P Q R S T U V W X Y Z _ 0 1 2 3 4 56 7
34-61-00-058.002
<CDU TEST < C D U - T E S T - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -
"A" KEY PUSHED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - CDU TEST
34-61-00
- 371 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - SENSORS
34-61-00-059.003
34-61-00
- 372 -

Purpose Dashed lines in the status field show that:
The sensors page lets you view the current status of - LRU is not there
all the input sensors to the FMC that is selected as - FMC selected as the BITE source does not have an
the BITE source. interface with the LRU.
Page Access In the example shown, the DFCS FCC A is the master FCC.
This FCC gives DFCS status to FMC 1 and FMC 2.
This page is accessed by selecting the SENSORS (LSK 3L)
on the FMCS BITE page 1. To see the engineering data for the current faults, you
enter engineering code 100 in the scratchpad and select
SENSOR Pages LSK 6R. This shows the SENSOR DATA pages.
These SENSORS page show these systems that send data to SENSOR DATA Pages
the FMCS:
The SENSOR DATA page shows engineering data for sensors
- VOR that have a FAIL status on a SENSOR STATUS page. The
- DME faults show in chronological order.
- ILS/MMR
- ADIRS This engineering data shows for each failure:
- MMR (ILS & GPS)
- DFCS - System code
- FQIS - Label code
- Clock - Fault state
- ACARS - Failure time
- FMC - Monitor code.
- CDS DEU.
The system code shows the failed LRU or sub-system. The
If the 2 FMCs do not agree on the status of an LRU, a following show examples of system codes:
highlight shows around the status field for that lRU.
34-61-00-059.003
In the example shown, FMC L and FMC R do not agree on - VOR
the status of the right VOR. - DME
- ADIRS
34-61-00
- 373 -
- MMR The FMCS checks each ARINC input word to see that the
- DFCS incoming values are within specified limits. If an
- FQIS input word is not within these prest limits, a
- CLOCK reasonableness error is set.
- A/T
- CDS - DEU To erase the screen, you push LSK 6R. After you push
- FMC. the key, only engineering data for active faults show.
The label code identifies the ARINC word with the fault The clear key only erases the engineering data for the
for a sensor input fault. For an FMC fault, the label FMC selected as the BITE source. The key does not erase
code shows the the failed circuitry or program fault in the data for the 2 FMCs.
the FMC.
These are the monitor codes for ARINC 429 failures:
- Rate (receive rate failure)

- Parity (parity failure)
- Reason (reasonableness failure).
The FMCS checks each new ARINC input word for rate
errors. The sensor inputs are expected from the other
systems at certain rates and a rate error will be set
by the FMCS if they are not received in the allotted
time.
The FMCS checks each ARINC input word for parity

errors. A parity error is set if even parity is found.
The FMCS checks each ARINC input word for sign status
34-61-00-059.003
matrix (SSM) errors. An SSM error is set if an invalid
SSM is found.
34-61-00
- 374 -

LT FMCS BI TE 1 / 2 F M C -L S EN S O R ST A T U S 1 / 2
L R U L E F T R I G H T
< IN FL T FA ULT MODEL/ENG > V O R O K O K
D M E T E S T O K
< CD U T EST SW OPTIONS >
< SE NS O RS PERF FACTR > A D I R S F A I L O K
M M R O K O K
< DI SC R ETE S IRS MONITR > D F C S O K ----
< FI XE D OU TPU T S LCD CDU > F Q I S O K ----
C L O C K O K ----
< IN DE X < I N D EX
NEXT PREV
PAGE PAGE
SYSTEM CODE LABEL CODE
FAULT STATE
FMC-L SEN SOR DATA 1 / 2 F M C - L S EN S O R ST A T U S 2 /2

L R U L E F T R I G HT
A D I R S -L AD R S 1 8 0 7 Z
B A R O A L T 1 S S M
AC A R S O K - - - -
CD S D E U O K F A I L
FM C O K O K
FAILURE
TIME
MONITOR
<INDEX CLR D S PLY> CODE <I N D E X
10 0
34-61-00-059.003
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - SENSORS
34-61-00
- 375 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - DISCRETES
34-61-00-060.003
34-61-00
- 376 -

General These are the discretes that you can see on page 2:
The discretes pages let you view the status of the - FAA/JAA FLIGHT RULES - This option sets the CG for
analog discretes that are sent to the FMC selected as the applicable regulatory flight rules.
the BITE source. - KILOGRAM OPTION - This option sets the default for
weight entries on the CDU.
If the two FMCs do not agree on the status of a - MAG/TRUE - This option is not used.
discrete, a highlight shows around the status field for - SRCE/DEST IDENT. This option is used to identify
that discrete. In the example on the graphic, FMC 1 the FMC. It is always configured to left.
does not see the right ECS PACK on. - ASPIRATED TAT - This option is enabled when an
aspirated TAT probe is installed on the airplane.
Page Access - DEGREE C/DEGREE F DEFAULT. This option sets the
default for temperature entries on the CDU.
This page is accessed by selecting DISCRETES (LSK 4L) - PERF CODE - This option sets the performance code
on the FMCS BITE page 1. for the FMC. It is normally set to 1.
Discretes Pages All the options on page 2 are set with the programmable
switch modules.
These are the discretes that you can see on page 1:
These are the discretes that you can see on page 3:
- ECS PACK. Shows the position of the ECS flow
control and shut off valve in each pack. - FMC SOURCE SEL. Shows the position of the FMC
- ECS PACK H/L. Shows if the pack is in normal or source select switch on the P5 overhead panel.
high flow mode. - MODEL/ENGINE. Shows the current status of the
- ISOL VALVE. Shows the position of the bleed air engine/airframe program pins to the FMC. This is
isolation valve. set through the programmable switch modules.
- COWL A/ICE. Shows the position of the engine cowl - ENGINE BLEED. Shows the position of the engine
anti-ice switches on the P5 overhead panel. bleed air switches on the P5 overhead panel.
- WING A/ICE. Shows the position of the wing anti- - SEL CONFIG MODE. This option enables the loadable
ice switches on the P5 overhead panel. software configuration. This is set through the
34-61-00-060.003
- OLEO SWITCH. Shows the airplane in the ground or programmable switch modules.
air modes. This input comes from the proximity
switch electronic unit (PSEU). These are the discretes that you can see on page 4:
34-61-00
- 377 -
- VOR INHIBIT - This option disables VOR inputs for
the navigation function.
- FLIGHT NUMBER - This option lets the crew enter the
flight number on the RTE page.
- TOGA RW POS UPD - This option lets the FMC do a
position update when the TOGA switches are pushed
on the ground.
- TAKEOFF PROFILE - This option gives FMC control of
the altitude at which takeoff thrust is reduced to
climb thrust.
- TAKEOFF SPEEDS - This option enables the FMC to
calculate the takeoff speeds based on the QRH and
shows them on the TAKEOFF page.
- NAVAID SUPPRESS - This option suppresses autotuned
navaids on the CDS map display.
- SEL CRS INHIBIT - This option suppresses selected
course radials for manually tuned navaids on the
CDS map display.
- ACARS INSTALLED - This option enables the
ACARS/FMC interface.
All the options on page 4 are set with the programmable

switch modules.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT PERSONS AND EQUIPMENT ARE CLEAR

OF THE SLATS BEFORE YOU REMOVE ELECTRICAL
POWER FROM THE AIR/GROUND RELAYS. THE SLATS
CAN MOVE AUTOMATICALLY WHEN FLAPS ARE IN
POSITION 1, 2, OR 5, AND THE NOSE OR MAIN
LANDING GEAR AIR/GROUND RELAYS INDICATE AN
34-61-00-060.003
AIRBORNE CONDITION. THIS CAN CAUSE INJURY TO
PERSONS OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
34-61-00
- 378 -

LT FMCS BITE 1 / 2 FMC-L AN ALOG DISC 1 / 4

L E F T R I G H T
< INFLT FAULT MODEL/ENG> E C S P A C K O N O F F
E C S P A C K H / L L O H I
<CDU TEST SW OPTIONS> I S O L V A L V E O P
C O W L A / I C E O F F O N
< SENSORS PERF FACTR> W I N G A / I C E O F F
O L E O S W I T C H A I R
< DISCRETES IRS MONITR>
< FIXED OUTPUTS LCD CDU>

< INDEX <INDEX
F MC-L A NA LO G DI SC 2 /4 FMC- L A N ALO G D I S C 3 / 4 F MC -L A NA LOG DISC 4 / 4
F MC S O U R C E SE L N O R M A L V O R I N HI B I T E N A B L E
J A A F L T R UL E S D I S A B L E F L I G H T N U M B ER E N A B L E
K I L O G R A M OP T I O N D I S A B L E M OD E L / E N G V A L I D T O G A R W P O S U P D D I S A B L E
M A G / T R U E M A G T A K E O F F P R O FI L E D I S A B L E
S R C E / D E S T I D E N T L E F T N O . 1 N O . 2
A S P I R A T E D T A T E N A B L E E NG I N E B L E E D O F F O N T A K E O F F S P E E D S D I S A B LE
N A V A I D S U P P R E S S E N A B LE
o C / o F D E F AU LT o C S EL C O N F I G MO D E D I S A B L E S E L C R S I N H I B I T E N A B LE
A C A R S IN S T A L L E D ON
P E R F C O D E 1
< IN DEX < IN D EX < INDE X 1
1
34-61-00-060.003
1 THESE ARE EXAMPLES OF THE PROGRAM PIN OPTIONS AND DO NOT REPRESENT THE OPTIONS ON YOUR AIRPLANE(S).
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - DISCRETES
34-61-00
- 379 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - FMCS FIXED OUTPUTS
Purpose - OFST.
The fixed outputs pages let you view FMCS data and On the autoflight status annunciators (ASA), both FMC
annunciations that are sent to the common display annunciators are also on.
system (CDS).
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting FIXED OUTPUTS (LSK

5L) on the FMCS BITE page 1.
The mode selectors on both EFIS control panels should

also be set to the MAP mode.
FIXED OUTPUTS Page 1/2
This page shows FMCS data that goes to the thrust mode
annunciation (TMA) on the CDS engine display.
The thrust modes show in sequence on the TMA. The word

ON shows on the CDUs as each mode comes into view on the
TMA.
On the CDS navigation displays, the message FMC

INTERFACE OK shows.
FIXED OUTPUTS Page 2/2
These CDU annunciators are on during the FIXED OUTPUTS

test:
34-61-00-061.002
- MSG
- FAIL
34-61-00
- 380 -

LT FMC S BITE 1 / 2 FMCS FIXED O U T P U TS 1 / 2
<INFLT FA ULT M O D E L/ E N G > C H E C K F L T D E C K V A L U E S

S E L E C T M A P M O D E O N C P ' S
<CDU TEST SW O P TI O N S >
T M A " C R Z " O F F
<SENSORS PER F FA C T R > " C L B " O N
" - - - " O F F
< DISCRETE S IRS M ON I T R > " C O N " O F F
" T O " O F F
<FIXED OU TPUTS LCD CDU> " G A " O F F
C D S " F M C I N T E R F A C E O K "
<INDEX <IN D E X
NEXT PREV
PAGE PAGE
THRUST MODE
FMC S F IXED OUTPUTS 2 / 2
CLB C H EC K A N N U N C I A T O R S
C D U - " MS G " O N
10 0.0 10 0.0 " FA I L "

" OF S T "
O N
O N
0 0
8 8 A A " FM C " A L E R T O N
2 2
6 6
4 4
N1
34-61-00-061.002
TAI TAI <INDE X
ENGINE DISPLAY
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - FMCS FIXED OUTPUTS
34-61-00
- 381 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - AIRPLANE MODEL AND ENGINE CONFIGURATION
General - PARITY ERROR shows if the airframe/engine
configuration program pins are not set to odd
The model/engine configuration page lets you view the parity. It also shows for an invalid SDI discrete
airplane and engine configuration. configuration
- INVALID shows if the model/engine performance
Page Access database is not installed or the loaded MEDB has
failed its validity check
This page is accessed by selecting MODEL/ENG (LSK 1R) - PROGRAM PIN NOT IN MODEL/ENGINE DATA BASE shows if
on the FMCS BITE page 1. the airframe/engine configuration program pins do
not match the data in the model/engine performance
MODEL/ENG Pages database.
The airplane/engine configuration and the engine

combustor option are displayed. The selected brake
option is also displayed. The engine ratings shows this
data:
- Full rated takeoff thrust

- First takeoff derate thrust
- Second takeoff derate thrust
- Takeoff bump thrust rating (if selected).
If the takeoff derate (TO-1 or TO-2) or the takeoff

bump rating do not exist for the selected
engine/airframe configuration, NONE shows in that
thrust data field.
When you power-up, the FMC monitors the airframe/engine

configuration program pins to make sure the
configuration is valid. If there is a non-normal
34-61-00-065.002
condition, one of these messages shows:
34-61-00
- 382 -

LT FMCS BITE 1 / 2 F MC - L MODEL/ENG CFG 1 / 1
<INFLT FAULT M O DE L /E NG >

M O D E L E N G I N E
<CDU TEST SW OP T IO NS > 73 7- X X X C F M 56 -7 B
B R A K E O P T E N G I N E O P T
<SENSORS P E R F F AC TR > CA T_ B DA C
E N G I N E R A T I N G S
<DISCRETES IRS M O NI TR > F U L L XX K
T O - 1 XX K
<FIXED OUTPUTS LC D C DU > T O - 2 XX K
B U M P N ON E
<INDEX <I ND E X
NORMAL DISPLAY
FMC-L MODEL/ENG CFG 1 / 1 FMC-L MODEL/ENG CFG 1 / 1 FMC-L MODEL/ENG CFG 1 / 1
PARITY ERROR INVALID PROGRAM PIN NOT IN

MODEL/ENGINE DATABASE
<INDEX <INDEX <INDEX
34-61-00-065.002
FMCS PROGRAM PIN PARITY THE MODEL/ENGINE PERFORMANCE FMCS PROGRAM PINS DO NOT MATCH
IS NOT ODD PARITY DATABASE IS NOT INSTALLED THE MODEL/ENGINE PERFORMANCE
DATABASE
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - AIRPLANE MODEL AND ENGINE CONFIGURATION
34-61-00
- 383 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - SOFTWARE OPTIONS
34-61-00-064.003
34-61-00
- 384 -

Purpose For example, if you have these options, your code is -
00000000000882C2:
The software options page lets you view the following
data: - Runway offset in feet - (0000000000000002)
- GPS with integrity - (00000000000000C0)
- NDB size - Manual RNP entry - (0000000000000200)
- Software option code - Alternate destination - (0000000000008000)
- RNP default values - Plan fuel entry - (0000000000080000).
- Enabled software options.
If your airline did not select any software options,
There can be a maximum of three software option pages. your code is - 0000000000000000.
Page Access These are the software options your airline selected
(if no software options show here, your airline did not
This page is accessed by selecting SW OPTIONS (LSK 2R) select any options).
on the FMCS BITE page 1.
- Manual takeoff speeds - (0000000000000008) - This
Software Option Pages option enables the display of FMCS computed take
off speeds on the TAKEOFF REF page; they can be
The navigation data base size is displayed at LSK 1L. turned on or off with the QRH ON or QRH OFF
The default size is 4096 Kwords or approximately 10 prompts.
Mbytes. - VNAV ALT - (0000000000000020) - This option is
only enabled when the flight crew selects altitude
Line 5L shows the time out value for ground network intervention on the MCP; it shows VNAV ALT on the
acknowledgement for ATC downlinks. FMA in CDS at airplane level-off instead of ALT
HOLD.
Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the FMCS - Manual RNP entry - (0000000000000200) - This
BITE page. option allows the flight crew to enter different
values for the RNP provided they do not exceed the
Line 1R shows the software option code. The software default values.
34-61-00-064.003
option code is a 16-digit hexadecimal number. The
option code is determined by adding each column in the
software code (start with the left column).
34-61-00
- 385 -
- ATC Message on Displays - (0000000000001000) - - Missed approach color - (0000000000000010) - This
This option allows the display of an ATC message in option displays the missed approach part of the
amber on the center upper display unit when an ATC active flight plan in cyan until a missed approach
message is received. becomes active; It then shows in magenta.
- AOC datalink - (0000000000004000) - This option - Integrated approach navigation -
allows the FMCS to uplink and downlink data (0000000008000000) - option allows the flight crew
through ACARS. to select an RNAV approach from the FMCS NDB and
- Alternate destination - (0000000000008000) - This the existing ILS display formats are used to
option allows the flight crew to review the display the data to the flight crew.
distance, time and fuel remaining for diversions - GPS Landing System approach - (0000000010000000) -
to alternate airports. This option allows the flight crew to select a GLS
- Certified takeoff speeds - (0000000000020000) - approach from the FMCS NDB.
This option permits the use of FMCS computed take
off speeds in the MEDB. Lines 2R to 4R show the default lateral and vertical
- Message recall - (0000000000040000) - This option RNP values.
allows the flight crew to review any messages on
the CDU that have been previously cleared but are
still valid.
- Plan fuel entry - (0000000000080000) - This option
allows the flight crew to enter the final fuel load
before refueling has been completed; the FMCS
performance initialization can then be completed
while the airplane is being refueled.
- QFE altitude reference - (0000000000100000) - This
option allows the flight crew to change the SET
LANDING ALTITUDE on the PFD between QNH and QFE
altitude references.
- Engine out SIDS - (0000000004000000) - This option
allows the flight crew to review a list of standard
instrument departures (SIDs) that are designed for
34-61-00-064.003
engine out operations.
34-61-00
- 386 -

LT FMCS BITE 1 / 2
FMCS SW OPTIONS 1/ X
<INFLT FAULT MO DEL/ ENG> N D B SI Z E O P T I ON CO D E
4 0 96 K 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 82C2
<CDU TEST SW OPTI ONS>
R N P V R N P TI MER
<SENSORS PERF FA CTR> O C E A N I C 12 . 0 4 0 0 6 0 S
E N R O U T E 2 . 00 4 0 0 3 0 S
< DISCRETES IRS MON ITR> T E R M I N A L 1 . 00 4 0 0 1 0 S
A P P R O A C H 0 . 50 4 0 0 1 0 S
<FIXED OUTPUTS LCD CDU>
<INDEX
<INDEX N E T A CK 5.0 M IN
F M C - L SW O P T IO NS 2 / X
E N A B LE D O P T I O NS
R U NW A Y O FF SE T I N F E ET
G P S W I T H I NT E G R I TY 1
M A NU A L R NP E N T R Y
A L TE R N A T E DE S T I N A T I ON
P L AN F U E L EN T R Y
<INDEX
34-61-00-064.003 1 THESE ARE EXAMPLES OF SOFTWARE OPTIONS AND MIGHT

NOT REPRESENT THE OPTIONS ON YOUR AIRPLANE(S).
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - SOFTWARE OPTIONS
34-61-00
- 387 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - PERFORMANCE FACTORS
34-61-00-063.002
34-61-00
- 388 -

Purpose Line 2L shows the DRAG FACTOR value. This is a
correction factor applied to drag calculations and is a
The performance factors page lets you view performance percentage. The default value is 0.0 and the allowable
factors to improve airplane performance for individual entry range is - 9.9 to + 9.9
operators or airplane characteristics.
Line 3L shows the fuel flow (F-F) value. This is a
Page Access correction factor applied to fuel flow calculations and
is a percentage. The default value is 0.0 and the
This page is accessed by selecting PERF FACTR (LSK 3R) allowable entry range is - 9.9 to + 9.9.
Line 4L shows the maneuver margin (MNVR MARGIN) value.
This page automatically shows if there is a performance The maneuver margin is used for flight envelope and
factors mismatch during power-up and it is the only bank angle calculations. The default value is 1.3g and
mismatch. the allowable entry range is 1.3 to 1.6.
Performance Factors Page Line 5L shows the minimum cruise time (MIN CRZ TIME)
value in minutes. This value is a lower limit to the
The aerodynamic and engine models in the performance minimum cruise time from the performance data base for
data base are from airplane design and flight test trip altitude calculations. The default value is 1.0
data. Because each production airplane may be and the allowable entry range is 1.0 to 20.
different, the FMCS PERF FACTORS page lets the operator
make adjustments for some of the factors in the Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the FMCS
model/engine database. BITE page.
If the two FMCs do not agree on the value for a Line 3R shows the minimum rate of climb (MIN R/C CLB)
performance factor, the factor is highlighted. In the value in feet/minute. This is a margin for flight
example on the graphic, FMC 2 does not agree with the envelope calculations at climb speed and maximum climb
value for the engine out minimum rate of climb. thrust. The default value is 300 and the allowable
entry range is 0.0 to 999.
Line 1L shows the geometric descent (GEO DES) value.
34-61-00-063.002
The default geometric descent can be the entire descent Line 4R shows the minimum rate of climb (MIN R/C CRZ)
(FULL) or approach (APP) only. value in feet/minute. This is a rate of climb margin
for flight envelope calculations at cruise speed and
34-61-00
- 389 -
maximum cruise thrust. The default value is 300 and the
allowable entry range is 0 to 999.
Line 5R shows the minimum rate of climb (MIN R/C ENG

OUT) value in feet/minute. This is a margin for flight
envelope calculations at engine out speed and maximum
continuous thrust. The default value is 300 and the
allowable entry range is 0 to 500.
Line 6R shows dashes. If "ARM" is typed into the

scratchpad and line selected to 6R, new values can be
manually entered for the various functions on this
page. These entered values will remain until again
manually changed.
CAUTION: THE PERFORMANCE FACTORS SHOULD ONLY BE CHANGED

AT THE REQUEST OF THE CUSTOMER ENGINEERING
DEPEARTMENT.
New default values for the performance factors can be

loaded with a new model engine data base (MEDB) with
the airborne data loader.
34-61-00-063.002
34-61-00
- 390 -

LT FMCS BITE 1 / 2
PERF FACTORS 1 /1
<INFLT FA U LT MODE L/ENG> GE O D E S
FU L L/ A P P
<CDU TEST SW OP TIONS> DR A G F A C T OR
+0.0 M I N R / C
<SENSORS PERF FACTR> F- F FA C T O R C L B
+0.0 300
<DISCRETES IRS M ONITR> MN V R M A R G IN C R Z
1.30 100
<FIXED OU T PUT S LCD CDU> MI N CR Z T IM E E N G O U T
1 100
<INDEX
<INDEX ---
34-61-00-063.002
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - PERFORMANCE FACTORS
34-61-00
- 391 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - IRS MONITOR
General
The IRS monitor page lets you view the ADIRS inertial
reference position error rate.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting IRS MONITR (LSK 4R)

IRS MONITOR Page
The position error rate (nautical miles per hour) for

each ADIRU is displayed at line 2L and 4L on this page.
To calculate the position error rate, the FMCS divides

the difference between the FMCS position and ADIRU
position by the total flight time. The FMCS calculates
this error rate at the end of each flight. The display
clears when the airplane goes in the air.
The position error rate is blank if the ADIRU is not in

the NAV mode.
34-61-00-062.002
34-61-00
- 392 -

LT FMC S BITE 1 / 2 FM C - L I RS MONITOR 1 / 1
<INFLT FA ULT MODEL/ENG>

IR S L
<CDU TEST SW OPTIONS> 0. 5 N M / H R
<SENSORS PERF FACTR>

IR S R
<DISCRETE S IRS MONITR> 0. 9 N M / H R
<FIXED OU TPUTS LCD CDU>
<INDEX < IN D E X
34-61-00-062.002
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - IRS MONITOR
34-61-00
- 393 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - LCD CDU
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting LCD CDU (LSK 5R) on

the FMCS BITE INDEX page 1.
LCD CDU Page
The CDU MAINT BITE INDEX page has these CDU maintenance
categories:
- FAULTS
- KEY TEST
- COLOR TEST
- DISPLAY TEST
- CONFIG
- SOFTWARE OPTIONS
- POWER SUPPLY (P/S)
- TEMPERATURE
- LIGHT
- LAMP TEST
- CALIBRATION.
NOTE: Power supply, temperature, light, lamp test, and

calibration are used primarily for bench test of
the CDU.
The EXIT prompt (LSK 6L) selects the FMCS BITE INDEX
page.
34-61-00-077.fm
34-61-00
- 394 -

LT FMC S BITE 1 / 2
<INFLT FA ULT MO DEL/ ENG>
<CDU TEST SW OPTI ONS>
<SENSORS PERF FA CTR>
< DISCRETE S IRS MON ITR>
<FIXED OU TPUTS LCD CDU>

<INDEX
C DU MAINT BITE IN D E X
< F A UL T S SW O PT I O N S >
<KEY TEST P/S>
< C O LO R TEST TEMP>
< D I SP L A Y TEST LIGHT>
< C O NF I G LAM P TEST>
< E X IT C A L I B RA T I O N >
34-61-00-077.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - LCD CDU
34-61-00
- 395 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - ENGINEERING DATA
34-61-00-109.fm
34-61-00
- 396 -

General - CLOCK
- FMCS.
Engineering data provides additional information about
the inputs to the FMCS from other systems. The label code identifies the ARINC word with the
fault. For an FMC fault, the label code shows the
Engineering data can be accessed from both the In- failed circuitry or program fault in the FMC.
flight Faults and the Sensors pages in FMCS BITE.
The fault state shows if the fault was steady (S) or
Engineering data intermittent (I). All faults are initially recorded as
a steady fault. If the fault goes away, the indication
This engineering data shows for each fault: changes to intermittent.
- System code The failure time shows the time (GMT) of the first
- Label code occurrence of the fault. This time does not change if
- Fault state the fault goes away and then comes back.
- Failure time
- Monitor code. These are the monitor codes for ARINC 429 failures:
The system code shows the failed LRU or sub-system. The - Rate (receive rate failure)
following show examples of system codes: - Parity (parity failure)
- ADIRS - L - Reason (reasonableness failure).
- ADIRS - R
- DFCS The FMCS checks each new ARINC input word for rate
- DME - L errors. The sensor inputs are expected from the other
- DME - R systems at certain rates and a rate error will be set
- FQIS by the FMCS if they are not received in the allotted
- CDS - L time.
- CDS - R
- VOR - L The FMCS checks each ARINC input word for parity
34-61-00-109.fm
- VOR - R errors. A parity error is set if even parity is found.
- MMR - L
- MMR - R
34-61-00
- 397 -
The FMCS checks each ARINC input word for sign status - PITCH ANGLE (rate, parity, SSM and reason)
matrix (SSM) errors. An SSM error is set if an invalid - PRES POS LAT (rate, parity, SSM and reason)
SSM is found. - PRES POS LON (rate, parity and SSM)
- ROLL ANGLE (rate, parity and SSM)
The FMCS checks each ARINC input word to see that the - TRUE HEADING (rate, parity and SSM)
incoming values are within specified limits. If an - VEL E-W (rate, parity, SSM and reason)
input word is not within these preset limits, a - VEL N-S (rate, parity, SSM and reason)
reasonableness error is set. - DISCRETE 270 (parity, SSM and reason)
- DISCRETE 274 (parity and SSM).
Air Data Inertial Reference System (ADIRS)
Digital Flight Control System (DFCS)
The following are the label and possible monitor codes
for ADIRS-L/R ADR system code that can be displayed: The following are the label and possible monitor codes
for DFCS system code that can be displayed:
- BARO ALT 1 (rate, parity, SSM and reason)
- BARO ALT 2 (rate, parity, SSM and reason) - BUFF OVERFLOW
- BUFF OVERFLOW - FLAP POS (rate, parity, SSM and reason)
- COMP AIR SPD (rate, parity, SSM and reason) - FOREIGN COURSE (rate, parity and SSM)
- FAIL - LOCAL COURSE (rate, parity and SSM)
- MACH (rate, parity, SSM and reason) - SELECT ALT (rate, parity, SSM and reason)
- PRESSURE ALT (rate, parity, SSM and reason) - TARGET AIRSPEED (rate, parity, SSM and reason)
- SAT (rate, parity, SSM and reason) - DISCRETE 270 (parity and SSM)
- TAT (rate, parity, SSM and reason) - DISCRETE 272 (parity and SSM)
- TRUE AIR SPD (rate, parity, SSM and reason). - DISCRETE 274 (parity, SSM and reason).
The following are the label and possible monitor codes Distance Measuring Equipment (DME)
for ADIRS-L/R IR system code and the possible monitor
codes that can be displayed: The following are the label and possible monitor codes
for DME-L/R system code that can be displayed:
- GND SPEED (rate, parity, SSM and reason)
34-61-00-109.fm
- INERT V SPD (rate, parity, SSM and reason) - DME DISTANCE (SSM and reason)
- INERTIAL ALT (rate, parity, SSM and reason) - DME FREQUENCY (reason).
- MAG HEADING (rate, parity and SSM)
34-61-00
- 398 -

Fuel Quantity Indicating System (FQIS) The following is the label code for MMR-L/R GPS system
code that can be displayed:
for FQIS system code that can be displayed: - GPS MAINT.
- TOTAL FUEL (parity and rate). Clock
Common Display System (CDS) The following are the label and possible monitor codes
for CLOCK system code that can be displayed:
for CDS-L/R system code that can be displayed: - BUFF OVERFLOW
- DATE (parity and SSM).
- BUFF OVEFLOW
- DISCRETE 272 (parity and reason) Flight Management Computer System (FMCS)
- DISCRETE 273 (parity and reason)
- DISCRETE 350 (parity and reason). The following are the label and possible monitor codes
for FMC system code that can be displayed:
VOR System
- ARINC
The following are the label and possible monitor codes - ASIC
for VOR-L/R system code that can be displayed: - BACKPLANE
- BUS ERROR
- VOR BEARING (parity and rate) - BUS TIMEOUT
- VOR FREQUENCY (parity and rate). - CPU (FAIL)
- DISCR OUT LOOP
Multi Mode Receiver (MMR) - DMA CHAN
- EDAC FAIL
The following are the label and possible monitor codes - ETHERNET
for MMR-L/R ILS system code that can be displayed: - INT TIMER CLK
- MEM CONFIG REG
34-61-00-109.fm
- ILS FREQUENCY (parity and rate) - MICROCODE
- LOC DEVIATION (parity and rate). - PGM FAULT
- PROCESSOR
34-61-00
- 399 -
- UART
- VOL RAM
- WDT TEST FAIL.
34-61-00-109.fm
34-61-00
- 400 -

FMC-L FLIGHT SELECT 1 / 1 FMC-L FLIGHT 1 1 / 1

1 7 - S E P - 9 9
<FLIGHT G A D I RS - L A D R S 1 8 0 7 Z
B A RO A L T 1 S S M
<FLIGHT 1
A D I RS - R I R S 1 8 3 5 Z
<FLIGHT 2 FLIGHT 7> P I TC H A N G L E R E A S O N
<FLIGHT 3
<INDEX <INDEX
IN-FLIGHT FAULTS
FAULT
F M C- L S E NSO R ST A T U S 2 /2 SYSTEM CODE FMC-L SENSOR DATA 1 / 1 STATE
L R U LEF T RIG HT
LABEL CODE A D I R S- L AD R S 1 8 0 7 Z FAILURE
B A R O A L T 1 SSM TIME
MONITOR
CD S D EU OK FAI L
FM C OK OK
CODE
<I N DE X <INDEX CLR DSPLY>

10 0
34-61-00-109.fm
SENSORS
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - FMCS BITE PAGES - ENGINEERING DATA
34-61-00
- 401 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - FAULTS
34-61-00-078.fm
34-61-00
- 402 -

General - Fault state
- Failure frequency
The faults page lets you view CDU faults for the last - Failure time
ten cycles. - Extended fault code.
Page Access The failed unit can show FMC, CDU, or USER 1-5 where
USER is an airplane sub-system.
This page is accessed by selecting FAULTS (LSK 1L) on
the CDU MAINT BITE INDEX page. These are the failure descriptions that can show:
CDU BITE DISPLAY INDEX Page - PROCESSOR

- WATCHDOG TIMER
This page shows the fault history for the last ten full - 429 FAULT
power-up cycles. When no faults are recorded during a - ANNUN FAULT
cycle, the data field is blank. - LCD
- KEYBOARD
To see the fault data for a specific cycle, select that - MEMORY
line select key. This selects the CDU BITE DISPLAY page - R/C TIMER (resistor/capacitor)
for that power up cycle. - POWER SUPPLY
- LIGHT SENSOR
Line select key 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects - ADC (analog to digital converter)
the CDU MAINT BITE INDEX page. - TEMP SENSOR
- FMC FAULT
CDU BITE DISPLAY Page - SUB-SYSTEM FAULT
- EDC (error detection and correction logic)
This page shows the fault data for a specific cycle. Up - SOFTWARE FAULT
to a maximum of five faults are recorded per cycle. The - FONTROM (read only memory).
header shows the cycle number.
The fault state shows if the fault is steady (S) or
This data shows for each fault: intermittent (I). All faults are initially recorded as
34-61-00-078.fm
a steady fault. If the fault later goes away, the
- Failed unit indication changes to intermittent.
- Failure description
34-61-00
- 403 -
The failure frequency shows the number of times the
fault occurs.
The failure time shows the CDU elapsed time indication

when the fault first occurred.
The extended fault code is used by shop personnel only.
Line select key 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects

the CDU MAINT BITE INDEX page.
34-61-00-078.fm
34-61-00
- 404 -

C DU MAINT BITE INDEX CDU BIT DSPLY INDEX

< FA UL T S SW OPTIONS> <CYCLE 01 CYCLE 06>
< KEY T E S T P/S> <CYCLE 02 CYCLE 07>

< CO LO R TEST TEMP> <CYCLE 03 CYCLE 08>
< DI SP L A Y TE ST LIGHT> <CYCLE 04 CYCLE 09>
< CO NF I G LAMP TEST> CYCLE 10>
< EX IT CALIBRATION> <INDEX
EXTENDED
FAULT CODE
FAILED UNIT CDU BIT DISPL A Y FAULT STATE
CYCLE 09 FAUL T S
CDU 57 S 1
FAILURE DESCRIPTION LIGHT SENSOR 0 216.0
FAILURE FREQUENCY
FAILURE TIME
< I N D EX
34-61-00-078.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - FAULTS
34-61-00
- 405 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - KEY TEST
General
The key test page lets you do a test of the CDU keys.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting KEY TEST (LSK 2L) on

Key Test Page
This page shows the test displays for the MCDU

faceplate keys on the MCDU screens. As you push each
key on the keyboard, the corresponding character set
will be highlighted (shaded white) on the CDU screen.
Push the same key again to return the character set to
normal.

34-61-00-079.fm
34-61-00
- 406 -

CD U MAIN T BITE INDEX
< FA U L T S SW OPTIONS>
< KE Y TEST P/S>
< CO L O R T E S T TEMP>
< DI S P L A Y T EST LIGHT>
< CO N F I G LAMP TEST>
< EX I T CALIBRATION>
C DU KEY T ES T 1 / 1
INI R TE FMC A TC VNA
MEN L EG DEP H OL PRO EXE
N1 F IX
PRV N EX AB CDE
1L FG HIJ 1R
2 L 123 KL MNO 2R
3 L 456 PQ RST 3R
4 L 789 UV WXY 4R
5 L .0+ Z D/C 5R
6L 6R
---PUS H KEYS T O TEST----
<INDEX ( P US H T W I C E )
34-61-00-079.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - KEY TEST
34-61-00
- 407 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - COLOR TEST
General
The color test page lets you verify the color displays
on the CDU.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting COLOR TEST (LSK 3L)

on the CDU MAINT BITE INDEX page.
Color Test Page
Line 6L shows the INDEX prompt. This selects the CDU

MAINT BITE INDEX page.
Line 2R shows the WHITE prompt. This selects a full

screen display of the color white.
Line 3R shows the GRAY SCALE prompt. This selects a

display of the eight brightness levels for the gray
scale.
Line 4R shows the CHECKERBOARD prompt. This selects a

full screen display of a black and white checkerboard
pattern.
Push the LSK a second time to return the MCDU screen to

normal.
34-61-00-080.fm
34-61-00
- 408 -

CD U M AIN T BITE INDEX
<FAU L TS SW OPTIONS>
<KEY TE ST P/S>
<COL O R TES T TEMP>
<DIS P LA Y TE ST LIGHT>
<CON F IG LAMP TEST>
<EXI T CALIBRATION>
CDU COLOR TEST 1 / 1
WHI TE >
GRAY SCA LE >
CH E CK E R BOA RD >
<INDEX
34-61-00-080.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - COLOR TEST
34-61-00
- 409 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - DISPLAY TEST
General
The display test page lets you verify the complete CDU
character set.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting DISPLAY TEST (LSK

4L) on the CDU MAINT BITE INDEX page.
Display Test Page
This page shows the complete MCDU character set.

34-61-00-081.fm
34-61-00
- 410 -

CDU MAINT BITE INDEX
<FAU LTS SW OPTIONS>
<KEY TEST P/S>
<COL OR TEST TEMP>
<DIS PLAY TE ST LIGHT>
<CON FIG LAMP TEST>
<EXI T CALIBRATION>
- - -- CD U - D S P L Y- TE S T - - 1 / X
\ #& 0 1 2 3 4 56 78 9 ! " F %
' ( )* + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; <= >
? AB C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S TU V
W X YZ [ ] A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q R ST UV W X Y Z # & " \ ! F
% C' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < =>? [ ]
>
>
34-61-00-081.fm
< I ND E X - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -
- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - DISPLAY TEST
34-61-00
- 411 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - CONFIG
General
The config page lets you view the current CDU

configuration data.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting CONFIG (LSK 5L) on

Configuration Page
The CDU CONFIGURATION page shows this information:
- Software part number

- Operating mode (CDU, MCDU, or FANS MCDU)
- Location (left or right)
- Elapsed time indicator
- CDU serial number.

34-61-00-082.fm
34-61-00
- 412 -

C DU MAINT BITE INDEX
< F A UL T S SW OPTIONS>
<KEY T E ST P/S>
< D I SP L A Y TEST LIGHT>
< C O NF I G LAMP TEST>
< E X IT CALIBRATION>
C D U C O N FI G U R A T IO N
SO F T W ARE P/ N
3 4 6 3 - S M I - 0 01 - 0 2
CD U M ODE
MCDU
CD U L OCAT IO N
RIGHT
ET I H RS
1 2 9 . 6
SE R I A L NO
0917
<INDE X
34-61-00-082.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - CONFIG
34-61-00
- 413 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - SW OPTIONS
General enter the new software option into the scratch pad and
line select it to the option code (LSK 1R).
The sw options page lets you view the current software
options in the CDU. NOTE: When you enter an option code, all eight digits
must be entered.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting SW OPTIONS (LSK 1R)

Software Options Page
The software option page shows the status of the

options that are in the CDU software options database.
The software option code is an eight-digit hexadecimal

number. These option codes are available:
- No option code - 00000000

- Switching mode - 00000001
- ARINC 739 color usage - 00000002
- Switching mode & ARINC 739 color usage - 00000003.
The enabled options show at line 3L. If there are no

option codes enabled, NONE shows.

Line 6R allows the entry of the word ARM. This is a
34-61-00-083.fm
necessary entry to enable software option entry on this
page. After you enter ARM and push LSK 6R, you may
34-61-00
- 414 -

CD U M AINT BITE INDEX CDU SW O P T ION S 1 / 1

O P T I ON C O D E
< FAU L TS SW OPTIONS> 00 0 00 00 0
<KEY TE S T P/S> EN AB L E D O P T ION S
<COL OR TEST TEMP> NONE
< DIS P LA Y TE ST LIGHT>
< CON F IG LAMP TEST>
<EXI T CALIBRATION> < I N D EX ---

OR
CDU SW OPT IO NS 1 / 1 CDU SW O P T IO NS 1 / 1 CDU S W O PT I O N S 1 /1

O P T I O N C O D E O P T IO N C OD E O PT I O N C O D E
0 0000001 0 0 00 00 0 2 0 000 0 0 03
ENAB LED OPT IO NS ENA B LED O P T IO NS E N A B L E D O PT I O N S
SWITCHIN G M O DE A R IN C 7 3 9 C O L O R U SAG E S W I TC H I N G M O D E
A R I NC 7 3 9 C O L OR U SAG E
<INDEX --- <INDEX --- < I N DE X - --
34-61-00-083.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - SW OPTIONS
34-61-00
- 415 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - POWER SUPPLY
General
The power supply page lets you view the internal CDU
power supply data.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting P/S (LSK 2R) on the

CDU MAINT BITE INDEX page.
Power Supply Page
This page shows the voltage levels from the MCDU power
supply. These voltages come the power supply:
- +5v dc
- +12v dc
- -12v dc
- +26v dc
- +28v dc
- Switched +28v dc
- Annunciator +5v dc.
NOTE: The switched 28v dc power supply is only active

when the CDU heater is on and the voltage will be
displayed. If the heater is off, the data field
will be blank.

34-61-00-084.fm
34-61-00
- 416 -

CD U MAINT BITE INDEX

<FAU L TS SW OPTIONS>
<KEY TEST P/S>
<COL O R TEST TEMP>
<DIS P LAY TE ST LIGHT>

<CON F IG LAMP TEST>
<EXI T CALIBRATION>
P / S S E N SO RS
SE NSOR VA LU E
+ 5 XX .X X V
+12 XX .X X V
-12 XX .X X V
+26 XX .X X V
+28 XX .X X V
S W_28 XX .X X V
A NNUN XX .X X V
<INDEX
34-61-00-084.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - POWER SUPPLY
34-61-00
- 417 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - TEMP SENSORS
General
The temperature sensors page lets you view the internal

CDU temperature data.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting TEMP (LSK 3R) on the

CDU MAINT BITE INDEX page.
Temperature Sensors Page
This page shows the temperature values from the sensors

in the LCD module and the backlight assembly. It also
shows the operational status of the thermal electric
coolers (TEC) and the heater.

34-61-00-085.fm
34-61-00
- 418 -

< FAUL TS SW OPTIONS>
< KEY TE ST P/S>
< COLO R TEST TEMP>
< DISP LA Y TE ST LIGHT>
< CONF IG LAMP TEST>
< EXIT CALIBRATION>
TEMP S EN S O R S
SENSOR VALU E
LCD_TEMP_R |XX . XX o C
LCD_TEMP_C |XX . XX o C
BK LIGHT R |XX . XX o C
BK LIGHT H |XX . XX o C
TEC MODE COOL

TEC CMD XXX
HEATER OFF
<INDEX
34-61-00-085.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - TEMP SENSORS
34-61-00
- 419 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - LIGHT SENSORS
General
The light sensors page lets you view internal CDU light
data.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting LIGHT (LSK 4R) on

Light Sensors Page
This page shows the voltage levels from the MCDU light
sensors.

34-61-00-086.fm
34-61-00
- 420 -

CD U MAINT BITE INDEX
<FAU L T S SW OPTIONS>
<KEY TEST P/S>
<COL O R TEST TEMP>
<DIS P L AY TE ST LIGHT>
<CON F I G LAMP TEST>
<EXI T CALIBRATION>
LIG H T SE N S ORS
SENSOR VALUE
AMBIENT LT XXXX.XFc
DIMMER POT XXX.X%
DES LUM XX.X (FT-L)
SPOT BRT XXXX (FT-L)
ARC HIGH XXXX (HEX)
ARC LOW XXXX (HEX)
<INDEX
34-61-00-086.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - LIGHT SENSORS
34-61-00
- 421 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - LAMP TEST
General
The lamp test page lets you verify correct operation of

the CDU annunciators.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting LAMP TEST (LSK 5R)

Lamp Test Page
This page does a test of the MCDU annunciators. The

message ANNUNCIATORS ALL LT shows on the CDU and these
annunciators come on:
- CALL
- FAIL
- MSG
- OFST
- EXEC.

MAINT BITE INDEX page and the annunciators go out.
34-61-00-087.fm
34-61-00
- 422 -

<FAUL TS SW OPTIONS>
<KEY TEST P/S>
<COLO R TEST TEMP>
<DISP LAY TE ST LIGHT>
<CONF IG LAMP TEST>
<EXIT CALIBRATION>
CDU L A M P T ES T
A N N U N C I A T O RS AL L LIT
<INDE X
34-61-00-087.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - LAMP TEST
34-61-00
- 423 -
FMCS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - CALIBRATION
General
The calibration page lets you view internal CDU

calibration data.
Page Access
This page is accessed by selecting CALIBRATION (LSK 6R)

Calibration Page
This page shows the current deflection voltages and

calibration factors for the LCD module. It also shows
the light sensor bias level and the scale factor used.
The scratchpad shows the source of the currently used

data. If the software uses calibrated data, then
CALIBRATED will be shown. If it uses hardcoded
defaults, then DEFAULTS will be shown.

34-61-00-088.fm
34-61-00
- 424 -

C DU MAINT BITE INDEX
< F A UL T S SW OPTIONS>
<KEY T E ST P/S>
< D I SP L A Y TE ST LIGHT>
< C O NF I G LAMP TEST>
< E X IT CALIBRATION>
CDU C A L I B RAT I O N
GS D E F L TRI M
OO X . X v X.X v
16 X . X v X.X v
32 X . X v X.X v
48 X . X v X.X v
63 X . X v X.X v
VC X . X v X.X v
VE X . X v X.X v
LT SEN S B IA S XX X XmV
SCA LE FA C T O R X .X X X
<I NDEX
C A L I B R A TED
34-61-00-088.fm
FMCS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU BITE PAGES - CALIBRATION
34-61-00
- 425 -
FMCS -- SYSTEM SUMMARY
General
34-61-00-070.fm
34-61-00
- 426 -

115V AC 1 28V DC FMC-01
115V AC FMC-01 2
FMC-02 5 FCC A
VOR-02 FMC-02
FMC-05 6
FMC-06 7
DME-01 FMC-07 A DEU 2
VOR/MB FMC-07 8
FMC-08 FDAU
ILS-02 FMC-08
DME UPLINK FMC-06
GPS-01/2 GPWC
FMC-02
XFER RLY DEU 1
MMR DISCRETE FMC-05
CLOCK-01
FMC-06
CDU-01 FDAU
XFR RLY 1
ADR-04
CLOCK SMYD 1
B
FMC-01 C
FMC-02
HGS (OPTION)
ADIRU IR-03
FAIL WARN DME 1
115V AC
DEU-FMC
CDU 1
ELT (OPTION)
DEU A/T-01 115V AC CAP NAV C/P
FAIL WARN
A
FCC A MCP-03 C B
FQPU
DFCS MCP FQPU-05
CDU-01
ACARS MU
FQPU DIU (OPTION)

FMC-04 CDU 2 FMC-01
B 1
DLDR 1 FMC-01 FCC B
2
C FMC-02
LOAD ENABLE
FMC-02
DATA LOADER
CONTROL PANEL ENG 1 BLEED ON/OFF XFER RLY
AIR SWITCH DISCRETE SMYD 2
ENG 2 BLEED ON/OFF
AIR SWITCH
ENGINE 1 ON/OFF
28V DC
ANTICE SW
ENGINE 2 ON/OFF DME 2
ANTICE SW
LEFT PACK OPEN/CLOSE
VALVE INTERSYSTEM
RIGHT PACK OPEN/CLOSE XFR RLY 2
BUS
VALVE OFF/HIGH/
LEFT PACK F/O NAV C/P
AUTO DEU 1
A/C RELAY
RIGHT PACK OFF/HIGH/
A/C RELAY AUTO FMC-09
WING ANTICE ON/OFF
FMC MESSAGE
34-61-00-070.fm
OPEN/CLOSE FMC FAIL DEU 2
A/C ISOL
VALVE FMC FAIL FMC MESSAGE
FMC CONFIG FMC MESSAGE FMC FAIL
28V DC 28V DC
FMC WARN RESET FMC WARN RESET
OPTIONS OPTIONS
FMC 2 RESET CAPT ASA F/O ASA
PROG SW MOD PROG SW MOD FMC 1
FMCS - SYSTEM SUMMARY
34-61-00
- 427 -
HYDRAULIC POWER -- INTRODUCTION
29-00-00-001.fm
29-00-00
- 428 -

General Auxiliary Hydraulic Systems
There are three hydraulic systems that supply hydraulic The auxiliary hydraulic systems are the standby
power for user systems. These systems are the same. hydraulic system and the power transfer unit (PTU)
system.
The main and auxiliary hydraulic systems supply
pressurized fluid to these airplane systems: The standby hydraulic system is a demand system that
supplies reserve hydraulic power to these components:
- The two thrust reversers
- Power transfer unit (PTU) motor - Rudder
- Landing gear extension and retraction - Leading edge flaps and slats
- Nose wheel steering - The two thrust reversers.
- Main gear brakes
- Primary flight controls The hydraulic power transfer unit (PTU) system is an
- Secondary flight controls. alternative source of hydraulic power for the leading
edge flaps and slats and autoslat system.
These systems make up the hydraulic power system:
Hydraulic Indicating Systems
- Main hydraulic systems
- Ground servicing system These are the indicating systems:
- Auxiliary hydraulic systems
- Hydraulic indicating systems. - Hydraulic fluid quantity
- Hydraulic pressure
Main Hydraulic Systems - Hydraulic pump low pressure warning
- Hydraulic fluid overheat warning.
The main hydraulic systems are A and B. System A has
most of its components on the left side of the airplane The hydraulic indicating systems show these indications
and system B on the right side. in the flight compartment:
Ground Servicing System - System A and B reservoir quantity
29-00-00-001.fm
- Standby reservoir low quantity
The ground servicing system fills all hydraulic - System A and B pressure
reservoirs from one central location.
29-00-00
- 429 -
- System A and B engine-driven pump (EDP) low elev - elevator
pressure EMDP - electric motor-driven pump
- System A and B electric motor-driven pump (EMDP) eng - engine
low pressure
exch - exchanger
- Standby electric motor-driven pump low pressure
- System A and B electric motor-driven pump (EMDP) fwd - forward
overheat. gpm - gallons per minute
hyd - hydraulic
Training Information Point flt - flight
gnd - ground
WARNING: HYDRAULIC FLUID, BMS 3-11, CAN CAUSE INJURY TO
kg - kilograms
PERSONS. IF YOU GET THE HYDRAULIC FLUID ON
YOUR SKIN, FLUSH YOUR SKIN WITH WATER. IF YOU kts - knots
GET HYDRAULIC FLUID IN YOUR EYES, FLUSH YOUR LE - leading edge
EYES WITH WATER AND GET MEDICAL AID. IF YOU lt - left
EAT OR DRINK THE HYDRAULIC FLUID, GET MEDICAL MLG - main landing gear
AID. NLG - nose landing gear
norm - normal
The hydraulic systems use BMS 3-11 TYPE IV erosion
arresting, fire resistant hydraulic fluid. press - pressure
PTU - power transfer unit
Abbreviations and Acronyms qty - quantity
rt - right
alt - alternate rud - rudder
APU - auxiliary power unit stby - standby
auto - automatically sys - system
clsd - closed TE - trailing edge
cont - control vlv - valve
CT - current transformer xfr - transfer
29-00-00-001.fm
EDP - engine-driven pump xmfr - transformer
ELCU - electrical load control unit xmtr - transmitter
elec - electrical
29-00-00
- 430 -

HYDRAULIC POWER USER SYSTEMS:

- BOTH THRUST REVERSERS
- POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) MOTOR
- LANDING GEAR EXTENSION AND RETRACTION
- NOSE WHEEL STEERING
- MAIN GEAR BRAKES
- PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS
- SECONDARY FLIGHT CONTROLS
LOW
OVERHEAT QUANTITY
LOW LOW
HYDRAULIC STANDBY PRESSURE PRESSURE
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM A
SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC
HYDRAULIC POWER TRANSFER A B
QTY % 106 76 RF
SYSTEM B UNIT SYSTEM PRESS 2800 2800
29-00-00-001.fm
MAIN HYDRAULIC GROUND SERVICING AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC INDICATING
SYSTEMS SYSTEM SYSTEMS SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC POWER - INTRODUCTION
29-00-00
- 431 -
HYDRAULIC POWER -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Pressurization - Alternate landing gear retraction
- Alternate nose wheel steering
Air pressure from the reservoir pressurization system - Normal brakes
keeps head pressure on hydraulic system A, system B, - Aileron
and the standby hydraulic system reservoirs. - Autopilot B
- Elevators
The pressurized reservoirs supply a constant flow of - Elevator feel
fluid to the hydraulic pumps. - Flight spoilers 3, 5, 8, and 10
- Rudder
Hydraulic System A - Trailing edge flaps
- Leading edge flaps and slats
Hydraulic system A supplies pressure to these airplane - Yaw damper.
systems:
Standby Hydraulic System
- Power transfer unit motor
- Left thrust reverser The standby hydraulic system supplies alternative
- Landing gear extension and retraction hydraulic pressure to these airplane systems:
- Nose wheel steering
- Alternate brakes - The two thrust reversers
- Aileron - Standby rudder
- Autopilot A - Leading edge flaps and slats.
- Elevators
- Elevator feel Hydraulic Power Transfer Unit (PTU) System
- Flight spoilers 2, 4, 9, and 11
- Ground spoilers 1, 6, 7, and 12 The PTU system is a hydraulic motor-pump assembly that
- Rudder. supplies alternative pressure to leading edge flaps and
slats and autoslat system if system B EDP pressure
Hydraulic System B decreases. The PTU control valve controls the PTU.
Hydraulic system B supplies pressure to these airplane System A pressurizes the motor when the PTU control
29-00-00-002.fm
systems: valve is open. System B supplies the fluid to the pump.
- Right thrust reverser
29-00-00
- 432 -

AIR
PRESSURE AIR
SYSTEM PRESSURE
A SYSTEM
B
STBY
M SYSTEM
M M
POWER
TRANSFER
UNIT
PTU CONTROL LEADING EDGE

VALVE FLAPS AND
SLATS AND
AUTO SLATS
LEFT THRUST RUDDER RIGHT THRUST

REVERSER REVERSER
AILERONS
GROUND FLIGHT FLIGHT

SPOILERS SPOILERS ELEVATORS AND YAW
SPOILERS DAMPER
1, 6, 7, 12 2, 4, 9, 11 ELEV FEEL 3, 5, 8, 10
ALTERNATE NOSE WHEEL LANDING ALTERNATE NOSE NORMAL

BRAKES STEERING GEAR WHEEL STEERING BRAKES
29-00-00-002.fm
AUTOPILOT A LANDING GEAR TRAILING
TRANSFER VALVE EDGE FLAPS AUTOPILOT B
HYDRAULIC POWER - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
29-00-00
- 433 -
HYDRAULIC POWER -- OPERATION
29-00-00-004.fm
29-00-00
- 434 -

General Ground Service Cart Pressurization
You pressurize the hydraulic systems with the hydraulic To pressurize hydraulic system A, connect a ground
pumps or a ground service cart. service cart to the left ground service disconnect. To
pressurize hydraulic system B, connect a ground service
Hydraulic Pump Pressurization cart to the right ground service disconnect.
You use the hydraulic panel on the P5 forward overhead You do not pressurize the standby system from a ground
panel to monitor and operate system A and B hydraulic service cart.
pumps.
You use the flight control panel on the P5 forward
overhead panel to monitor and operate the standby pump. WARNING: KEEP PERSONS AND EQUIPMENT AWAY FROM ALL
CONTROL SURFACES AND THE NOSE GEAR WHEN
You can pressurize system A and system B with an HYDRAULIC POWER IS SUPPLIED. THE AILERONS,
engine-driven pump (EDP) or an electric motor-driven ELEVATORS, RUDDER, FLAPS, SLATS, SPOILERS,
pump (EMDP). The ELEC 1 and ELEC 2 switches on the AND THE NOSE GEAR ARE SUPPLIED WITH POWER BY
hydraulic panel let you control the EMDPs. The THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS. INJURIES TO PERSONS OR
hydraulic LOW PRESSURE light is off when the hydraulic DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR WHEN HYDRAULIC
pressure is normal. POWER IS SUPPLIED.
Normally the ENG 1 and ENG 2 switches are in the ON CAUTION: YOU MUST MONITOR THE INSTRUMENTS AND INDICATOR
position. When the engines are on, the EDPs come on to LIGHTS FOR THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS WHEN
pressurize systems A and B. If you move the ENG HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS ARE PRESSURIZED. THIS IS TO
switches to the OFF position, this stops pump output MAKE SURE THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS OPERATE
pressure. CORRECTLY. IF THE OVERHEAT LIGHT OF A
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMES ON, YOU MUST STOP THE
The OVERHEAT lights monitor system A and system B only. OPERATION OF THAT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
The standby hydraulic system does not have an overheat IMMEDIATELY. DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR
light. IF YOU DO NOT DO THIS.
29-00-00-004.fm
29-00-00
- 435 -
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE EMDP FOR MORE THAN TWO
MINUTES IF THE NO. 1 FUEL TANK CONTAINS LESS
THAN 250 GALLONS (1675 POUNDS/760 KILOGRAMS)
OF FUEL. YOU MUST LET THE RESERVOIR
TEMPERATURE DECREASE TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
BEFORE YOU OPERATE THE PUMP AGAIN. DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF YOU DO NOT DO THIS.
If you pressurize the hydraulic systems with the

hydraulic pumps, make sure there is sufficient fuel in
the main fuel tanks to remove heat from the heat
exchangers.
Before you pressurize a hydraulic system with a ground

service cart, you must remove the pressure from the
hydraulic reservoir.
29-00-00-004.fm
29-00-00
- 436 -


A B LOW a
QUANTITY
STBY STBY
LOW a
RUD RUD PRESSURE
OFF OFF STBY a
RUD ON
A ON B ON
ALTERNATE FLAPS
OFF
LOW a LOW a UP
PRESSURE PRESSURE
OFF
SPOILER ARM
A B DOWN
OFF OFF
FEEL a
DIFF PRESS
ON ON SPEED TRIM
FAIL
a
MACH TRIM
YAW DAMPER FAIL a
YAW AUTO SLAT

DAMPER a FAIL a
OFF
ON
P5 FORWARD
OVERHEAD PANEL
RETURN
CONNECTION
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
OVERHEAT OVERHEAT
a a
LOW a LOW a
LOW a LOW a
PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE
ENG 1 ELEC 2 ELEC 1 ENG 2

OFF OFF FWD
29-00-00-004.fm
ON ON
A HYD PUMPS B RIGHT GROUND SERVICE DISCONNECT
HYDRAULIC PANEL (LEFT GROUND SERVICE DISCONNECT SIMILAR)
HYDRAULIC POWER - OPERATION
29-00-00
- 437 -
HYDRAULIC POWER -- CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS
29-00-00-005.fm
29-00-00
- 438 -

General Move one of the two FLT CONTROL A or B switches to the
STBY RUD position to start the standby hydraulic system
The controls and indications for hydraulic power EMDP and open the standby rudder shutoff valve in the
systems are on the hydraulic panel and flight control standby system module.
panel. The hydraulic panel and flight control panel is
on the P5 forward overhead panel in the flight Move the ALTERNATE FLAPS arm switch to the ARM position
compartment. to start the standby hydraulic system EMDP.
Hydraulic Power Controls Indications
The Engine Driven Pumps (EDP) and Electric Motor Driven These are the hydraulic indications in the flight
Pumps (EMDP) each have a switch on the hydraulic panel. compartment for hydraulic systems A and B:
The switches have two positions, ON and OFF.
- Quantity
The ENG 1 HYD PUMP switch controls the EDP for system - System pressure
A. The ENG 2 HYD PUMP switch controls the EDP for - Pump low pressure
system B. Each pump has a depressurization solenoid - Overheat (EMDPs only)
valve. The valve isolates pump output pressure from the - Master caution.
main hydraulic power system when the ENG 1 or ENG 2 HYD
PUMP switch is in the OFF position. These are the indications for the standby hydraulic
system:
The ELEC 2 HYD PUMP switch controls the EMDP for system
A. The ELEC 1 HYD PUMP switch controls the EMDP for - Low quantity
system B. - Low pressure
- Standby rudder on.
Standby Hydraulic System Controls
Hydraulic Pressure Indication
These switches operate components in the standby
hydraulic system: Hydraulic pressure shows on the systems display for
systems A and B.
29-00-00-005.fm
- FLT CONTROL A and B switches
- ALTERNATE FLAPS arm switch
- ALTERNATE FLAPS control switch.
29-00-00
- 439 -
Hydraulic Fluid Quantity Indication Master Caution Indication
Hydraulic fluid quantity shows in percent of full on When one of the amber lights on the hydraulic control
the systems display for systems A and B reservoirs. panel come on, the MASTER CAUTION lights and the HYD
light on the system annunciator panel (P7) also come
The LOW QUANTITY amber light to the right of the FLT on.
CONTROL switches on the flight control panel comes on
when the hydraulic fluid quantity decreases to less When one of the amber lights on the flight control
than normal in the standby hydraulic system reservoir. panel come on, the MASTER CAUTION lights and FLT CONT
light on the system annunciator panel (P7) also come
Hydraulic Pump Low Pressure Warning Indication on.
The amber LOW PRESSURE lights come on for each pump

when the output pressure is less than normal.
The hydraulic systems A and B LOW PRESSURE lights are

above the HYD PUMP control switches on the hydraulic
panel.
The standby system LOW PRESSURE light is to the right

of the FLT CONTROL switches on the flight control
panel.
Hydraulic Fluid Overheat Warning Indication
The amber OVERHEAT lights for the hydraulic system A

and B EMDPs come on when the pump case drain hydraulic
fluid temperature is more than normal. These lights are
above each HYD PUMP control switch on the hydraulic
panel.
29-00-00-005.fm
The standby hydraulic system does not have an overheat
indicator.
29-00-00
- 440 -


A B LOW a
QUANTITY
STBY STBY
LOW a OVERHEAT OVERHEAT
RUD RUD PRESSURE a a
a a
OFF OFF STBY a LOW LOW LOW a LOW a
RUD ON PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE
A ON B ON
ALTERNATE FLAPS ENG 1 ELEC 2 ELEC 1 ENG 2
OFF OFF
OFF
LOW a LOW a UP ON ON
PRESSURE PRESSURE A HYD PUMPS B
OFF
SPOILER HYDRAULIC PANEL (P5)
ARM
A B DOWN
OFF OFF
FEEL a
DIFF PRESS
MASTER
ON ON SPEED TRIM
ANTI-ICE ENG
CAUTION
FAIL HYD OVERHEAD
a PUSH TO RESET
MACH TRIM DOORS AIR COND

YAW DAMPER FAIL a
YAW AUTO SLAT RIGHT MASTER CAUTION

FAIL a
DAMPER a ANNUNCIATOR (P7)
OFF
ON
FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL (P5)

HYDRAULIC
A B
MASTER FLT CONT ELEC QTY % 106 76 RF
CAUTION
PUSH TO RESET
IRS APU PRESS 2800 2800
29-00-00-005.fm
FUEL OVHT/DET
LEFT MASTER CAUTION

ANNUNCIATOR (P7) SYSTEMS DISPLAY
HYDRAULIC POWER - CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS
29-00-00
- 441 -
FLIGHT CONTROLS -- INTRODUCTION
General Abbreviations and Acronyms
The flight controls keep the airplane at the necessary A/P - autopilot
attitude during flight. They have movable surfaces on A/S - airspeed
the wing and the empennage. These are the two types of C/W - control wheel
flight control systems:
CB - circuit breaker
- Primary cntl - control
- Secondary. dc - direct current
FCC - flight control computer
Primary Flight Control System FLT - flight
gnd - ground
The primary flight control system moves the airplane
LE - leading edge
about three axes, lateral, longitudinal, and vertical.
The primary flight control system has these components: MLG - main landing gear
NLG - nose landing gear
- Aileron (2) PCU - power control unit
- Elevator (2) psi - pounds per square inch
- Rudder. RUD - rudder
S/B - speedbrake
Secondary Flight Controls
sec - section
The secondary flight controls make the lift and SOV - shutoff valve
handling properties of the airplane better. The stab - stabilizer
secondary flight control system has these components: STBY - standby
sw - switch
- Leading edge devices (12)
sys - system
- Trailing edge flaps (4)
- Spoilers and speedbrakes (12) TE - trailing edge
- Horizontal stabilizer. typ - typical
27-00-00-001.fm
vlv - valve
v - volt
xfer - transfer
27-00-00
- 442 -

RUDDER
YAW
LONGITUDINAL
AXIS
ELEVATORS (2)
LATERAL
AXIS
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
TE FLAPS (4)
SPOILERS (12)
AILERONS (2)
LE FLAPS LE SLATS
(4) (8)
ROLL
PITCH
27-00-00-001.fm
VERTICAL
AXIS
FLIGHT CONTROLS - INTRODUCTION
27-00-00
- 443 -
FLIGHT CONTROLS -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION
27-00-00-004.fm
27-00-00
- 444 -

General spoiler actuators. The mixer moves the ground spoiler
control valve. The valve supplies hydraulic pressure to
The pilots manually operate the flight controls through the ground spoiler interlock valve. When the interlock
cables. The autopilot automatically operates them. valve opens pressure goes to the actuators to move the
spoilers.
Aileron
During automatic deployment, the auto speedbrake
The aileron control wheels move cables that give input actuator gives input to the same cables as above. It
to the aileron feel and centering unit. This controls also backdrives the speedbrake lever.
the aileron power control units (PCU). The PCUs move
the aileron wing cables and the ailerons. Elevator
The aileron trim switches give an input to the aileron The control columns move cables that give input to the
feel and centering unit. They change the neutral elevator feel and centering unit. This controls the
position of the ailerons. elevator PCUs. The PCUs move torque tubes that move the
elevators.
Aileron PCU movement also goes to the spoiler mixer and
ratio changer. The spoiler mixer and ratio changer The autopilot actuators give a mechanical input to the
moves the flight spoiler wing cables. The spoiler wing PCUs through the feel and centering unit. The PCU moves
cables control the flight spoiler actuators. The the elevators.
actuators move the flight spoilers to help the ailerons
for roll control. Horizontal Stabilizer
The autopilot actuators give a mechanical input to the The stabilizer trim wheels move cables that give an
PCUs through the feel and centering unit. The PCUs move input to the gearbox. The gearbox moves a jackscrew and
the aileron wing cables and the ailerons. The PCUs also moves the stabilizer.
give input to the spoiler mixer and ratio changer.
The electric stabilizer trim switches control an
Spoilers and Speedbrakes electric motor near the gearbox. The motor moves the
gears to move the stabilizer. The autopilot also
27-00-00-004.fm
The speedbrake lever moves cables that control the controls the stabilizer trim motor.
spoiler mixer and ratio changer. The ratio changer
moves the spoiler wing cables that control the flight
27-00-00
- 445 -
When the stabilizer moves, it also moves the elevators
through the elevator feel and centering unit.
Rudder
The rudder pedals move cables that give an input to the

rudder feel and centering unit. This controls the
rudder PCUs. The rudder PCUs move the rudder.
The rudder trim switch gives an input to the rudder

feel and centering unit. This changes the neutral
position of the rudder.
Flaps and Slats
The flap control lever moves the trailing edge flap

control valve. Hydraulic pressure goes through the
valve and drives the PDU hydraulic motor. The hydraulic
motor supplies power to the flap drive system and the
flaps move. Follow-up cables give feedback to the
trailing edge flap control valve to stop the flaps at
the commanded position.
The follow-up cables also give an input to the leading

edge flaps control valve. This controls the position of
the leading edge devices. Hydraulic pressure goes to
the actuators and moves the leading edge flaps and
slats.
The ALTERNATE FLAP switches electrically control the
27-00-00-004.fm
trailing edge flaps. They also control the standby
hydraulic system to extend the leading edge flaps and
slats.
27-00-00
- 446 -

RUDDER FEEL AND

PCU (2) RUDDER
CENTERING UNIT
AILERON FEEL AND

CENTERING UNIT PCU (2) AILERON (2)
AUTO RATIO
SPEEDBRAKE SPLR MXR CHANGER
15 10
RUDDER TRIM
5 0 5 10 15
ACTUATOR
LEFT RIGHT
GND ACTUATOR (8) FLIGHT
AILERON
NOSE NOSE SPOILER SPOILER (8)

LEFT RIGHT
R
U
D
CNTL VLV
LEFT RIGHT D
WING WING E
R
DOWN DOWN
GND
SPOILER GROUND
ACTUATOR (6) SPOILER (4)
INTL VLV
ELEC
MTR
TE FLAPS HYD PDU
MTR TE FLAP (4)
CNTL VLV
FOLLOW-UP CABLE
LE FLAPS ACTUATOR (12) LE FLAP (4)
CNTL VLV & SLAT (8)
FCU STBY HYD

SYSTEM
AUTOPILOT AUTOPILOT ELEVATOR FEEL AND
INPUTS ACTUATORS CENTERING UNIT PCU (2) ELEVATOR (2)
27-00-00-004.fm
NEUTRAL SHIFT RODS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
MECHANICAL CONNECTION ELECTRIC STABILIZER HORIZONTAL
MOTOR GEARBOX STABILIZER
HYDRAULIC CONNECTION
FLIGHT CONTROLS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
27-00-00
- 447 -
FLIGHT CONTROLS MULTIPLE USE SYSTEMS/UNITS -- FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL
27-09-00-003.fm
27-09-00
- 448 -

Purpose - Ailerons
- Elevators
The flight control panel has hydraulic control switches - Elevator feel computer
and caution lights for some of the flight control - Rudder.
systems.
Each flight control LOW PRESSURE light monitors the
Location position of the standby rudder shutoff valve when the
flight control switch is in the STDBY RUD position.
The flight control panel is in the flight compartment
on the P5 forward overhead panel. Flight SPOILER Switch (2)
FLT CONTROL Switch (2) There are two flight SPOILER switches, one for
hydraulic system A and one for hydraulic system B. Each
There are two FLT CONTROL switches, one for hydraulic flight SPOILER switch has these positions:
system A and one for hydraulic system B. Each FLT
CONTROL switch has these positions: - OFF - removes system pressure from the flight
spoilers
- STDBY RUD position - removes system pressure from - ON - system pressure is on to the flight spoilers;
ailerons, elevators, elevator feel computer, and this position is normal with the guard closed.
rudder; operates the standby pump and pressurizes
the standby rudder power control unit Yaw Damper Switch and Warning Light
- OFF position - removes system pressure from
ailerons, elevators, elevator feel computer, and The yaw damper switch controls the yaw damper system
rudder operation. The YAW DAMPER warning light comes on when
- ON position - system pressure is on to the the system disengages.
ailerons, elevators, elevator feel computer, and
rudder; this position is normal with the guard See the yaw damper system section for more information
closed. (ATA 22-23).
Flight Control LOW PRESSURE Light Standby Hydraulic System Lights
27-09-00-003.fm
Each flight control LOW PRESSURE light monitors the These are the indications shown on the panel:
pressure to:
27-09-00
- 449 -
- The STBY RUDDER ON light comes on when the standby The SPEED TRIM FAIL light comes on when the speed trim
rudder system is in operation function in the flight control computers (FCCs) is not
- The standby hydraulic LOW QUANTITY light comes on available.
when the standby reservoir quantity is low
- The standby hydraulic LOW PRESSURE light comes on See the digital flight control system section for more
when the standby system pressure is low. information (ATA 22-11).
See the standby hydraulic system section for more The MACH TRIM FAIL light comes on when the mach trim
information (ATA 29-22). function in the flight control computers (FCCs) is not
available.
ALTERNATE FLAPS Arm Switch and Control Switch
See the digital flight control system section for more
You use the ALTERNATE FLAPS arm switch and the information (ATA 22-11).
alternate flaps control switch for alternate flaps
operation. The AUTO SLAT FAIL light comes on when the autoslat
function is not available.
See the TE flap system section for more information
about the alternate flaps switches and the functional See the LE autoslat system section for more information
description of alternate operation (ATA 27-51). about the LE autoslat system functional description
(ATA 27-83).
See the LE flap and slat control system section for
more information about alternate operation (ATA 27-81).
Flight Control Panel Warning Lights
The FEEL DIFF PRESS light comes on when there is a

difference between the system A and system B metered
pressures in the elevator feel computer.
See the elevator and tab control system section for
27-09-00-003.fm
more information about the elevator feel computer
functional description (ATA 27-31).
27-09-00
- 450 -

SYSTEM A FLIGHT STANDBY HYDRAULIC

CONTROL SWITCH FLT CONTROL STANDBY HYD LOW QUANTITY LIGHT
A B LOW a STANDBY HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM B FLIGHT STBY STBY
QUANTITY
LOW PRESSURE LIGHT
LOW a
CONTROL SWITCH RUD RUD PRESSURE
OFF OFF STBY a
STANDBY RUDDER ON
A ON B ON
RUD ON LIGHT
SYSTEM A FLIGHT ALTERNATE FLAPS
CONTROL LOW ALTERNATE FLAPS
OFF
PRESSURE LIGHT ARM SWITCH
UP
LOW
PRESSURE
a
LOW
PRESSURE
a
ALTERNATE FLAPS
SYSTEM B FLIGHT OFF CONTROL SWITCH
SPOILER ARM
CONTROL LOW A B DOWN
PRESSURE LIGHT
SYSTEM A FLIGHT OFF OFF
FEEL DIFFERENTIAL
SPOILER SWITCH FEEL
DIFF PRESS
a
PRESSURE LIGHT
ON ON SPEED TRIM
SYSTEM B FLIGHT
FAIL
a
SPEED TRIM FAIL LIGHT
MACH TRIM
SPOILER SWITCH YAW DAMPER FAIL a
YAW AUTO SLAT

FAIL a
MACH TRIM FAIL LIGHT
DAMPER a
YAW DAMPER LIGHT
AUTO SLAT FAIL LIGHT
OFF
YAW DAMPER SWITCH ON
27-09-00-003.fm
P5 FORWARD OVERHEAD PANEL
FLIGHT CONTROLS MULTIPLE USE SYSTEMS/UNITS - FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL
27-09-00
- 451 -
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION
Purpose LE - leading edge
MLG - main landing gear
The ailerons control the flight attitude of the NLG - nose landing gear
airplane around the longitudinal axis.
Location S/B - speedbrake
SOV - shutoff valve
The ailerons are on the wing outboard trailing edge. STAB - stabilizer
TE - trailing edge
Roll Control xfer - transfer
During roll control the aileron on one wing moves up,

and the aileron on the other wing moves down.
The pilots turn the control wheels to control roll

manually. When the autopilot engages, it automatically
controls the ailerons. During autopilot operation
actuators give inputs to move the control wheels.
The flight spoilers also supply roll control.
See the flight spoiler control system section for more

information on the spoiler and speedbrake control (ATA
27-61).
A/P - autopilot
A/S - airspeed
C/W - control wheel
27-11-00-001.fm
CWS - control wheel steering
FDAU - flight data acquisition unit
27-11-00
- 452 -

AILERON LONGITUDINAL
AXIS
AILERON
ROLL
27-11-00-001.fm
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION
27-11-00
- 453 -
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-11-00-002.fm
27-11-00
- 454 -

General See the digital flight control system section for more
information about the FCCs and the roll CWS force
The pilots use the control wheels to move the ailerons transducer (ATA 22-11).
and flight spoilers. When the autopilot engages, it
automatically controls them. See the stall warning system section for more
information about the SMYDs (ATA 27-32).
Manual Operation - Control Wheels
See the flight data recorder system section for more
The pilots use two control wheels to control the roll information about the aileron control wheel position
attitude of the airplane. A transfer mechanism on the sensor and FDAU (ATA 31-31).
first officer side supplies a mechanical link between
the control wheels. If one control wheel can not move, Manual Operation - Control Wheels - Manual Reversion
the other continues to control.
During manual reversion the control wheel gives
The control wheel gives mechanical input to the power mechanical input to the power control unit (PCU)
control unit (PCU) through cables and linkages. through cables and linkages. Mechanical stops in the
Hydraulic pressure goes to the PCU and makes the PCU make the housing move. The aileron PCU movement
housing move. The aileron PCU movement mechanically mechanically moves the aileron through the wing cables
moves the aileron through the wing cables and the and the quadrant.
quadrant.
Manual Operation - Aileron Trim
When the control wheel moves, it also gives a
mechanical input to the roll control wheel steering The aileron trim switches and the trim actuator let the
(CWS) force transducer and the control wheel position flight crew adjust out unwanted control wheel forces.
sensor. The roll CWS force transducer sends signals to When the pilots move the aileron trim switches on the
the flight control computers (FCCs) proportional to aileron/rudder trim panel, the switches send a signal
control wheel turning forces. The control wheel to the aileron trim actuator and FDAU. The trim
position sensor sends signals to the stall management actuator moves the feel and centering unit. This
yaw damper (SMYD) and flight data acquisition unit movement goes to the aileron PCU. Aileron PCU movement
(FDAU) for control wheel position. mechanically moves the aileron through the wing cables
27-11-00-002.fm
and quadrant.
27-11-00
- 455 -
During aileron trim the control wheels also move and Flight Spoilers
supply an indication on the top of the control wheel
column. The flight spoilers also supply roll control. When the
aileron PCU moves, it supplies an input to the flight
Autopilot Operation spoiler system.
When the flight control computers engage, they control See the flight spoiler control system section for more
the aileron autopilot actuators. The actuators give information about the spoiler and speedbrake control
mechanical input to the feel and centering unit and (ATA 27-61).
aileron position sensor. Movement of the feel and
centering unit goes to the aileron PCU, and the signal
from the aileron position sensor go to the FCCs. The
aileron PCU movement moves the aileron through the wing
cables and the quadrant. The quadrant also gives
mechanical input to the aileron position transmitter.
The transmitter sends position signals to the SMYD and
FDAU.

information about the aileron autopilot operation and
aileron position sensor (ATA 22-11).
See the stall warning system section for more

information about the SMYDs (ATA 27-32).
See the flight data recorder system section for more

information about the aileron position transmitter (ATA
31-31).
27-11-00-002.fm
27-11-00
- 456 -

CONTROL WHEELS
AILERON
LEFT RIGHT
WING WING
DOWN DOWN
AILERON/RUDDER
TRIM PANEL (P8)
CONTROL STAND
FDAU
FLIGHT SPOILER AILERON POSITION

AILERON TRIM SYSTEM TRANSMITTER (2)
ACTUATOR
ROLL CWS FORCE

TRANSDUCER AILERON FEEL AND
CENTERING UNIT AILERON PCU (2) AILERON (2)
AILERON POSITION
FCC (2) SENSOR
27-11-00-002.fm
CONTROL LEGEND
WHEEL POSITION AILERON AUTOPILOT SMYD
SENSOR (2) ACTUATOR (2) ELECTRICAL
MECHANICAL
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-11-00
- 457 -
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- AILERON CONTROL WHEEL
Purpose
The flight crew uses two control wheels for roll

control operation.
Location
The aileron control wheels are on the top of the two

elevator control columns.
The aileron control wheels are similar to control

wheels in other Boeing airplanes. The outboard side of
each wheel contains the stabilizer trim switches and
the autopilot disengage switches. The aileron trim
indicator placard is on the top of the control wheel.
When the pilot turns the control wheel, the control

cables move. Mechanical stops in the aileron control
wheel drum and aileron transfer mechanism keep the
control wheel movement to a limit of 107.5 degrees left
and right.
27-11-00-004.fm
27-11-00
- 458 -

AILERON TRIM
INDICATOR
CAPTAIN
CONTROL
WHEEL
CAPTAIN
CONTROL STABILIZER
COLUMN TRIM SWITCHES
AUTOPILOT
DISENGAGE
SWITCHES
27-11-00-004.fm
FWD
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - AILERON CONTROL WHEEL
27-11-00
- 459 -
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
27-11-00-014.fm
27-11-00
- 460 -

General Functional Description - Manual
The aileron control system and the flight spoilers use Manual operation is almost the same as normal operation
cable movement input from the control wheels. with one difference. There is three degrees of control
wheel movement at the aileron PCUs before the input
Physical Description crank touches the mechanical stops. Then the PCU
housing moves, but the pilot supplies the force.
The aileron control system has these cables:
Functional Description - One Control Can Not Move
- ACBA and ACBB; bus drum cables
- AA and AB; left and right body cables If one control wheel can not move, that side cable will
- ABSA and ABSB; left and right wing cables. not move.
Two spring mechanisms isolate the aileron system from If the right control wheel can not move, the crew can
the flight spoilers. They are the transfer mechanism only use the left control wheel to move the ailerons
and the aileron spring cartridge. normally.
Functional Description - Normal If the left control wheel can not move, the crew can
only use the right control wheel. This will move the
When the control wheels move, the left body cables move right body cables after 12 degrees of control wheel
and control the PCUs. The PCU housing moves and movement. This controls the flight spoiler actuators to
controls the aileron wing cables. move after a predetermined amount of control wheel
movement.
When the PCU housing moves, it also controls the right
body cables and completes the loop to the right control Functional Description - One Aileron Can Not Move
column. It also controls the spoiler wing cables
through the spoiler mixer. This controls the flight If one aileron can not move, the shear rivets on the
spoiler actuators to move after some control wheel body quadrant shear and isolate this aileron. The other
movement. part of the aileron control system operates normally.
27-11-00-014.fm
27-11-00
- 461 -
Functional Description - One PCU Input Can Not Move
If one PCU pogo input can not move freely, it

compresses or extends. The other PCU pogo still moves
to the commanded position. This equalizes pressure on
both sides of the actuator. This prevents hydraulic
lock to the PCU and lets the other PCU move it through
the aileron body quadrant.
27-11-00-014.fm
27-11-00
- 462 -

FIRST OFFICER
CONTROL WHEEL
BUS DRUM (2)

CAPTAIN ACBA SPOILER CONTROL DRUM
CONTROL TRANSFER MECHANISM
WHEEL AND LOST MOTION DEVICE
ACBB
AILERON
CONTROL
DRUM
AA AB AILERON POSITION
WING TRANSMITTER
QUADRANT (2) (NOT SHOWN) (2)
AA AB
ABSA
SPOILER
AILERON CONTROL ABSB
CONTROL QUADRANT
QUADRANT
AILERON (2)
BREAKOUT
ABSB MECHANISM BALANCE TAB (2)
ABSA
AILERON SPRING
CARTRIDGE
BODY QUADRANT (2)
AILERON PCU (2)
27-11-00-014.fm
AILERON A/P MECHANICAL STOPS (2)
ACTUATOR (2) (3 DEGREES WHEEL DELAY)
POGO INPUTS (4)
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
27-11-00
- 463 -
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- AILERON PCU LINKAGE
Purpose When the shaft moves, it moves the input pogo cranks.
This moves the input pogos that control the aileron
The aileron PCU linkage sends the aileron inputs to the PCUs.
aileron PCUs.
Location
The aileron PCU linkage is on the left forward bulkhead

of the main landing gear wheel well.
The aileron PCU linkage includes these components:
- Control quadrant
- Input shaft
- Autopilot input rod
- Aileron feel and centering unit
- Aileron trim actuator
- Input pogo cranks (4)
- Input pogo (4)
- Reaction links (2).
The aileron input shaft receives inputs from these:
- Pilot through the aileron control quadrant

- Autopilot through the aileron autopilot input rod
- Trim switches through the aileron trim actuator.
27-11-00-007.fm
27-11-00
- 464 -

AILERON
CONTROL
QUADRANT
AUTOPILOT AILERON AILERON BODY

AILERON QUADRANT (2)
INPUT ROD INPUT PCU (2)
SHAFT
SPOILER INPUT POGO

INPUT SHAFT CRANKS (4)
AILERON TRIM
AILERON AILERON ACTUATOR
INPUT SPRING
SHAFT CARTRIDGE
BREAKOUT
MECHANISM
INPUT POGO (4)

FWD FEEL AND REACTION
CENTERING UNIT LINKS (2)
AILERON PCU LINKAGE
(VIEW FROM LEFT MLG WHEEL WELL)
27-11-00-007.fm
AILERON PCU LINKAGE
(VIEW FROM RIGHT MLG WHEEL WELL)
AILERON AND AILERON TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - AILERON PCU LINKAGE
27-11-00
- 465 -
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION
Purpose WTRIS - wheel-to-rudder interconnect system
The rudder controls the flight attitude of the airplane

around the vertical axis.
Location
The rudder has hinges aft of the rear spar of the

vertical stabilizer.
Yaw control
The pilots manually give a yaw input command with the

rudder pedals. When the yaw damper engages, it
automatically makes small yaw corrections. During yaw
damper operation, there is no feedback to the rudder
pedals.
ac - alternating current
auth - authority
EHSV - electrohydraulic servo valve
FSEU - flap/slat electronic unit
Hz - Hertz
LVDT - linear variable differential transformer
27-21-00-001.fm
soln - solenoid
v - Volt
vlv - valve
27-21-00
- 466 -

VERTICAL
STABILIZER
YAW
RUDDER
27-21-00-001.fm
VERTICAL
AXIS
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION
27-21-00
- 467 -
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-21-00-002.fm
27-21-00
- 468 -

General Manual Operation - Rudder Trim
The pilot uses the rudder pedals or the rudder trim The rudder trim control and the trim actuator let the
control to control the rudder. The yaw damper and flight crew adjust out unwanted rudder pedal forces.
wheel-to-rudder interconnect system controls the rudder When the pilot moves the rudder trim control on the
automatically. aisle stand, the control sends signals to the rudder
trim actuator and the FDAU. The rudder trim actuator
Manual Operation - Rudder Pedals moves the feel and centering unit. This movement makes
an input to the rudder PCUs. The rudder trim actuator
The flight crew uses the rudder pedals to control the also sends signals to the rudder position indicator on
rudder through these components: the aisle stand above the rudder trim control.
- Forward quadrants Yaw Damper

- Control cables
- Aft quadrant and output rod The yaw damper keeps the airplane stable around the
- Feel and centering unit vertical axis. When the yaw damper system engages, it
- Main rudder PCU. gives input to the main or the standby rudder PCUs.
During normal operation, SMYD 1 controls the rudder
The aft quadrant output rod also has an integral rudder through the main rudder PCU. During manual reversion
pedal force transducer. The force transducer sends SMYD 2 controls the rudder through the standby rudder
force data to the flight data acquisition unit. See the PCU.
flight data recorder system section for more
information about the rudder pedal force transducer See the yaw damper system section for more information
(ATA 31-31). about yaw damper (ATA 22-23).
Movement of the feel and centering unit also gives a See the stall management yaw damper system section for
backdrive of the rudder pedals through the rudder more information about stall management yaw damper (ATA
control system. Rudder PCU movement moves the rudder 27-32).
and the rudder position transmitter. The rudder
position transmitter sends position to the flight data Wheel-To-Rudder Interconnect System (WTRIS)
27-21-00-002.fm
acquisition unit (FDAU). See the flight data recorder
system section for more information about the rudder The WTRIS helps lateral control during manual reversion
position sensor and FDAU (ATA 31-31). turns. The WTRIS system gives a small rudder movement
27-21-00
- 469 -
in response to control wheel inputs. When the WTRIS
engages, it gives input to the standby rudder PCU.
See the wheel-to-rudder interconnect system section for

more information (ATA 27-24).
Authority Limiter
The authority limiter decreases the maximum rudder

movement. At specified air speeds the FSEU opens the
main rudder PCU authority limiter solenoid valves. This
puts a limit on hydraulic system A and hydraulic system
B pressure in the PCU, which puts a limit on the rudder
authority.
27-21-00-002.fm
27-21-00
- 470 -

WTRIS
STANDBY YAW DAMPER
SMYD 2
RUDDER PEDAL
FORCE TRANSDUCER
STANDBY PCU
RUDDER PEDALS AND
FORWARD QUADRANTS RUDDER FEEL AND
CENTERING UNIT
MAIN PCU
RUDDER TRIM
15 10 5 0 5 10 15
LEFT RIGHT
RUDDER TRIM
AILERON ACTUATOR
NOSE
LEFT
NOSE
RIGHT
RUDDER
R
U
D
LEFT RIGHT D
WING WING E
DOWN DOWN R
YAW DAMPER AUTHORITY LIMITER

AILERON/RUDDER
TRIM PANEL (P8)
SMYD 1 FSEU
RUDDER POSITION
RUDDER PEDAL FDAU TRANSMITTER
27-21-00-002.fm
POSITION SENSOR
LEGEND
ELECTRICAL
MECHANICAL
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-21-00
- 471 -
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- RUDDER PEDALS AND FORWARD QUADRANTS
Purpose bus rod and makes the other pair of pedals move
equally.
The pilots use the rudder pedals to command a yaw
control through the rudder forward quadrants. You can adjust the rudder pedals to fit your body size.
When you move the crank, the crank moves the yoke. This
Location moves your pair of pedals, but has no effect on the
other pair of pedals.
The rudder pedals are in the flight compartment. The
rudder pedal support and forward quadrant assemblies
are in the forward equipment compartment.
Each pedal assembly has these components:
- Pedals (2)
- Pedal arm (2)
- Pushrods (2)
- Yoke
- Jackshaft
- Bus rod
- Forward quadrant
- Adjustment crank
- Adjustment flexshaft
- Pedal adjustment nut.
The pedals of each pair move in opposite direction to

each other. When the pedals move, they move the
27-21-00-004.fm
pushrods and the jackshaft yoke. This moves the
jackshaft and the forward quadrant. This also moves the
27-21-00
- 472 -

RUDDER
PEDAL
ADJUSTMENT
CRANK (2)
RUDDER
PEDAL
POSITION
RUDDER SENSOR
PEDAL (4)
RUDDER
FORWARD
PEDAL QUADRANT (2)
ARM (4)
PUSHROD (4)
YOKE (2)
FLEXSHAFT (2) RUDDER
27-21-00-004.fm
CABLES
BUS ROD
JACKSHAFT
ASSEMBLY (2)
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - RUDDER PEDALS AND FORWARD QUADRANTS
27-21-00
- 473 -
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- AFT COMPONENTS
Purpose operation during failures like a PCU valve jam or PCU
input lever disconnect. If there is a jam in the PCU
The aft rudder control components transmit rudder pedal input path, pilot rudder pedal input continues to turn
input to the hydraulic power control units (PCUs). the torque tube and move the spring loaded roller out
of the cam. A minimum of 18 pounds of pedal force is
Location necessary to operate the override assembly for breakout
during a jam. The pilot uses the rudder pedals to move
The aft rudder control components are in the vertical the rudder back to neutral for rudder deflection caused
stabilizer, forward of the hydraulic PCUs. by a single PCU rate jam. The overrides can operate
during high cycle use and go back to the original
Physical Description position after movement.
These are the aft rudder control components: The rudder pedal force transducer sends signals to the
flight data acquisition unit (FDAU). See the flight
- Rudder aft quadrant data recorder system section for more information about
- Quadrant pushrod the FDAU (ATA 31-31).
- Rudder pedal force transducer
- Input override assembly (3)
- Rudder control torque tube and cranks.
When the rudder cables move, they move the aft control
quadrant. This moves the quadrant output rod and the
torque tube and cranks. When the rudder control torque
tube turns, it moves the input rods to the main PCU and
to the standby PCU. It also turns the feel and
centering unit out of the detent position.
There are override assemblies on each of the three
27-21-00-005.fm
inputs to the hydraulic PCUs. There are two inputs for
the main PCU and one input for the standby PCU.
Override assemblies in each of the input paths permit
27-21-00
- 474 -

VERTICAL
STABILIZER FWD
RUDDER SPRING
CAM
ROLLER
STANDBY
RUDDER PCU
TORQUE INPUT ROD
TUBE
OVERRIDE ASSEMBLY - BOTTOM VIEW

OVERRIDE (SHOWN ROTATED 90 DEGREES)
RUDDER PEDAL ASSEMBLY (3)
FORCE TRANSDUCER
RUDDER
AFT QUADRANT
MAIN
RUDDER PCU
INPUT RODS
RUDDER CRANK (5)

CABLES
RUDDER FEEL AND
CENTERING UNIT
27-21-00-005.fm
RUDDER QUADRANT
OUTPUT ROD
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - AFT COMPONENTS
27-21-00
- 475 -
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- STANDBY RUDDER PCU - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Physical Description - Both FLT CONTROL switches A and B are in the STBY
RUD position
The PCU contains these components: - Either A or B FLT CONTROL switches are in the STBY
RUD position and the other is not in the ON
- Bypass valve position.
- Inlet filter
- Control valve, integrated with the yaw damper When the WTRIS engages, the solenoid valve moves. This
actuator sends pressure to the EHSV. When the EHSV moves, it
- Yaw damper LVDT sends pressure to the yaw damper actuator. The yaw
- Solenoid valve damper actuator moves. It applies pressure to one
- Shuttle valve chamber and opens the other to return. The standby
- Electro hydraulic servo valve. rudder PCU piston moves and this moves the rudder 2.5
degrees either side of neutral.
See the wheel-to-rudder interconnect section for more
When standby hydraulic pressure is on, it opens the information. (AMM PART I 27-24)
bypass valve and connects the actuator chambers to
separate control ports.
When the pilot moves the rudder pedals, the rudder

input rod moves. This moves the external summing lever
and the input crank. This positions the control valve
to apply pressure to one chamber and open the other to
return. The standby rudder PCU piston moves the rudder.
This also moves the control valve to reset when the
rudder moves to the position that the pilot selected.
Wheel-To-Rudder Interconnect System (WTRIS)
The WTRIS system in SMYD 2 gives input to the standby
27-21-00-013.fm
PCU to help in a manual reversion turn. The WTRIS
engages when the YAW DAMPER switch is ON and either of
the following conditions:
27-21-00
- 476 -

STANDBY
RESERVOIR YAW DAMPER
EHSV
STANDBY
EMDP
STANDBY
RUDDER
SHUTOFF
VALVE
YAW DAMPER
LVDT
INTEGRATED
CONTROL
VALVE AND
SOLENOID YAW DAMPER
VALVE
ACTUATOR
S
SHUTTLE VALVE
BYPASS VALVE
PILOT
INLET INLET INPUT
27-21-00-013.fm
FILTER CHECK
VALVE
RUDDER
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - STANDBY RUDDER PCU - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
27-21-00
- 477 -
ELEVATOR AND TAB CONTROL SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION
Purpose gnd - ground
LE - leading edge
The elevators control the pitch attitude of the MLG - main landing gear
airplane about the lateral axis.
NLG - nose landing gear
Location PCU - power control unit
S/B - speedbrake
The elevators are on the trailing edge of the sec - section
horizontal stabilizer. SOV - shutoff valve
stab - stabilizer
Pitch control
SW - switch
The pilots manually control the position of the TE - trailing edge
elevators with forward and aft movement of the control vlv - valve
column. xfer - transfer
When the autopilot engages, it automatically controls

the position of the elevators. During autopilot
operation, inputs from the autopilot actuators
backdrive the control columns through the elevator
control system.
A/P - autopilot
A/S - airspeed
C/W - control wheel
CWS - control wheel steering
cntrl - control
27-31-00-001.fm
EFSM - elevator feel shift module
27-31-00
- 478 -

ELEVATOR (2)
LATERAL
AXIS
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
PITCH
27-31-00-001.fm
ELEVATOR AND TAB CONTROL SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION
27-31-00
- 479 -
ELEVATOR AND TAB CONTROL SYSTEM -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-31-00-002.fm
27-31-00
- 480 -

General transmitters. The elevator surface position sensor
sends elevator position to the FCCs. The elevator
The pilot controls the elevators manually. The position transmitters send elevator position to the
autopilot system controls them automatically. FDAU.
Manual Operation - Control Column See the digital flight control system section for more
information about the pitch CWS force transducers, the
The pilot moves the control column forward or aft to elevator neutral shift sensor, the elevator surface
control the pitch attitude of the airplane. The control position sensor, and the FCCs. (AMM PART I 22-11)
column gives a mechanical input to the elevator power
control unit (PCU) through cables and linkages to the See the flight data recorder section for more
input torque tube. The input torque tube gives input to information about the control column sensors, elevator
the elevator pogos. The pogos give input to the position transmitters, and the FDAU. (AMM PART I 31-31)
elevator PCUs that use hydraulic pressure to
mechanically move the elevator through the output Autopilot Operation
torque tube.
When you engage the autopilot, the autopilot system
When the control column moves, it also gives an input uses FCC inputs to control the autopilot actuators.
to the pitch control wheel steering (CWS) force When the autopilot actuators move, they give a
transducers and the control column position sensors. mechanical input to the elevator PCUs.
The pitch CWS force transducers send control column
force to the flight control computers (FCCs). The See the digital flight control system section for more
control column sensors send control column position to information about the autopilot. (AMM PART I 22-11)
the flight data acquisition unit (FDAU).
Autopilot Operation - Mach Trim Actuator
Movement of the feel and centering unit also gives an
input to the elevator neutral shift sensor. The The mach trim actuator moves the elevators to prevent
elevator neutral shift sensor sends relative position nose down forces at high air speeds. The FCCs control
of the elevator and stabilizer to the flight control the mach trim actuator. When the mach trim actuator
computers (FCCs). moves, it gives a mechanical input to the elevator PCUs
27-31-00-002.fm
through the feel and centering unit.
Movement of the elevators also gives an input to the
elevator surface position sensor and position
27-31-00
- 481 -
See the digital flight control system section for more The elevator feel computer uses pitot pressure and
information about the mach trim actuator. (AMM PART I stabilizer input to control hydraulic pressure to the
22-11) dual feel actuator in the feel and centering unit. The
feel force of the feel and centering unit increases as
FCC Operation - Neutral Shift the airspeed increases.
The FCC controls the neutral shift function. The FCC Elevator Feel Shift Module
uses the mach trim actuator, through the feel and
centering unit to move the elevator to a new neutral During a stall, the elevator feel shift module (EFSM)
position. This gives more airplane nose up control provides 850 psi system A pressure to the elevator feel
during takeoff and landing. computer and the dual feel actuator. This causes the
feel force of the control column and the feel and
Stabilizer Operation - Neutral Shift centering unit to increase.
The stabilizer neutral shift function causes the See the stall warning system section for more
elevators to move when the stabilizer moves. When the information about the elevator feel shift module
stabilizer moves, it gives a mechanical input to the operation. (AMM PART I 27-32)
elevator PCUs through the mach trim actuator and the
feel and centering unit. Elevator Tab
See the horizontal stabilizer trim control section for When the TE flaps are up, the elevator tab balances the
more information about the elevator neutral shift elevator. As the elevator moves, the tab moves in a
functional description. (AMM PART I 27-41) direction opposite to the elevator direction.
Elevator Feel Computer Inputs Elevator Tab Control Mechanism
The elevator feel computer receives these inputs: When the TE flaps are not up, the elevator tab control
mechanism changes the function of the elevator tab.
- Pressure from hydraulic system A and system B This causes the elevator tab to move in the same
- Pitot pressure from the pitot tubes direction that the elevator moves.
27-31-00-002.fm
- Mechanical input from the stabilizer.
27-31-00
- 482 -

CONTROL
COLUMN (2) PITCH CWS FORCE ELEVATOR TAB
FCC (2)
TRANSDUCER (2) CONTROL
MECHANISM (2)
AUTOPILOT ELEVATOR NEUTRAL ELEVATOR SURFACE ELEVATOR

ACTUATOR (2) SHIFT SENSOR POSITION SENSOR TAB (2)
FEEL AND
ELEVATOR ELEVATOR (2)
CENTERING PCU (2)
UNIT
MACH TRIM
ACTUATOR DUAL FEEL
ACTUATOR
ELEVATOR
POSITION
TRANSMITTER (2)
CONTROL
COLUMN ELEVATOR
POSITION EFSM STABILIZER FEEL
SENSOR (2) COMPUTER
FDAU
SMYD HYDRAULIC PITOT HYDRAULIC

SYSTEM A TUBE (2) SYSTEM B
LEGEND
27-31-00-002.fm
ELECTRICAL
MECHANICAL
HYDRAULIC
PNEUMATIC
ELEVATOR AND TAB CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-31-00
- 483 -
ELEVATOR AND TAB CONTROL SYSTEM -- CONTROL COLUMN AND ELEVATOR FORWARD CONTROL QUADRANT
27-31-00-004.fm
27-31-00
- 484 -

Purpose Functional Description
Each pilot uses a control column for pitch control The control columns move the forward input torque tube.
through the elevator forward control quadrants. This moves the elevator forward control quadrants and
the cables to control the elevator position.
Location
The column balance weights balance out the weight of
The two control columns are in the flight compartment. the upper part of the control column. This prevents
The elevator forward control quadrants are under the elevator input from the weight of the control column
flight compartment. when the pilot does not make a control input.
Physical Description When the forward input torque tube moves, it gives a
mechanical input to the column cutout switch modules.
The control columns extend through the flight Each column cutout switch module also has a position
compartment floor and attach to the elevator forward sensor that sends column position signals to the FCCs.
control quadrants. The balance weights attach on each
forward control quadrant. There is a pitch CWS force See the horizontal stabilizer trim control section for
transducer in each forward control quadrant. The pitch more information on the column cutout switch
CWS force transducer sends signals to the flight modules.(AMM PART I 27-41)
control computers (FCC) proportional to the column
force. Elevator Breakout Mechanism
See the digital flight control system section for more The elevator breakout mechanism attaches to the forward
information on the pitch force transducer.(AMM PART I input torque tube. The breakout mechanism separates the
22-11) left and right sides of the input torque tube. This
allows elevator control if one column has a jam.
The elevator control cables attach at the lower surface
of the quadrants. Each cable attaches to the quadrant. The breakout mechanism is a cam-roller type. The cam
Elevator up cables (EB) go directly aft. Elevator down connects to the captain torque tube. The roller
cables (EA) go forward around the turnaround pulley and connects to an arm of the first officer torque tube.
27-31-00-004.fm
then go aft. The two springs hold the roller at the detent position.
The pilot must supply 31 pounds of additional force to
27-31-00
- 485 -
extend the springs during a jam. When 100 pounds is
applied, the elevator moves 4 degrees.
During normal operation, a control column moves and

operates both torque tubes together. If one column has
a jam, the other column can still move after the pilot
overcomes the breakout force of the two springs.
27-31-00-004.fm
27-31-00
- 486 -

ELEVATOR
CONTROL
CABLES
COLUMN CUTOUT ELEVATOR

SWITCH MODULE CONTROL
AND POSITION COLUMN (2)
SENSOR (2)
FORWARD
INPUT
TORQUE
TUBE
FLIGHT
COMPARTMENT
FLOOR (REF)
SPRING
(2)
EA
EB
CAM ELEVATOR
EA BALANCE
27-31-00-004.fm
PITCH CWS FORCE WEIGHTS (2)
TRANSDUCER (2)
ROLLER ELEVATOR EB
FORWARD CONTROL
BREAKOUT MECHANISM QUADRANT (2)
ELEVATOR AND TAB CONTROL SYSTEM - CONTROL COLUMN AND ELEVATOR FORWARD CONTROL QUADRANT
27-31-00
- 487 -
ELEVATOR AND TAB CONTROL SYSTEM -- ELEVATOR INPUT TORQUE TUBE
Purpose - Flight Control Computer neutral shift trim
position to the mach trim actuator through the
The elevator input torque tube transmits elevator elevator feel and centering unit.
inputs to the elevator PCUs.
When the elevator aft control quadrants move, they move
Location the elevator input torque tube. This moves the elevator
PCU input pogos.
The elevator input torque tube is the bottom of the two
elevator torque tubes in the empennage.
The elevator input torque tube has these components:
- Elevator aft control quadrants (2)

- Autopilot input crank
- Elevator feel and centering unit crank
- Elevator PCU input cranks (4).
The elevator input torque tube receives these inputs:
- Pilot inputs through the elevator aft control

quadrants
- Autopilot inputs through the elevator autopilot
actuator input crank
- Stabilizer position from the neutral shift rods
through the elevator feel and centering unit
- Mach trim actuator position through the elevator
27-31-00-005.fm
feel and centering unit
27-31-00
- 488 -

AUTOPILOT
ACTUATORS (2)
(REF) MACH TRIM
ACTUATOR
ELEVATOR FEEL AND
CENTERING UNIT
NEUTRAL EBL
SHIFT SENSOR
EAL
CONNECTION
TO STABILIZER
ELEVATOR STABILIZER
PCU (2) NEUTRAL
AUTOPILOT SHIFT RODS (2)
ACTUATOR
INPUT ROD EBR
ELEVATOR AFT
CONTROL
QUADRANT (2)
ELEVATOR PCU
INPUT POGO (4)
ELEVATOR
A/P INPUT EAR
CRANK STABILIZER ELEVATOR
POSITION PCU INPUT
ELEVATOR FEEL AND SENSOR (2)
CENTERING UNIT CRANK (4)
27-31-00-005.fm
INPUT CRANK
ELEVATOR ELEVATOR SURFACE
DUAL FEEL POSITION SENSOR
ACTUATOR INPUT TORQUE FWD
TUBE (NOT SHOWN)
ELEVATOR AND TAB CONTROL SYSTEM - ELEVATOR INPUT TORQUE TUBE
27-31-00
- 489 -
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION
Purpose FDAU - flight data acquisition unit
gnd - ground
The horizontal stabilizer controls the pitch trim of LE - leading edge
the airplane around the lateral axis.
Location NLG - nose landing gear
The horizontal stabilizer is on the aft section of the S/B - speedbrake
fuselage. sec - section
SOV - shutoff valve
Trim Control
sw - switch
The pilots manually control the position of the stab - stabilizer
horizontal stabilizer with the stabilizer trim TE - trailing edge
switches. The pilots can also use the stabilizer trim vlv - valve
wheels on each side of the control stand. xfer - transfer
When the autopilot engages, it controls the position of

the horizontal stabilizer. During autopilot or main
electric operation the actuator causes a backdrive of
the stabilizer trim wheels.
apl - airplane
actr - actuator
A/P - autopilot
A/S - airspeed
C/W - control wheel
27-41-00-001.fm
cntl - control
27-41-00
- 490 -

ELEVATOR (2)
LATERAL
AXIS
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
PITCH
27-41-00-001.fm
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION
27-41-00
- 491 -
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-41-00-002.fm
27-41-00
- 492 -

General the main electric and autopilot movement of the
stabilizer.
The pilots control the horizontal stabilizer manually
with the stabilizer trim wheels or electrically by the See the digital flight recorder system section for more
stabilizer trim switches. The autopilot controls the information about the stabilizer position sensor A and
stabilizer automatically through the digital flight the FDAU. (AMM PART I 31-31)
control system (DFCS).
Autopilot Operation
Manual Operation - Stabilizer Trim Wheels
The DFCS gives electric input to the stabilizer trim
The pilots use the stabilizer trim wheels on the actuator. During autopilot operation, the stabilizer
control stand to manually move the forward and aft trim actuator operates at a different rate than during
cable drums. The aft cable drum moves the gearbox and manual electric operation. Stabilizer position sensors
jackscrew. When the jackscrew moves, the horizontal A and B send signals to the flight control computers
stabilizer moves. The stabilizer also gives a (FCCs) in the DFCS. Stabilizer position sensor A sends
mechanical input to the elevator through the neutral stabilizer position to FCC A and the FDAU. Stabilizer
shift rods. Movement of the manual trim wheels also position sensor B sends stabilizer position to FCC B.
moves the stabilizer indicator pointer.
Electric Operation - Stabilizer Trim Switches information on the stabilizer autopilot operation, the
FCCs, and the stabilizer position sensors A and B. (AMM
The pilots operate two stabilizer trim switches for PART I 22-11)
main electric trim control. The switches are on the
outboard side of each control wheel. The switches Column Cutout Switches
control electric input to the stabilizer trim actuator
and send signals to the flight data acquisition unit The column cutout switches stop the stabilizer trim
(FDAU). When the trim actuator operates, it moves the actuator when the pilot moves the control column in a
stabilizer gearbox. When the stabilizer gearbox moves, direction opposite to the trim direction.
it moves the stabilizer jackscrew which moves the
horizontal stabilizer. The gearbox also back drives the
27-41-00-002.fm
stabilizer aft and forward cable drums. Movement of the
forward cable drum moves the manual trim wheels and
stabilizer indicator pointer. Limit switches control
27-41-00
- 493 -
Stabilizer Trim Override Switch
The pilots use the stabilizer trim override switch on

the aisle stand to bypass the column cutout switches if
one or both fail.
Stabilizer Trim Cutout Switches
The pilots use the stabilizer trim cutout switches on

the control stand to stop the main electric and
autopilot trim inputs to the stabilizer trim actuator.
Flaps Up Switch
The flaps up switch controls the main electric

operation speed of the stabilizer trim actuator. The
autopilot electric control of the stabilizer trim
actuator does not go through the flaps up switch.
Stabilizer Trim Limit Switches
The stabilizer trim limit switches limit the range of

stabilizer motion.
27-41-00-002.fm
27-41-00
- 494 -

STAB TRIM
COLUMN CUTOUT
SWITCH (2) OVERRIDE
NORMAL
STAB TRIM STAB TRIM OVERRIDE SW

MAIN AUTO
ELECT NORMAL PILOT
FDAU FCC (2)
CUT
OUT
STABILIZER
TRIM SWITCHES
FLAPS UP STABILIZER STABILIZER
SWITCH POSITION POSITION
SENSOR A SENSOR B
STABILIZER
TRIM LIMIT
SWITCH (5)
STABILIZER STABILIZER
STABILIZER JACKSCREW/
TRIM ACTUATOR STABILIZER
STABILIZER GEARBOX
TRIM WHEELS
STABILIZER
27-41-00-002.fm
STABILIZER AFT
FWD CABLE DRUM CABLE DRUM ELEVATOR
SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL
MECHANICAL STABILIZER TRIM ACTUATOR
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-41-00
- 495 -
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- FORWARD CONTROL MECHANISM
Purpose Indication
The pilot uses the stabilizer forward control mechanism When the forward control mechanism moves, it moves a
for manual input. jackshaft through a flexible cable that transmits
motion to a linkage that moves the indicator needle.
Location These are the greenband limits:
The forward control mechanism is in the flight - Nose up limit is 2.05 units
compartment and the forward equipment compartment. - Nose down limit is 8.50 units.
Physical Description Training Information Point
The forward control mechanism has these components: The forward cable drum is on a housing that attaches to
structure by two horizontal and two vertical suspension
- Stabilizer trim wheels on control stand (2) points. Use the adjustable turnbuckles at these points
- Sprocket to align the forward mechanism and adjust the tension
- Chain assembly in the chain and cable.
- Forward cable drum.
The trim wheels and the sprocket attach on a spline to

a control wheel shaft.
When the pilot turns the trim wheels, this moves the
sprocket and chain and causes movement of the forward
cable drum. This moves the cables that go to the aft
cable drum. The aft cable drum moves and causes
movement of the gearbox and jackscrew and the
stabilizer.
27-41-00-005.fm
27-41-00
- 496 -

STABILIZER TRIM
STAB
WHEEL (2) TRIM
INDICATOR APL
NEEDLE (2) NOSE
DOWN
0
TAKE-OFF
STABILIZER TRIM 5
WHEEL SHAFT
INDICATOR
CHAIN LINKAGE 10
APL
NOSE
15 UP
FORWARD
CABLE DRUM STAB TRIM
INDICATOR (2)
ADJUSTABLE TURNBUCKLES
AT HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL
SUSPENSION POINTS (4)
27-41-00-005.fm
FORWARD EQUIPMENT
COMPARTMENT ACCESS DOOR
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - FORWARD CONTROL MECHANISM
27-41-00
- 497 -
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- CUTOUT SWITCHES
Purpose - Forward to 3.3 degrees
- Aft to 3.7 degrees
The stabilizer trim cutout switches and column cutout
switch modules disable stabilizer electric trim. The AUTO PILOT trim stops when the column is moved:
stabilizer trim override switch lets you do a bypass of
the column cutout switch modules. - Forward to 3.3 degrees
- Aft to 5.5 degrees
Location
Stabilizer Trim Override Switch
The stabilizer trim cutout switches are on the control
stand. The column cutout switch modules are in the The stabilizer trim override switch does a bypass of
forward equipment compartment. The stabilizer trim the column cutout switch modules. The pilot uses this
override switch is on the aisle stand. switch to operate the MAIN ELECT trim if the two column
cutout switch module has failed.
Stabilizer Trim Cutout Switches
The pilot uses the stabilizer trim cutout switches to

stop a runaway trim condition. The MAIN ELECT stab trim
cutout switch stops the stabilizer main electric
operation. The AUTO PILOT stab trim cutout switch stops
the stabilizer autopilot operation.
Column Cutout Switch Module (2)
The column cutout switch module have a set of cam-

operated switches. One for MAIN ELECT and one for AUTO
PILOT. The column cutout switch module also has two
relays. When the control column moves in the opposite
direction from the stabilizer trim direction, electric
trim stops.
27-41-00-006.fm
MAIN ELECT trim stops when the column is moved:
27-41-00
- 498 -

STAB TRIM
MAIN NORMAL AUTO
ELECT PILOT
CUT
OUT
STABILIZER TRIM
CUTOUT SWITCHES
COLUMN CUTOUT
SWITCH MODULES
STAB TRIM
OVERRIDE
27-41-00-006.fm
NORMAL
STAB TRIM OVERRIDE SWITCH (P8)
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - CUTOUT SWITCHES
27-41-00
- 499 -
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- AFT COMPONENTS
Purpose Functional Description - Input
The horizontal stabilizer trim control system The pilot or autopilot controls the stabilizer trim
components in the aft section of the airplane move the actuator. The pilot also controls the aft cable drum
leading edge of the stabilizer position with the stabilizer trim wheels. This is the
priority for control of the stabilizer:
Location
- Manual
The horizontal stabilizer components are in section 48, - Electric
aft of the rear pressure bulkhead. - Autopilot.
Physical Description The jackscrew gearbox receives inputs from the

stabilizer manual trim wheel cables and the stabilizer
The horizontal stabilizer components are: trim actuator. The stabilizer manual trim wheel cables
turn the aft cable drum. The aft cable drum or the
- Aft cable drum stabilizer trim actuator turns gears in the gearbox to
- Gimbal (2) turn the jackscrew. When the jackscrew turns, the
- Stabilizer trim actuator leading edge of the stabilizer moves. The gimbals
- Ball nut permit fore and aft motion of the jackscrew as the
- Jackscrew stabilizer moves.
- Safety rod.
Functional Description - Brakes
The gearbox connects to the bulkhead in the fuselage by
the lower gimbal. The upper gimbal connects the ball The gearbox has two internal brakes and a mechanical
nut to the stabilizer front spar fitting. clutch. Both of the brakes are ratchet type brakes. The
clutch lets the stabilizer manual trim wheel input
The stabilizer trim actuator is a multi-speed DC motor. override the stabilizer trim actuator input.
It receives commands from the stab trim control switch
or the autopilot.
27-41-00-007.fm
27-41-00
- 500 -

SAFETY ROD
BALL NUT
HORIZONTAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
STABILIZER
UPPER JACKSCREW
GIMBAL
STAB TRIM
ACTUATOR GEARBOX
ACCESS THROUGH
SECTION 48 ACCESS
AND BLOWOUT DOOR
LOWER
GIMBAL
AFT CABLE DRUM
27-41-00-007.fm
STABILIZER MANUAL
TRIM WHEEL CABLES
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - AFT COMPONENTS
27-41-00
- 501 -
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- STABILIZER TRIM LIMIT SWITCHES
Purpose - S132 - Nose up takeoff warning switch; the switch
operates at 8.75 units
The stabilizer trim limit switches limit the range of - S144 - Nose up autopilot limit switch; the switch
horizontal stabilizer motion. There are different operates at 14.50 units.
limits for manual, autopilot, and for flaps up and
flaps down. The takeoff warning switches tell the pilot NOTE: The stabilizer trim limit switches are
if the stabilizer position is incorrect at takeoff. adjustable.
Location
The stabilizer trim limit switches are on the left side

of the horizontal stabilizer jackscrew attach fitting.
The five switches are on vertical brackets attached to

structure. They are cam operated microswitches. The cam
is on a support tube that is connected to the
stabilizer center section jackscrew attach fitting.
The cam moves with the horizontal stabilizer and

operates these five switches:
- S145 - Nose down autopilot and flaps not up

electrical limit switch; the switch operates at
0.05 units
- S546 - Nose down takeoff warning switch; the
switch operates at 1.80 units
27-41-00-010.fm
- S844 - Nose down flaps up electrical limit switch;
the switch operates at 3.95 units
27-41-00
- 502 -

HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER NOSE DOWN LIMIT
SWITCHES
- TAKEOFF WARNING (S546)
- AUTOPILOT AND FLAPS
NOT UP (S145)
- FLAPS UP (S844)
ACTUATING CAM
NOSE UP LIMIT
SWITCHES
- TAKEOFF WARNING (S132)
- AUTOPILOT AND
ELECTRIC (S144)
27-41-00-010.fm
FWD
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - STABILIZER TRIM LIMIT SWITCHES
27-41-00
- 503 -
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM -- FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Manual Operation - Stabilizer Trim Switches assembly which moves the mach trim actuator. When the
mach trim actuator moves because of the neutral shift
The pilots operate the stabilizer trim control switches rod input, it acts as a link and turns the elevator
for main electric pitch trim control. The switches are feel and centering unit housing. This makes a new
on the outboard side of each control wheel. This gives neutral position for the elevators.
electric input to the stabilizer trim actuator. The
motor operates and drives the gearbox and stabilizer Each rod also provides protection in both directions
jackscrew. The stabilizer pivots at each rear spar. A (push or pull) if there is jam between the stabilizer
ball nut attached to the front spar moves the and the elevator feel and centering unit. The pilot
stabilizer to a maximum of 4.2 degrees leading edge up must supply 180 pounds of additional force to extend or
and 16.9 degrees leading edge down. compress the springs inside the rods. The breakout
force of each rod is 90 pounds.
During electric trim operation, if the pilot gives an
opposite direction elevator control input, column See the elevator and tab control system section for
cutout switches in the column switching modules make more information on the elevator operation.(AMM PART I
the stabilizer electric trim stop. 27-31)
Manual Operation - Stabilizer Trim Wheels
The pilots use the stabilizer trim wheels for manual

pitch trim control. The wheels are on each side of the
control stand. Operation of the stabilizer trim wheels
moves a chain that drives the forward cable drum. The
forward cable drum moves the cables connected to the
aft cable drum. When the aft cable drum moves, it
drives the gearbox, jackscrew, and stabilizer.
Elevator Neutral Shift Input
The elevator neutral shift rods are pogo type control
27-41-00-012.fm
rods with a spring inside. When the stabilizer moves,
it moves the two elevator neutral shift rods. The
neutral shift rods move a torque tube and crank
27-41-00
- 504 -

HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
ELEVATOR
HORIZONTAL TORQUE TUBE

STABILIZER AND CRANK
ASSEMBLY
STABILIZER TRIM
CONTROL SWITCH (2)
STABILIZER MACH TRIM
TRIM WHEEL (2) ACTUATOR
COLUMN
SWITCHING ELECTRIC
MODULE (2) STAB TRIM
ACTUATOR JACKSCREW
ELEVATOR
AFT CABLE NEUTRAL
DRUM SHIFT RODS
GEARBOX
27-41-00-012.fm
STABILIZER TRIM ELEVATOR
FORWARD CONTROL CABLES CONTROL
CABLE DRUM CABLES
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
27-41-00
- 505 -
TE FLAP SYSTEM -- POSITION INDICATING SYSTEM - FLAP POSITION TRANSMITTER
Purpose Functional Description
The flap position transmitters send flap position data The flap position transmitter outputs are 0 resolver
to these components: degrees when the TE flaps are up and 270 resolver
degrees when the TE flaps are at 40. The resolver
- FSEU degrees increase as the TE flaps extend.
- FCCs (2)
- SMYDs (2). Training Information Point
Location The alignment marks in the rig indicator windows must

align before installation. If they do not, you must
There are two flap position transmitters. The position push on the shaft lock and turn the shaft until the
transmitters are at the left and right ends of the flap alignment marks are aligned. To do this, it may be
drive system, on transmissions 1 and 8. To get access, necessary to turn the shaft up to 800 turns.
extend the TE flaps.
If you disconnect the flap torque tubes and manually
Physical Description move the TE flaps, you must rig the flap position
transmitters when you connect the torque tubes again.
Each flap position transmitter is a shaft driven unit
consisting of a gear reducer driving three cam operated
resolvers. Each resolver uses 28v ac, 400 Hz
excitation. The excitation power for each resolver
comes from a different computer. The unit is brushless,
has no internal stops, and is capable of continuous
rotation.
Each flap position transmitter has a locking device to

keep the input shaft at the rig position. It also has
two rig indicator windows. When the transmitter is
installed, the locking device is disengaged.
27-58-00-002.fm
Each flap position transmitter weighs 1.8 lbs.
27-58-00
- 506 -

FLAP FAIRING 1
FWD
RIG INDICATOR
WINDOWS
OUTBD FWD
A
FLAP POSITION
TRANSMITTER RIG INDICATOR
WINDOWS
INPUT
SHAFT
27-58-00-002.fm
A-A
A PUSH HERE TO RELEASE SHAFT
SHAFT LOCK LOCK
FLAP POSITION TRANSMITTER
TE FLAP SYSTEM - POSITION INDICATING SYSTEM - FLAP POSITION TRANSMITTER
27-58-00
- 507 -
TE FLAP SYSTEM -- POSITION INDICATING SYSTEM - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
General See the stall warning system for more information about
the SMYDs. See the autoflight chapter for more
There are two flap position transmitters. Each has information about the FCCs and the IFSAU.
three internal resolvers. The resolvers have interfaces
with these components:
- FSEU
- Stall management yaw damper (SMYD) 1 and 2
- Flight control computer (FCC) A and B
- Integrated flight systems accessory unit (IFSAU).
The FSEU uses flap position data from the flap position
transmitters to control the left and right pointers in
the flap position indicator. The FSEU uses inputs from
the asymmetry detection monitor. If the TE flaps are in
an asymmetry condition, the FSEU changes the signals to
one of the pointers in the flap position indicator.
This causes the pointers to be less than 15 degrees
apart during a TE flap asymmetry.
The FSEU also uses inputs from the flap skew monitor.
If the TE flaps are in a skew condition, the FSEU
changes the signals to one of the pointers in the flap
position indicator. This causes the pointers to be 15
degrees apart during a TE flap skew.
The position transmitters receive excitation power from

the IFSAU.
27-58-00-004.fm
27-58-00
- 508 -

28V AC
XFR BUS 2
SECT 2
TE FLAP POS/
SKEW SNSR &
IND-L
P6 CB PANEL
SMYD 2 FLAP SKEW
DETECTION
FCC-A
LEFT
POINTER
IFSAU
TE FLAP
L FLAP POS XMTR POSITION
INDICATION
RIGHT
FCC-B POINTER
IFSAU
FLAP FLAP POSITION

ASYMMETRY INDICATOR (P2)
SMYD 1 DETECTION
28V AC
XFR BUS 2
SECT 2
27-58-00-004.fm
TE FLAP POS/
SKEW SNSR & R FLAP POS XMTR FSEU (E1-1)
IND-R
P6 CB PANEL
TE FLAP SYSTEM - POSITION INDICATING SYSTEM - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
27-58-00
- 509 -
FLIGHT SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION
General ft - feet
fwd - forward
The spoilers help the ailerons control airplane roll Hz - Hertz
around the longitudinal axis. They also supply
speedbrake control to decrease lift and increase drag
during landing and refused takeoff. outbd - outboard
There are six spoilers on each wing. There is one PSEU - proximity switch electronics unit
spoiler inboard of each engine strut and five spoilers REF - reference
outboard of each engine strut. Each spoiler has a RUD - rudder
number, 1 through 12 (from left to right). The ground
STBY - standby
spoilers are the most outboard and the most inboard
spoiler on each wing. All the other spoilers are flight TE - trailing edge
spoilers. v - volts
Roll Control
During roll control the flight spoilers on one wing

move up, and all the other spoilers stay down.
The pilots manually control roll with the control

wheels. When the autopilot is in command, the autopilot
give commands to the flight spoilers.
ac - alternating current
alt - altitude
AMM - aircraft maintenance manual
27-61-00-001.fm
dc - direct current
27-61-00
- 510 -

AILERON
FLIGHT
SPOILERS
(8 TO 11)
GROUND
SPOILERS
(7 AND 12)
FLIGHT
SPOILERS
(2 TO 5)
AILERON
GROUND
SPOILERS
(1 AND 6)
LONGITUDINAL
27-61-00-001.fm
AXIS
FLIGHT SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION
27-61-00
- 511 -
FLIGHT SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-61-00-002.fm
27-61-00
- 512 -

General actuators move the flight spoilers only if there is a
large trim.
The flight crew uses the control wheels and speedbrake
lever to move the flight spoilers. The autopilot See the ailerons section for more information on the
controls them when it is engaged. aileron and aileron trim control system.
Manual Operation - Control Wheels Autopilot Operation
The flight crew uses the control wheels to control the When the autopilot system is engaged, it gives
roll attitude of the airplane. The control wheel gives mechanical input to the aileron system. The aileron
mechanical input through the feel and centering unit to PCUs supply inputs to the flight spoiler actuators. The
the aileron power control units (PCUs). The aileron actuators move the flight spoilers if the flight
PCUs supply mechanical inputs through the spoiler mixer control computers (FCCs) command is for more than a
and ratio changer to the flight spoiler actuators. specified movement of the control wheel.
Hydraulic pressure from the spoiler shutoff valves goes
to the actuators. After a specified movement of the See the ailerons section for more information on the
control wheel, a control valve in each flight spoiler aileron autopilot operation.
actuator lets hydraulic power move the actuators. Each
actuator moves a flight spoiler. Speedbrake Operation
You use the spoiler shutoff switches on the P5 aft The flight crew uses the speedbrake lever to control
overhead panel to close the spoiler shutoff valves. the speedbrake operation. The speedbrake lever supplies
This stops the hydraulic power to the flight spoiler mechanical inputs through the spoiler mixer and ratio
actuators, and the flight spoilers move down. changer to the flight spoiler actuators. The spoiler
mixer mixes the control wheel input with the speedbrake
There is no manual reversion for the flight spoilers. lever input. The actuators symmetrically move the
flight spoilers on each wing.
Manual Operation - Aileron Trim
See the speedbrake control system section for more
During aileron trim the aileron trim switches cause the information on the speedbrake control system.
27-61-00-002.fm
trim actuator to move the feel and centering unit. This
movement goes to the flight spoiler actuators. The When the speedbrake handle moves, it gives an input to
the speedbrake lever position sensor. The speedbrake
27-61-00
- 513 -
lever position sensor gives an input to the proximity
switch electronics unit (PSEU) and the flight data
acquisition unit (FDAU).
When the flight spoilers move, they give an input to

the spoiler position transmitters and the spoiler
position sensors. The spoiler position transmitters
give an input to the FDAU. The spoiler position sensors
give an input to the FCCs.
See the air/ground system for more information about

the PSEU.
See the flight data recorder system for more

information on the FDAU.
27-61-00-002.fm
27-61-00
- 514 -

AILERON SPOILER
A B
LEFT RIGHT
CONTROL WHEELS WING WING OFF OFF
DOWN DOWN
ON ON
AILERON TRIM
SWITCHES (P8) SPOILER SHUTOFF
SPEEDBRAKE LEVER SWITCHES (P5)
POSITION SENSOR
SPEEDBRAKE LEVER
AILERON SPOILER SHUTOFF
TRIM PSEU VALVES (2)
ACTUATOR
FEEL AND SPOILER MIXER FLIGHT SPOILER

CENTERING AILERON
PCU (2) AND RATIO CHANGER ACTUATORS (8)
UNIT
AILERON SPOILER POSITION

AUTOPILOT FDAU TRANSMITTERS (2)
ACTUATOR (2)
27-61-00-002.fm
SPOILER POSITION
FCC (2) SENSORS (2) FLIGHT SPOILERS (8)
FLIGHT SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 1
27-61-00
- 515 -
General mixer then sends the flight spoiler commands back to
the ratio changer and sends the ground spoiler commands
These are the components of the flight spoiler control to the ground spoiler control valve. The ground spoiler
system: control valve permits the ground spoilers to operate.
- Spoiler control quadrant See the speedbrake control system section for more
- Spoiler ratio changer information on the ground spoilers and the ground
- Spoiler mixer spoiler control valve.(AMM PART I 27-62)
- Flight spoiler actuator quadrants
- Flight spoiler actuators. Flight Spoiler Actuator Quadrants
The flight spoiler control system receives inputs from The flight spoiler actuator quadrants send the commands
the control wheels and the speedbrake lever. to the flight spoiler actuators.
Spoiler Control Quadrant Flight Spoiler Actuators
The spoiler control quadrant receives inputs from the The flight spoiler actuators use hydraulic power to
control wheels and the aileron PCUs through the aileron move the flight spoilers.
spring cartridge. The quadrant sends these inputs to
the spoiler ratio changer.
Spoiler Ratio Changer
The spoiler ratio changer receives inputs from the

spoiler control quadrant and the speedbrake lever. The
ratio changer sends the commands to the spoiler mixer.
The commands then go from the spoiler mixer through the
ratio changer to the flight spoiler actuator quadrants.
Spoiler Mixer
27-61-00-003.fm
The spoiler mixer combines the inputs from the spoiler
control quadrant and the speedbrake lever. The spoiler
27-61-00
- 516 -

11
10
9
8
GROUND SPOILER
CONTROL VALVE
SPOILER RATIO
CHANGER
SPOILER CONTROL SPOILER
QUADRANT MIXER 5 FLIGHT
4 SPOILER
3 ACTUATOR
SPEEDBRAKE 2
CONTROL LEVER
WHEEL
AILERON
SPRING
CARTRIDGE
FLIGHT SPOILER
ACTUATOR QUADRANT
BODY
QUADRANT
27-61-00-003.fm AILERON PCU
FLIGHT SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL DESCRIPTION - 2
27-61-00
- 517 -
FLIGHT SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM -- FLIGHT SPOILERS
Purpose The flight spoilers are at their maximum positions when
the control wheel is turned more than 70 degrees or
The flight spoilers help control the roll of the when the speedbrake lever is moved to the UP position.
airplane.
Flight spoilers 2, 3, 10, and 11 move up a maximum of 33
Location degrees in-flight and 56 degrees on-ground. Flight
spoilers 4, 5, 8, and 9 move up a maximum of 38 degrees
Each spoiler has a number, 1 through 12 (from left to in-flight and 65 degrees on-ground.
right). There are four flight spoilers on each wing.
The flight spoilers are at the fixed trailing edge of Training Information Point
the wings, between the engine struts and the ailerons.
When you rig the spoilers, keep a small gap between the
Physical Description spoiler and the TE flap.
The flight spoilers are made of composite materials. When you do maintenance around the spoilers, obey this
They are not interchangeable. warning:
Functional Description WARNING: DO NOT PUT A PART OF YOUR BODY BETWEEN THE
SPOILER AND THE WING UNLESS YOU REMOVE THE
The flight spoilers operate in the air and on the HYDRAULIC POWER. MOVEMENT OF THE SPOILERS CAN
ground. They use inputs from the control wheel, CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS.
autopilot, and the speedbrake lever.
The flight spoilers start to move up during these

conditions:
- Flight crew turns the control wheel

- Autopilot actuators make an input
- Speedbrake lever is moved more than the ARMED
detent.
27-61-00-011.fm
27-61-00
- 518 -

SPOILER 2 3 4 5
FWD
SPOILER PANEL
SPOILER UP
SPOILER DOWN
27-61-00-011.fm
FLIGHT SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM - FLIGHT SPOILERS
27-61-00
- 519 -

BK-737FSL-301R1-AP-1of2-82900 (Recuperado) (Recuperado 1)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BK-737FSL-301R1-AP-1of2-82900 (Recuperado) (Recuperado 1)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BK-737FSL-301R1-AP-1of2-82900 (Recuperado) (Recuperado 1)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

737-600/700/800/900 TRAINING MANUAL

YAW DAMPER SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

YAW DAMPER SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

The FMC gives airplane gross weight to the SMYDs for

Trailing Edge Flaps Up Limit Switch

The trailing edge flaps up limit switches send data to

The 2 SMYDs are the same. When a SMYD LRU is in position

For primary yaw damping, the 2 SMYDs must be in

For operation of the WTRIS and standby yaw damping

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

FLT CONTROL STANDBY HYD

YAW AUTO SLAT

YDS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The yaw damper engage switch and the disengage light

Yaw Damper Indicator

The yaw damper indicator is on the P2 panel.

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

FLT CONTROL STANDBY HYD

DISENGAGE LIGHT YAW DAMPER

YAW AUTO SLAT

FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL

YDS - FLIGHT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION

SMYD 1 and 2 are on the E3-2 shelf in the electronic

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

YDS - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION

These yaw damper components are on the main rudder PCU

- Yaw damper solenoid valve

Access to these yaw damper components is from an access

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

MAIN RUDDER PCU

LVDT (NOT SHOWN)

YDS - VERTICAL STABILIZER COMPONENT LOCATION

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

Digital Data Analog Signals

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

P18 CIRCUIT BREAKER COMMAND SIGNALS EHSV

The yaw damper solenoid valve on the main rudder PCU

These are the three hydraulic ports in the solenoid:

- Input pressure port for input hydraulic pressure

An electrical connector connects the solenoid valve to

When the yaw damper is engaged, the SMYD sends 28v dc

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

HYDRAULIC OUTPUT PORT

INPUT PRESSURE PORT

YDS - MAIN RUDDER PCU ACTUATOR - SOLENOID VALVE

For primary yaw damping, the electrohydraulic servo

These are the four hydraulic ports on the EHSV:

- Input port for jet pipe controller/control spool

A four pin electrical connector the SMYD computer to

When an electrical signal for yaw damping comes from

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

INPUT PRESSURE PORT

YDS - MAIN RUDDER PCU - ELECTROHYDRAULIC SERVO VALVE

Physical Description - ON/OFF key to turn ON the BITE

Bite instructions on the front of the SMYD LRU describe

For more information on BITE, see the section on BITE

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details